َ‫تَسَهَيَلََالنَحَو‬

TASHEEL AL-NAHW
ver 2.1
 َ‫تَسَهَيَلََالنَحَو‬
TASHEEL AL-NAHW
ver 2.1

based on
‘Ilm al-Nahw of Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali

Revised by
‘Aamir Bashir
 Copyright © Dār al-Sa‘ādah Publications 2011
First Online Edition Jul 2011
Second Online Edition Jul 2012
Version 2.1 Jan 2014
Updated Dec 2014

ilmresources.wordpress.com

“General and unrestricted permission is granted for the unaltered

duplication, distribution, and transmission of this text.”

In Plain English: Make as many copies as you want.

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents i
List of Tables vii
Acknowledgments ix
Foreword xi
ُ‫ات الا َعَربِيَّة‬ ِ ‫ – اَاِْل‬Arabic Terms
ُ ‫صط ََل َح‬
‫ا‬ xiii

CHAPTER 1 1
1.1. ‫ح ُو‬
‫ – اَلنَّ ا‬Arabic Grammar 1
1.2 ُ‫ – اَلا َكلِ َمة‬The Word 2
‫ – اِ اسم‬Noun 2
‫ – فِ اعل‬Verb 3
‫ – َح ارف‬Particle 3
1.3 4
ِ ‫ – أَقاسام‬Types of Noun
‫اْل اس ِم‬ َُ 4
‫ – أَقا َس ُام الا ِف اع ِل‬Types of Verb 4
‫ف‬ِ ‫الر‬
‫ – أَقا َس ُام اَا‬Types of Particle 4
1.4 ُ َ‫ – اَ اْلُ َم ُل َوالا ُمَرَّكب‬Sentences and Phrases
‫ات‬ 6
1.4.1 ‫َبيَِّة‬ ََِ‫اْلُ املَ ِة ا اْل‬
‫أَقا َس ُام ا‬ 6
‫ – جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬Nominal Sentence 6
‫ – جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬Verbal Sentence 7
1.4.2 ‫شائِيَّ ِة‬ َ ‫اْلُ املَ ِةَا ِلنا‬
‫أَقا َس ُام ا‬ 8
1.4.3 ‫ص‬ ِ ِ‫ب النَّاق‬ ِ ‫ – أَقاس ُام الامرَّك‬Types of Phrases
َُ َ 9
1. ‫صاي ِفي‬ ِ ‫ – اَلامرَّكب التَّو‬Descriptive Phrase
‫َُ ُ ا‬ 9
2. ‫اف‬ ِ‫ض‬
َ ‫ال‬ ِ‫ – اَلامرَّكب ا‬Possessive Phrase
ُ َُ 9
3. ‫شا ِري‬ َ ‫ال‬ِ‫ – اَلامرَّكب ا‬Demonstrative Phrase
ُ َُ 10
4. ‫ الا َع َد ِدي‬/‫ب الابِنَائِي‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُمَرَّك‬Numerical Phrase 10

i
 ِ ‫الصر‬
‫ف‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُمَرَّك‬Indeclinable Phrase
‫ب َمان ُع َّ ا‬
5. 11
1.4.4 Additional Notes About ‫سيَّة‬ ِ‫جلَة اِ ا‬
‫ُا‬ 14
Summary 15
1.5 16
ِ‫ – ع ََلمات ا‬Signs of a Noun
‫اْل اس ِم‬ ُ َ َ 16
‫ات الا ِف اع ِل‬
ُ ‫ – َع ََل َم‬Signs of a Verb 16
‫ف‬ِ ‫الر‬
‫ – َع ََل َمةُ اَا‬Sign of a Particle 16
1.5.1 General Notes 17
1.6 ‫ض َمائُِر‬َّ ‫ – اَل‬Personal Pronouns 19
1.7 ُ‫ارة‬
َّ َ‫اْل‬
‫وف ا‬ ُ ‫ – اَ الُار‬Prepositions 20
1.8 ‫شبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬
َ ‫وف الا ُم‬
ُ ‫ – اَ الُُر‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb 22
1.9 ُ‫صة‬ ِ ُ ‫ – اَالَفا ع‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs
َ ‫ال النَّاق‬ َ 25

CHAPTER 2 27
َ‫ن‬
‫ – اَلَمَعََربََ َو َالمَبَ ي‬Declinable and Indeclinable Words
2.1 27
ِ ‫ال اعر‬
‫اب‬ ِ ُ ‫ – َع ََل َم‬Signs of I‘raab
َ ‫ات ا‬ 27
ِ ‫ت الام اعر‬
‫ب‬ َ ُ ُ ‫ – َح َاْل‬Conditions of Mu‘rab 27
Difference Between ‫ض َّمة‬
َ – ‫ َك اسَرة – فَ ات َحة‬and ‫ضم‬
َ – ‫َك اسر – فَ اتح‬ 28
2.2 ‫ – اَلا َماب ِن‬Indeclinable Word 29
‫اب الا َم َحلِ اي‬ ُ ‫اَاِل اعَر‬ 30
2.3 ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُم اعَر‬Declinable Word 31
ِ ‫ – أَقاسام االَ اس‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
2.4 ‫اء الا َمابنِيَّ ِة‬َ َُ 32
2.4.1 ‫ض َمائُِر‬ َّ ‫ – اَل‬Personal Pronouns 33
2.4.2 ُ‫وصولَة‬
ُ ‫ اَالَ اسَاءُ الا َم‬- Relative Pronouns 39
2.4.3 ِ‫ارة‬ ِ
َ ‫ – أَ اسَاءُ اال َش‬Demonstrative Pronouns 42
ِ ‫ – أَ اسَاء االَفا ع‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs
2.4.4 ‫ال‬ َ ُ 45
ِ ‫ – أَ اساء االَصو‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound
2.4.5 ‫ات‬َ‫َ ُ ا‬ 46

ii
 2.4.6 ‫وف‬
ُ ‫ – اَلظ ُر‬Adverbs 47
ِ ‫الزم‬
‫ان‬ ََّ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ – ظُُراو‬Adverbs of Time 47
ِ ‫ف الام َك‬
‫ان‬ َ ُ ‫ – ظُُراو‬Adverbs of Place 49
2.4.7 ‫ت‬ ِ
ُ ‫ – اَلاكنَ َاَي‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified Quantity 52
2.4.8 ‫ب الابِنَائِي‬ ُ ‫ – اَلا ُمَرَّك‬Numerical phrase 52
ِ ‫ – أَقاسام اَالَ اس‬Types of Declinable Nouns
2.5 ‫اء الا ُم اعَربَِة‬َ َُ 53
‫ص ِرف‬ َ ‫ُمان‬ 53
‫ص ِرف‬ َ ‫َغاي ُر ُمان‬ 53
‫ف‬ِ ‫الصر‬
‫اب َمان ِع َّ ا‬ ُ َ‫أَ اسب‬ 53
2.6 ‫ت‬ ِ ‫َس ِاء الامعرب‬ ِ ِ
َ َ ‫اب أَقا َسام اال اَ ُ ا‬ ُ ‫ – إ اعَر‬I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns 58

CHAPTER 3 61
Further Discussion of Nouns
3.1 ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ – اَاْل اس ُم الا َمان ُس او‬Relative Adjective 61
3.2 ُ‫صغِي‬ ِ
‫ – اَاْل اس ُم الاتَ ا‬Diminutive Noun 63
3.3 ُ‫ – اَلا َم اع ِرفَةُ َوالنَّكَِرة‬Definite and Common Nouns 64

ُ ‫ – اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َذ َّكُر َوالا ُم َؤن‬Masculine and Feminine Nouns

3.4 ‫َّث‬ 65
3.5 ‫احد َوتَثانِيَة َوجَاع‬
ِ ‫ – و‬Singular, Dual and Plural
َ 67
3.6 ‫اْلَ ام ِع‬
‫ – أَقا َس ُام ا‬Types of Plural 68
3.7 ‫ات‬
ُ ‫وع‬
َ ُ‫ اَلا َم ارف‬- Words Which Are Always Marfoo‘ 73
ِ َ‫ – ف‬Subject/Doer
3.7.1 ‫اعل‬ 73
3.7.2 ‫ب الا َفاعِ ِل‬ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ََنئ‬/ ُ‫ – َم افعُ او ُل َما ََلا يُ َس َّم فَاعلُه‬Substitute of ‫فَاعل‬ 75
ِ َ‫ – اِ اسم َما وَْل اَلام َشبَّ َهت‬The Noun of Those ‫ َما‬and ‫َْل‬, Which Are
3.7.3 ‫ي بِ لَايس‬
َ ُ َ ُ 76
Similar to ‫لَايس‬
َ
ِ ‫ – َخبَ ُر َْل اَلَِِّت لِنَ اف ِي ا اْلِان‬The ‫ َخبَ ر‬of That ‫ َْل‬Which Negates an Entire
3.7.4 ‫س‬ 77
‫ا‬
‫( ِجانس‬Class)
3.8 ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ص اوَب‬
ُ ‫ – اَلا َمان‬Words Which Are Always Mansoob 79
3.8.1 ‫ – َم افعُ اول بِِه‬Object 79

iii
 ‫َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق ‪3.8.2‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬
‫َجلِ ِه ‪َ /‬م اف ُعول لَهُ ‪3.8.3‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َم افعُول ل ا‬ ‫‪81‬‬
‫َم افعُ اول َم َعهُ ‪3.8.4‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬
‫ظَرف ‪ /‬م افعول فِ ِ‬
‫يه ‪3.8.5‬‬ ‫َ ُا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫‪82‬‬
‫حال ‪3.8.6‬‬
‫‪َ – State / Condition‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬
‫َتَايِاي ز ‪ََ /‬تِاي ز ‪3.8.7‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬
‫)‪ (Numerals‬أَ اسَاءُ الا َع َد ِد ‪Rules for‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬
‫ستَ ثا ٰن ‪3.8.8‬‬
‫ُم ا‬ ‫‪92‬‬
‫ات ‪3.9‬‬
‫‪ – Words Which Are Always Majroor‬اَلا َم اجُراوَر ُ‬ ‫‪95‬‬
‫اَلتَّ َوابِ ُع ‪3.10‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬
‫‪ – Adjective‬اَلنَّعت أَ ِو ِ‬
‫الص َفةُ ‪3.10.1‬‬ ‫ا ُ‬ ‫‪96‬‬
‫‪ – Emphasis‬اَلتَّأاكِاي ُد ‪3.10.2‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫‪ – Substitute‬اَلابَ َد ُل ‪3.10.3‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬
‫س ِق ‪3.10.4‬‬ ‫‪ – Conjunction‬اَلاعطا ِ‬
‫ف النَّ َ‬
‫‪/‬عطا ُ‬
‫ف بَارف َ‬
‫َ ُ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫ف‬‫ف الاعطا ِ‬
‫ُحُراو ُ َ‬ ‫‪105‬‬
‫عطاف الاب ي ِ‬
‫ان ‪3.10.5‬‬‫َ ُ ََ‬ ‫‪108‬‬

‫‪CHAPTER 4‬‬ ‫‪109‬‬

‫‪ – Governing Words‬الَعَ َوامَلَ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.1‬‬ ‫ف الاع ِ‬
‫‪ – Governing Particles‬اَ الُُراو ُ َ‬ ‫‪110‬‬
‫‪Particles Which Govern Nouns‬‬ ‫‪110‬‬
‫ضا ِرع ‪Particles Which Govern‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف اعل ُم َ‬ ‫‪110‬‬
‫ف النَّ ِ‬
‫اصبَةُ ‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪ – Particles That Give Nasb‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪111‬‬
‫اْلَا ِمَمةُ ‪4.1.2‬‬
‫ف ا‬ ‫‪ – Particles That Give Jazm‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪114‬‬
‫ال الاع ِ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪ – Governing Verbs‬اَالَفا َع ُ َ‬ ‫‪116‬‬

‫‪ – Active Verb‬اَلا ِف اع ُل الا َم اعُراو ُ‬

‫ف ‪4.2.1‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬
‫ج ُه او ُل ‪4.2.2‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Passive Verb‬اَلاف اع ُل الا َم ا‬ ‫‪116‬‬
‫‪4.2.3‬‬ ‫‪ – Intransitive Verb‬اَلا ِف اع ُل ال ََّل ِمُم‬ ‫‪116‬‬

‫‪iv‬‬
 ‫صةُ ‪4.2.4‬‬ ‫اَالَفا ع ُ ِ‬
‫ال النَّاق َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪116‬‬
‫ي ‪4.2.5‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ – Transitive Verb‬اَلاف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َعد ا‬ ‫‪117‬‬
‫الرج ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اء َوالش ُراوِع ‪4.2.6‬‬ ‫ال الا ُم َق َاربَةَ َو َّ َ‬
‫أَفا َع ُ‬ ‫‪119‬‬
‫ال الام اد ِح و َّ‬
‫الذم ‪4.2.7‬‬ ‫‪ – Verbs of Praise and Blame‬أَفا َع ُ َ َ‬ ‫‪121‬‬
‫َّعج ِ‬
‫ب ‪4.2.8‬‬ ‫ال الت َ‬
‫‪ – Verbs of Wonder‬أَفا َع ُ‬ ‫‪123‬‬
‫‪ – Governing Nouns‬اَالَ اساء الاع ِ‬
‫املَةُ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫َُ َ‬ ‫‪124‬‬
‫َّر ِطيَّةُ ‪4.3.1‬‬
‫‪ – Conditional Nouns‬اَالَ اسَاءُ الش ا‬ ‫‪124‬‬
‫اِسم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪4.3.2‬‬ ‫اُ‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫اِ اس ُم الا ُمبَالَغَ ِة ‪4.3.2.1‬‬ ‫‪127‬‬
‫اِ اس ُم الا َم افعُ اوِل ‪4.3.3‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬
‫اِسم ‪ – That Adjective Which is Similar to‬اَ ِ‬
‫لص َفةُ الام َشبَّهةُ ِبس ِم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪4.3.4‬‬ ‫ُ َ ا‬ ‫اُ‬ ‫‪130‬‬
‫الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬
‫ضاي ِل ‪4.3.5‬‬‫اِسم التَّ اف ِ‬
‫اُ‬ ‫‪132‬‬
‫ص َد ُر ‪4.3.6‬‬
‫اَلا َم ا‬ ‫‪134‬‬
‫اف ‪4.3.7‬‬
‫ض ُ‬‫اَلا ُم َ‬ ‫‪135‬‬
‫اَاِْل اس ُم التَّام ‪4.3.8‬‬ ‫‪135‬‬
‫ت ‪4.3.9‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اَلاكنَ َاَي ُ‬ ‫‪136‬‬
‫املَ ِة ‪4.4‬‬
‫ف الاغَي ر الاع ِ‬
‫‪ – Non-Governing Particles‬اَ الُُراو ُ ا ُ َ‬ ‫‪137‬‬
‫ف التَّ انبِاي ِه ‪1.‬‬
‫‪ُ – Particles of Notification‬حُراو ُ‬ ‫‪137‬‬
‫ال اْيَ ِ‬
‫اب ‪2.‬‬ ‫ف اِ‬
‫‪ُ – Particles of Affirmation‬حُراو ُ‬ ‫‪137‬‬
‫‪َ – Particles of Clarification‬حرفَا التَّ اف ِس اِ‬
‫ي ‪3.‬‬ ‫ا‬ ‫‪138‬‬
‫ص َد ِريَّةُ ‪4.‬‬
‫ف الا َم ا‬
‫اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪138‬‬
‫ف التَّح ِ‬
‫ضاي ِ‬
‫ض ‪5.‬‬ ‫‪ُ – Particles of Exhortation‬حُراو ُ ا‬ ‫‪138‬‬
‫َّوق ِع ‪6.‬‬
‫ف الت َ‬
‫‪َ – Particle of Anticipation‬ح ار ُ‬ ‫‪139‬‬
‫اْل استِ اف َه ِام ‪7.‬‬
‫‪ – Particles of Interrogation‬حرفَا اِ‬
‫َا‬ ‫‪139‬‬
‫الراد ِع ‪8.‬‬
‫ف َّ‬‫‪َ – Particle of Rebuke‬ح ار ُ‬ ‫‪140‬‬
‫اَلتَّ ان ِويا ُن ‪9.‬‬ ‫‪140‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
 10. ‫نُ او ُن التَّأاكِاي ِد‬ 140
11. ‫ف َل‬
ُ ‫َح ار‬ 140
12. ُ‫الزائِ َدة‬
َّ ‫ف‬ُ ‫ – اَ الُُراو‬Extra Particles 141

‫ف الش اَّر ِط الَِِّت َْل َا‬

13. ‫َت ِزُم‬
‫ا‬ ُ ‫ – ُحُراو‬Conditional Particles That Do Not Give Jazm 142
14. )‫ام‬
َ ‫َما ( َما َد‬ 143
ِ ‫ف الاعطا‬
15. ‫ف‬ َ ُ ‫ُحُراو‬ 143
Appendix 145
Bibliography 149

vi
 ‫‪LIST OF TABLES‬‬

‫‪Table No‬‬ ‫‪Page No‬‬

‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ض َمائُِر‬ ‫‪ – Personal Pronouns‬اَل َّ‬ ‫‪19‬‬

‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫اْلَ َّارةُ‬

‫ف ا‬ ‫‪ – Prepositions‬اَ الُاراو ُ‬ ‫‪20‬‬

‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ف الا ُم َشبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬ ‫‪ – Those Particles That Resemble the Verb‬اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪22‬‬

‫صةُ‬ ‫‪ – Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs‬اَالَفا ع ُ ِ‬

‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫ال النَّاق َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫صل ( َب ِرم)‬ ‫الرفا ِع ‪ in‬ض ِمي ر مان َف ِ‬ ‫صل ‪َ (also called‬حالَةُ َّ‬ ‫)ض ِمي ر مرفُوع مان َف ِ‬
‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫َ ا ُ‬ ‫َ ا َا ا ُ‬ ‫‪34‬‬
‫َّصل‬ ‫الرفا ِع ‪ in‬ض ِمي ر مت ِ‬ ‫َّصل ‪َ (also called‬حالَةُ َّ‬ ‫)ض ِمي ر مرفُوع مت ِ‬
‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫َ ا ُ‬ ‫َ ا َا ا ُ‬ ‫‪35‬‬
‫صل‬ ‫َّصل ‪ and‬ض ِمي ر مان َف ِ‬ ‫ب ‪ in‬ض ِمي ر مت ِ‬ ‫صِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫َ ا ُ‬ ‫َ ا ُ‬ ‫ص اوب ‪َ (also called‬حالَةُ النَّ ا‬ ‫ضماي ر َمان ُ‬‫َ‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫صل‬ ‫َّصل ‪ and‬مان َف ِ‬ ‫)ض ِمي ر مانصوب مت ِ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َ ا َ ُا ُ‬
‫(ب ِرم)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اْل ِر ‪ِ in‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫) ِ‬
‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ضماي ر ُمتَّصل َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ضماي ر َاَمراور ُمتَّصل ‪َ (also called‬حالَةُ اَ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪37‬‬

‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ص اولَةُ لِال ُم َذ َّك ِر‬

‫اَالَ اسَاءُ الا َم او ُ‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫اَالَ اساء الاموصولَةُ لِالمؤن ِ‬
‫َّث‬
‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫َ ُ َ ا ُا َُ‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫‪2.7‬‬ ‫أَ اسَاءُ اال َش َارةِ لِال ُم َذ َّك ِر‬ ‫‪42‬‬

‫أَ اساء اال َشارةِ لِالمؤن ِ‬
‫َّث‬
‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫َ َُ‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫‪42‬‬
‫اضي ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪2.9‬‬ ‫اَلاف اع ُل الا َم ا‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫اض ُر ‪Nouns in the Meaning of‬‬ ‫ال ِ‬
‫‪2.10‬‬ ‫اَال اَمُر اَ‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫ت‬ ‫إِعراب أَقاس ِام االَ اس ِاء الامعرب ِ‬
‫‪2.11‬‬ ‫َ ُ اََ‬ ‫اَ ُ َ‬ ‫‪59‬‬

‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫أ اَوَما ُن جَا ِع قِلَّة‬ ‫‪69‬‬

‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫أ اَوَما ُن جَا ِع َكثا َرة‬ ‫‪69‬‬

‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫اْلَ ام ِع‬

‫ال جَا ِع ا‬
‫أ اَمثَ ُ‬ ‫‪70‬‬

‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬

‫أ اَوَما ُن ُمان تَ َهى ا‬ ‫‪70‬‬
‫ال الا ِفع ِل حسب الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫ا است اع َم ُ ا َ ا َ‬ ‫‪73‬‬

‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫‪َْ and Its I‘raab‬ل ‪Different Forms of the Noun of‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬

‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫ُمنَادٰى ‪Rules Governing the I‘raab of‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬

‫‪vii‬‬
 ‫اب الا ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫إ اعَر ُ‬ ‫‪93‬‬

‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ف النَّ ِ‬
‫اصبَةُ‬ ‫اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪111‬‬

‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫اْلَا ِمَمةُ‬

‫ف ا‬ ‫اَ الُُراو ُ‬ ‫‪114‬‬
‫ب‬‫ال الا ُقلُو ِ‬
‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫أَفا َع ُ ا‬ ‫‪117‬‬

‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه ‪Verbs Requiring Three‬‬ ‫‪118‬‬

‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫الر َج ِاء َوالشُراوِع‬ ‫ال الا ُم َق َاربَِةَ َو َّ‬

‫أَفا َع ُ‬ ‫‪119‬‬

‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫اَالَ اسَاءُ الش اَّر ِطيَّةُ‬ ‫‪124‬‬

‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫أ اَوَما ُن اِ اس ِم الا ُمبَالَغَ ِة‬ ‫‪127‬‬

‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫الص َف ِة الا ُم َشبَّ َه ِة‬

‫أَوما ُن ِ‬
‫اَ‬ ‫‪130‬‬
‫ضاي ِل‬ ‫أَوما ُن اِس ِم التَّ اف ِ‬
‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫اَ ا‬ ‫‪132‬‬

‫‪viii‬‬
 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

There are many people whom I would like to thank for making this project a success. To
begin with, I am in debt to the sister who typed up the old Tasheel al-Nahw, and thus helped
to kick-start the project. She does not want her name to be publicized. I would also like to
thank Mawlana Ibrahim Memon and his students of Darul Uloom al-Madania’s eAlim
program for their valuable feedback. Last but not the least, I am indebted to my First year
students at Darul Uloom al-Madania (both 2010–2011 and 2011–2012), who have been
continuously giving me feedback. I would especially like to mention my current First year
students ‘Abdullah, Ayyub, Muhammad, Sa‘eed, Umair, Umar, and Wahid. I have greatly
benefitted from their intelligent questions, wise comments, useful suggestions, and help with
proof-reading. May Allah reward them, and all others for their contributions and help.

ix
 ‫بسم هللا الرمحن الرحيم‬
‫حنمده و نصلي على رسوله الكرمي‬

FOREWORD

This book is the second edition of the revised Tasheel al-Nahw, which in turn was a somewhat
expanded translation of the Urdu language primer of Arabic grammar, ‘Ilm al-Nahw by
Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad Charthawali. Mawlana Charthawali’s primers for Nahw (Arabic
grammar) and Sarf (Arabic Morphology) are standard textbooks in Western madrasahs. The
original English translation of ‘Ilm al-Nahw was prepared by scholars from Madrasah
Islamiyyah, Benoni, South Africa. They put in a lot of hardwork and made the English
translation much more beneficial than the Urdu original. May Allah reward them. At least
two versions of this translation are available online. The first one had many errors and typing
issues. The newer version made some improvements but issues remained, especially with
regards to language and clarity of the English and Arabic texts. In 2010, we decided to bring
out a revised edition of this translation to address these issues. During the course of our
revision and editing, we consulted various grammar works including al-Nahw al-Wadih, Sharh
ibn ‘Aqil, Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah, and A Simplified Arabic Grammar. We completely
revised some sections, as well as a number of definitions. The organization was changed in a
way that we felt would make it easier for students to understand how each section fits in the
overall picture.
This second edition has undergone more changes. Further improvements have been
made in many sections; some sections have been completely revised; confusing sentences have
been elaborated; more examples and exercises have been included, including many from al-
Nahw al-Wadih and Mu‘allim al-Insha’; and where needed, the relevant al-Nahw al-Wadih
section has been pointed out in the footnotes. These footnotes are for the benefit of the
teachers. The students can choose to ignore them. Lastly, an appendix has been attached at
the end, identifying Tasheel al-Nahw’s place in Nahw texts, as well as suggesting a possible
curriculum of classical Arabic studies.
This is a beginner-to-intermediate level text; therefore, we have not transliterated Arabic
words exactly, keeping in mind that most people at this stage will not be comfortable with
Arabic transliteration schemes. Rather, we have used approximate equivalents that are easier
to read for the untrained. Nevertheless, non-English words have been italicized to reflect their
non-English origin. The documentation in the foot-notes does not follow any particular
academic standard; rather, it has been modified for ease of the students. It should also be
noted that the English equivalents of Arabic grammar terms are mere approximations. In
some cases, they convey the exact meaning. In many cases, they do not. The student is,
therefore, urged to focus on the original term in Arabic.
We would also like to point out that this is not a do-it-yourself text. First of all, it
assumes some prior knowledge of Arabic such as that acquired through studying Ten Lessons of
Arabic and/or Durus al-Lughah al-‘Arabiyyah vol. 1. Moreover, it needs to be studied with a

xi
teacher. However, it can be used as a revision text by those who have already studied Nahw
using other texts. It is respectfully suggested to the teachers to also use al-Nahw al-Wadih (all
six volumes) while teaching, as reference and for additional examples and exercises, as and
when needed. Moreover, it should also be pointed out that this is not an exhaustive text. It
does not cover every issue of Nahw, in brief or in detail. It is assumed that the student will be
studying relatively advanced Nahw texts (such as Hidayat al-Nahw or al-Nahw al-Wadih) after
this to round off his/her training of Nahw. The sample curriculum given in the appendix can
be used for that purpose.
To the best of our ability, we have tried to remove all errors. However, we are merely
human. There are bound to be some mistakes in it, and definitely, room for improvement.
Your comments, constructive criticism, and suggestions are all welcome. You can contact us
with your feedback at the email address given at the end.
We hope and pray that this revised translation will be of benefit to the students. We
also pray that Allah Most High accepts this humble effort from all those who have contributed
to it in any way, and gives us the power to continue with more. We also request the readers
and all those who benefit from it in any way to remember us in their prayers.
And He alone gives success.

‫ي‬ ِ ‫وصلَّى هللا تَع ٰاٰل ع ٰلى خ ِي خ ال ِق ِه سيِ ِد ََن وموَْل ََن ُُم َّمد َّوع ٰلى أٰلِِه وأَصحابِِه أ ا‬
َ ‫َجَع ا‬ َ‫َ ا‬ َ َ ‫َ َ ُ َ َ َا َ َ ََا‬

‘Aamir Bashir
Buffalo, NY
14th Shaʻban, 1433 (4th July, 2012)
E-mail: ainbay97@gmail.com

xii
 َ‫اْلصطَلحاتَالعربية‬
ARABIC TERMS
َ

Approximate Equivalent English Term /

Arabic Term
Transliteration Description of the meaning
‫اِ اسم‬ ism Noun
‫فِ اعل‬ fi‘l Verb
‫َح ارف‬ harf Particle
‫ُم َذ َّكر‬ mudhakkar Masculine
‫ُم َؤنَّث‬ mu’annath Feminine
‫احد‬ِ‫و‬
َ waahid Singular
ِ
‫تَثانيَة‬ tathniyah Dual
‫جَاع‬ jam‘ Plural
‫ض َّمة‬
َ dammah ‫ﹹ‬
‫فَ ات َحة‬ fathah ‫ﹷ‬
‫َك اسَرة‬ kasrah ‫ﹻ‬
‫َحَرَكة‬ harakah
Short vowels, i.e., dammah ‫ﹹ‬, fathah ‫ﹷ‬, kasrah ‫ﹻ‬
‫ َحَرَكات‬:‫جَاع‬ plural: harakaat

‫ف الاعِلَّ ِة‬
ُ ‫ُحُراو‬ huroof al-‘illah Long vowels i.e., ‫ ا – ي‬- ‫و‬

‫إِ اعَراب‬
These are the variations at the end of the word, which
i‘raab
take place in accordance with the governing word.
‫تَان ِويان‬ tanween two fathahs (‫)ﹱ‬, two dammahs ( ‫) ﹲ‬, two kasrahs ( ‫) ﹴ‬
‫ُس ُك اون‬ sukoon ‫ﹿ‬
‫َساكِن‬ saakin A letter with sukoon
‫تَ اش ِدياد‬ tashdeed ‫ﹽ‬
‫ُم َشدَّد‬ mushaddad A letter with tashdeed
‫اعل‬ِ َ‫ف‬ faa‘il Subject i.e. the doer
Object i.e. the person or thing upon whom or which
‫َم افعُ اول‬ maf‘ool
the work is done.
‫َع ِامل‬
Governing word i.e. that word, which causes i‘raab
‘aamil
change in the word(s) following it.

xiii
 Approximate Equivalent English Term /
Arabic Term
Transliteration Description of the meaning
The governed word i.e. that word in which the i‘raab
‫َم اع ُم اول‬ ma‘mool
change occurred.
‫فِ اعل َم اعُراوف‬
The active verb i.e. that verb whose doer is
fi‘l ma‘roof
known/mentioned.
‫فِ اعل َاَم ُه اول‬
The passive verb i.e. that verb whose doer is not
fi‘l majhool
known/mentioned.
The intransitive verb i.e. that verb, which can be
‫فِ اعل َْل ِمم‬ fi‘l laazim
understood without a ‫ َم اف ُع اول‬.
The transitive verb i.e. that verb, which cannot be
‫اَلا ِف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َع ِد اي‬ fi‘l muta‘addi
fully understood without a ‫ َم اف ُع اول‬.
Definite noun. It is generally indicated by an ‫ال‬. For
‫َم اع ِرفَه‬ ma‘rifah
example, ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ اَلابَ اي‬the house (a particular/specific house).
Common noun. It is generally indicated by a tanween.
‫نَ ِكَرة‬ nakirah
e.g. ‫ بَايت‬a house (any house).
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫ َرفاع‬, which is
‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ marfoo‘
generally represented by a dammah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫صب‬‫نَ ا‬, which is
‫ص اوب‬
ُ ‫َمان‬ mansoob
generally represented by a fathah on the last letter.
It is that word, which is in the state of ‫جر‬ َ , which is
‫َاَمُراور‬ majroor
generally represented by a kasrah on the last letter.

xiv
 CHAPTER 1

Section 1.1
َ‫ – اَلنَحَو‬Arabic Grammar
Definition:
Nahw is that science, which teaches us how to join a noun, verb and particle to form a correct
sentence, as well as what the ‫( إِ اعَراب‬condition) of the last letter of a word should be.

Subject Matter:
Its subject matter is ‫( َكلِ َمة‬word) and ‫( َك ََلم‬sentence).

Objective:
 The immediate objective is to learn how to read, write and speak Arabic correctly, and
to avoid making mistakes in this. For example, ‫ َمياد‬, ‫ َدار‬, ‫ل‬ ِ
َ ‫ َد َخ‬, and ‫ ف‬are four words.
The science of Nahw teaches us how to put them together to form a correct sentence.
 The mid-term objective is to use our Arabic skills to understand the Qur’an, Hadeeth,
Fiqh and other Islamic sciences, so that we can act upon them.
 The ultimate objective through the above is to gain the pleasure of Allah Most High.

1
Section 1.2
َ‫ – اَلَكَلَمَة‬The Word
Any word uttered by humans is called a ‫لَ افظ‬. If it has a meaning, it is called ‫ض اوع‬ ُ ‫َم او‬
(meaningful); and if it does not have any meaning, it is called ‫( ُم اه َمل‬meaningless).

ُ ‫( لَ افظ َم او‬meaningful word) is of two types: ‫ ُم افَرد‬and ‫ ُمرَّكب‬.

In Arabic, ‫ض اوع‬
َ
1. ‫ – ُم افَرد‬Singular: It is that single word, which conveys one meaning. It is also called
‫ َكلِ َمة‬.
2. ‫ – ُمرَّكب‬Compound: It is a group of words. They may form a complete sentence or an
َ
incomplete one.

Types of َ‫كلمة‬
There are three types of ‫ َكلِ َمة‬:
1. ‫( اِ اسم‬noun)
2. ‫( فِ اعل‬verb)
3. ‫ح ارف‬
َ (particle)
َ‫ – اسم‬Noun:
 It is that ‫ َكلِ َمة‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It does not have any tense.1
 It is the name of a person, place or thing.2
e.g. ‫جل‬ ُ ‫ َر‬man
‫ت‬
ُ ‫اَلابَ اي‬ house

Note: A noun can never have a ‫( تَ ان ِويان‬tanween) and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.

1
The first two bullets combine to form the classical definition of ‫اِ اسم‬. See, for example, ‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqil,
Sharh ibn ‘Aqil ‘ala Alfiyyat ibn Malik, (Cairo: Dar al-Turath, 1980), vol. 1, 15. The definition given by ibn
ِ ِ
‫ت َع ٰلى َم اعن ِف نَ افس َها َغ َي ُم اق َِتن بَِزَمان فَ ِهي ا‬
‘Aqil is as follows: (‫اسم‬
َ ً ‫)اَلا َكل َمةُ إِ ان َدلَّ ا‬.
2
This third bullet by itself is the definition found in more modern texts like al-Nahw al-Wadih. See, for
example, ‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen, al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah, (Cairo: Dar al-
Ma‘arif, n.d.), vol. 1, 16. Their definition of ‫ اِ اسم‬is as follows:
ِ ِ
َ ‫ ُكل لَ افظ يُ َس ٰمى بِه إِنا َسان أ اَو َحيَ َوان أ اَو نَبَات أ اَو َجَاد أ اَو أَي َشىء‬:‫)اَاْل اس ُم‬
(‫آخَر‬
‫ا‬

2
َ‫ – فعل‬Verb:
 It is that ‫ َكلِ َمة‬whose meaning can be understood without the need to combine it with
another word.
 It has one of the three tenses: past, present, or future.3
 It denotes an action.4
e.g. ‫ب‬َ ‫ضَر‬
َ He hit. ‫صَر‬
َ َ‫ ن‬He helped.
Note: A ‫ فِ اعل‬can never have a ‫( تَ ان ِويان‬tanween) or an ‫ال‬.

َ‫ – حرف‬Particle:
It is that ‫ َكلِ َمة‬whose meaning cannot be understood without joining an ‫ اِ اسم‬or a ‫ فِ اعل‬or both to
it.
e.g. ‫ِم ان‬ (from)
‫( َع ٰلى‬on top)

EXERCISES

1. State with reason whether the following words are ‫ اِ اسم‬، ‫ فِ اعل‬or ‫ح ارف‬
َ.
i. ‫س‬َ َ‫َجل‬ (He sat.) iii. ‫بِانت‬ (girl)
ii. ‫َو‬ (and) iv. ‫َك َسَر‬ (He broke.)

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

i. ‫قَلَم‬ iii. ‫كِتَاب‬

ii. ‫صل‬ ‫فَ ا‬ iv. ‫َسب اوَرة‬

3
The first two bullets combine to form the classical definition of ‫فِ اعل‬. See Sharh ibn ‘Aqil, vol. 1, 15.
4
The last two bullets combine to form the definition of ‫ فِ اعل‬as given in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See al-Nahw al-
Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 16.

3
Section 1.3

َ‫ – أقسامَاْلَسَم‬Types of Noun
‫ اِ اسم‬is of three types:
1. ‫امد‬ ِ ‫ – ج‬Primary Noun: It is that ‫ اِسم‬which is neither derived from another word nor is any
َ ‫ا‬
word derived from it.
e.g. ‫فَ َرس‬ horse ‫بِانت‬ girl
2. ‫ص َدر‬ ِ
‫ – َم ا‬Root Noun: It is that ‫ ا اسم‬from which many words are derived.
e.g. ‫ض ارب‬
َ to hit ‫صر‬
‫نَ ا‬ to help
3. ‫شتَق‬ ِ
‫ – ُم ا‬Derived Noun: It is that ‫ ا اسم‬which is derived from a masdar.
e.g. ‫ضا ِرب‬
َ hitter ‫ص اور‬
ُ ‫ َمان‬the helped

َ‫ – أقسامَ الَفَعَل‬Types of Verb

‫ فِ اعل‬is of four types:
1. ‫اضي‬ ِ
‫ اَلا َم ا‬Past tense e.g. ‫ب‬
َ ‫ضَر‬َ He hit.
2. ُ‫ضا ِرع‬ َ ‫ اَلا ُم‬Present and Future tense e.g. ُ ‫ض ِر‬
‫ب‬ ‫يَ ا‬ He is hitting or will
hit.
ِ
3. ‫اَالَ امُر‬ Positive Command/ e.g. ‫ض ِر ا‬
‫ب‬ ‫اا‬ Hit!
Imperative
4. ‫اَلنَّ اه ُي‬ Negative Command/ e.g. ‫ض ِر ا‬
‫ب‬ ‫َْل تَ ا‬ Don’t hit!
Prohibitive

َ‫ – أقسامَالَرَف‬Types of Particle
‫ َح ارف‬is of two types:
1. ‫امل‬ ِ ‫ – ع‬Causative Particle: It is that ‫حرف‬, which causes ‫ إِعراب‬change in the word after it.
َ ‫َا‬ َ‫ا‬
e.g. ِ ِ
‫ َمياد ِف الا َم اسجد‬Zayd is in the mosque.
2. ‫ام ِل‬ِ ‫ – َغي ر الاع‬Non-Causative: It is that ‫حرف‬, which does not cause ‫ إِعراب‬change in the word
َ ُ‫ا‬ ‫َا‬ َ‫ا‬
after it.
e.g. َّ‫ُث‬ then ‫َو‬ and

4
 EXERCISES
1. Correct the following words (stating a reason) and give its meaning.

i. ‫اَلابَ ايت‬ iii. ‫اَلا َوَرق‬

ii. ‫اَلا َفتَ َح‬ iv. ‫َِسع‬

2. Find the meaning and the plural of the following nouns using a dictionary.

i. ‫بُ استَان‬ iii. ‫َبب‬

ii. ‫قَ َمر‬ iv. ‫َك الب‬

3. Translate the following sentences, and identify the different types of verbs in them.

i. ‫اك‬َ َّ‫فَتَ َح َخالِ ُد ِن الشب‬ iii. ً‫ب ِر َسالَة‬

‫اُ اكتُ ا‬
‫َمحَ ُد ِف الا َم اد َر َس ِة‬
‫سأا‬ ِ َ ِ‫َْل تَ اقرأا ٰذل‬
ii. ُ ‫يَ اد ُر‬ iv. ‫اب‬
َ َ‫ك الاكت‬ َ

5
Section 1.4
َ‫ – اْلملَوَالمركبات‬Sentences and Phrases

‫ ُمَرَّكب‬is of two types: ‫ ُمَرَّكب ُم ِفايد‬and ‫ ُمَرَّكب غَاي ُر ُم ِفايد‬.

 ‫ ُمرَّكب ُم ِفايد‬is also called ‫ ُمرَّكب ََتم‬, ‫ جُالَة ُم ِفاي َدة‬and ‫ َك ََلم ََتم‬. This is a complete sentence.
َ َ
Often, it is just called ‫ َك ََلم‬.
 ‫ ُمرَّكب َغاي ُر ُم ِفايد‬is also called ‫ ُمرَّكب ََنقِص‬, ‫ جُالَة َغاي ُر ُم ِفاي َدة‬and ‫ َك ََلم ََنقِص‬. This is a phrase, i.e.,
َ َ
an incomplete sentence.
From now onwards, when we use “sentence,” we will be referring to complete sentences; and
when we use “phrase,” we will be referring to incomplete sentences.

Types of Sentences
There are two types of sentences:
َِ ‫جُالَة َخ‬: It is that sentence, which has the possibility of being true or false.
A. ‫َبيَّة‬
B. ‫شائِيَّة‬
َ ‫جُالَة إِنا‬: It is that sentence, which does not have the possibility of being true or false.

Section 1.4.1
َ‫أقَسامَاْلملةَاْلَبية‬

‫ جُالَة َخ ََِبيَّة‬is of two types:

1. َ‫ – جَلَةََاَسَيَةََخََبَيَة‬Nominal Sentence:

Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a noun.

 The second part of the sentence can be a noun or a verb.
 The first part of the sentence is called ‫( ُماب تَ َدأ‬subject) or ‫سنَد إِلَاي ِه‬
‫( ُم ا‬the word about which
information is being given).
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫خبَ ر‬ َ (predicate) or ‫( ُم اسنَد‬the word giving the
information).
The ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬is generally ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬and the ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ
 َ generally ‫نَكَرة‬.
 Both parts (‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and ‫خبَ ر‬
َ ) are ‫ َم ارفُ اوع‬.

Sentence Analysis

َ‫نظيَف‬ َ‫ الَب يَت‬The house is clean.

‫َخبَ ر = جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

6
Note: A sentence may have more than one ‫خبَ ر‬.
َ
Sentence Analysisَ

َ‫قوي‬ َ‫طويل‬ َ‫ الرجَل‬The man is tall and strong.

‫ = جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬2 ‫ َخبَ ر‬+ 1 ‫ َخبَ ر‬+ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

2. َ‫ – جَلَةََفعليةَخََبَيَة‬Verbal Sentence:

Definition: It is that sentence, which begins with a verb.

 The first part of the sentence is called ‫ فِ اعل‬or ‫سنَد‬

‫ ُم ا‬.
ِ َ‫ ف‬or ‫ مسنَد إِلَي ِه‬and is always ‫مرفُوع‬.
 The second part of the sentence is called ‫اعل‬ ‫ُا ا‬ ‫َا ا‬

Sentence Analysis

‫زي َد‬ َ‫ جلس‬Zayd sat.

‫اعل = جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬
ِ َ‫ف‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

َّ ‫ اَلا ِف اعل‬i.e. it is a verb whose meaning can be

Note: In the above example, the verb is ‫الَل ِمُم‬ ُ
understood without a ‫ َم اف ُع اول‬.

Note: If the verb is ‫ي‬ ِ ِ

‫ اَلاف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َعد ا‬i.e. a verb whose meaning cannot be fully understood without
a ‫ َم اف ُع اول‬, then a ‫ َم افعُ اول‬will be added and will be ‫ص اوب‬
ُ ‫ َمان‬.
Sentence Analysis

َ ‫السم‬
‫اء‬ َ‫للا‬ ‫خل َق‬ Allah created the sky.
‫ َم افعُ اول = جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬+ ‫اعل‬ِ َ‫ف‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

EXERCISES5
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫املعلم حاضر‬ ii. ‫البستان جيل‬ iii. ‫فتح ُممدن الباب‬

iv. ‫املدرسة كبية نظيفة‬ v. ‫وقف الرجل‬ vi. ‫الرجل وقف‬

2. What is the difference between (v) and (vi) above?

5
For more examples and exercise, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 11-19 & 36-46.

7
Section 1.4.2
َ‫ جَلَةََإَنَشَائَيَة‬is of ten types:

‫اَالَ امُر‬ e.g. ‫ض ِرب‬ ِ

1. Positive Command
‫اا ا‬ Hit!
‫اَلنَّ اه ُي‬ e.g. ‫ض ِرب‬
2. Negative Command
‫َْل تَ ا ا‬ Don’t Hit!
3. ‫ اَاِْل استِ اف َه ُام‬Interrogative e.g. ‫هل ضرب ميد؟‬
‫َ ا َ َ َ َا‬
Did Zayd hit?
‫اَلتَّ َم ِ ان‬ ِ
!‫اب َعائد‬
َ َ‫ت الشَّب‬
َ ‫لَاي‬
4. Desire e.g. I wish youth would
return.
Note: ‫ت‬ َ ‫ لَاي‬is generally used for something unattainable.
5. ‫اَلتَّ َرِج اي‬ Hope e.g. ‫اْل امتِ َحا َن َس اهل‬
ِ‫لَع َّل ا‬
َ
Hopefully, the
examination will be easy.
Note: ‫ل‬
َّ ‫ لَ َع‬is generally used for something attainable.
ِ
6. ُ‫اَلن َداء‬ Exclamation e.g. !ُ‫ََي اَلل‬ O Allah!
e.g. ‫ك ِدي نَارا؟‬ ِ ِ
‫ض‬
ُ ‫اَلا َع ار‬ ً ‫أََْل َتاتاي ِ ان فَأُ اعطيَ َ ا‬
7. Request/Offer Will you not come to me
so that I may give you a
dinar?
Note: ‫ض‬
ُ ‫ اَلا َع ار‬is a mere request; no answer is anticipated.
8. ‫اَلا َق َس ُم‬ Oath e.g. !ِ‫َوهللا‬ By Allah!
9. ‫اَلتَّ عجب‬ Amazement e.g. !‫ما أَحسن مي ًدا‬ How good Zayd is!
ُ َ ‫َ ا َ َ َا‬
ِ
10. ‫اَلاع ُقود‬
ُ‫ُ ا‬ Transaction e.g. The seller says ‫اب‬ ُ ‫ – بِ اع‬I sold this book.
َ َ‫ت ٰه َذا الاكت‬
and the buyer says ُ‫ – اِ اشتَ َرياتُه‬I bought it.
َِ ‫ َخ‬. However, Islamic law recognizes them
Note: The sentences for ‫ اَلا ُع ُق او ُد‬are in reality ‫َبيَّة‬
as ‫شائِيَّة‬
َ ‫ إِنا‬with respect to all contracts, and requires that they (past tense verbal sentences)
be used to convey definiteness.

Sentence Analysis:
‫زيد؟‬ َ‫ضرب‬ َ‫هل‬ Did Zayd hit?
‫اعل = جُالَة إِنا َشائِيَّة‬
ِ َ‫ف‬ + ‫ فِ اعل‬+ ‫اْل استِ اف َه ِام‬
ِ‫ف ا‬
ُ ‫َح ار‬

EXERCISE
1. State what type of ‫شائِيَّة‬
َ ‫ جُالَة إِنا‬are the following sentences.
ِ ‫َي إِب ر‬
i. !‫اهاي ُم‬ iii. ‫ك؟‬
َ‫َ ا‬ َ ُ‫ف َحال‬ َ ‫َكاي‬
ii. ‫اسَ اع‬ِ iv. ‫خ ال‬
ُ ‫َْل تَ اد‬

8
Section 1.4.3
َ‫ أقسامَالَمَرَكَبََالنَاقَص‬- Types of Phrases

Phrases are of five types:

1. ‫َي‬
َ‫ – الَمَرَكَبََالتَوَصَيَف ي‬Descriptive Phrase:6 It is a phrase in which one word describes the other.
 ِ.
The describing word is called ‫ص َفة‬
 The object being described is called ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫ َم او‬.
The ‫ص اوف‬ ِ
 ُ ‫ َم او‬and ‫ ص َفة‬must correspond in four things:
1. I‘raab.
2. Gender i.e. being masculine or feminine.
3. Number i.e. being singular, dual or plural.
4. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah.
For example,
َ‫صالح‬ َ‫رجل‬ a righteous man
‫ِص َفة‬ ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫َم او‬

َ‫العاقلة‬ َ‫البنت‬ the intelligent/wise girl

‫ِص َفة‬ ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫َم او‬

2. َ‫ – الَمَرَكَبَ َالَضَافي‬Possessive Phrase: It is a phrase in which the first word (‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ) ُم‬is
attributed to the second one (‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫) ُم‬. In some cases, this means that the second word
owns or possesses the first.
 The ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬never gets an ‫ ال‬or a ‫تَان ِويان‬.
 The ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬is always ‫ َاَمُراور‬.
e.g.
َ‫زيد‬ َ‫كتاب‬ Zayd’s book
‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬
The i‘raab of the ‫ضاف‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ُم‬will be according to the ‫ َعامل‬governing it. For example,
َ‫زيد‬ َ‫كتاب‬ َ‫وجدتي‬ I found Zayd’s book.
‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬

‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ ‫اعلِ ِه‬

ِ َ‫اعل مع ف‬
ِ
َ َ َ‫ف‬

6
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 82-86.

9
Notes:
ِ
َ ‫ ُم‬, ‫ضاف إِلَايه‬
1. Sometimes many ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬are found in one single phrase. For example,
‫الرج َل‬ َ‫ب يت‬ َ‫َبب‬ the door of the man’s house
‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬ َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬ ِ
َ ‫ضاف إِلَايه َوُم‬
َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬َ ‫ُم‬
2. If a ‫ص َفة‬ ِ of the ‫ مضاف‬is brought, it should come immediately after the ‫ مضاف إِلَي ِه‬with an
َُ ‫ا‬ َُ
‫ ال‬and should have the same i‘raab as that of the ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬. For example,
َ‫اْلديد‬ َ ‫الب ي‬
‫ت‬ َ‫َبب‬ the new door of the house
ِ ‫ِص َفةُ الامضا‬
‫ف‬ ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ُ َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬
ِ of the ‫ مضاف إِلَي ِه‬is brought, it should come immediately after it (‫)مضاف إِلَي ِه‬, and
If a ‫ص َفة‬
3. ‫ا‬ َُ ‫ا‬ َُ
it should correspond to it (‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ) ُم‬i.e. in the four aspects mentioned earlier. For
example,

َ‫اْلديد‬ َ‫الب يت‬ َ‫َبب‬ the door of the new house

‫ِص َفة‬ ‫ص اوف‬

ُ ‫َم او‬

‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬

َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬
3. ‫ي‬
َ‫َار ي‬ ِ‫ )اِ اسم ا‬points
َ ‫ – الَمَرَكَبََالَش‬Demonstrative Phrase: It is a phrase in which one noun (ِ‫ال َش َارة‬ ُ
ِ ِ
towards another noun (‫شار إلَايه‬ َ ‫) ُم‬.
 The ‫شار إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬must have an ‫ال‬.
e.g. ‫الرج َل‬ ‫ٰهذا‬ This man
‫ُم َشار إِلَاي ِه‬ ِ ِ
ِ‫ال َشارة‬
َ ‫ا اس ُم ا‬
Note: If the ‫شار إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬does not have an ‫ال‬, it would be a complete sentence.
e.g. ‫رج َل‬ ‫ٰهذا‬ This is a man.
‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬
4. ‫ي‬
َ‫َالَمَرَكَبََالَعَدَدَ ي‬/َ‫َي‬
‫ – َالَمَرَكَبََالَبَنَائ ي‬Numerical Phrase: It is a phrase in which two numerals are
joined to form a single word (number).
 A ‫ح ارف‬َ originally linked the two.
e.g. ‫( أَ َح َد َع َشَر‬eleven) It was originally ‫شر‬
‫أَ َحد َو َع ا‬.
 This phrase is found only in numbers 11-19.
e.g. ‫( أَ َح َد َع َشَر‬11), ‫( اِثانَا َع َشَر‬12), ‫ث َع َشَر‬
َ ‫( ثَََل‬13), … ‫( تِ اس َع َع َشَر‬19).

10
 Both parts of this phrase will always be ‫ َم افتُ اوح‬except the number 12 (‫شَر‬ ِ
 َ ‫)اثانَا َع‬.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ أَ َح َد َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬ (‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫) َحالَة‬ ‫ت أَ َح َد َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ِ‫ص‬
(‫ب‬ ‫) َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
Eleven men came. I saw eleven men.
‫ت ِبَ َح َد َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬
ُ ‫اْلَِر) َمَرار‬
‫( َحالَةُ ا‬
I passed by eleven men.

 As for number 12, its second part is always ‫ َم افتُ اوح‬while the first part changes. Thus, in
‫الرفا ِع‬ ِ ِ‫ص‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬, it is written as ‫اثانَا َع َشَر‬, with an ‫ ا‬at the end of the first part. However, in ‫ب‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
‫ َحالَةُ ا‬, the first part is given a ‫ ي‬in place of the ‫)اِثا َن َع َشَر( ا‬.
and ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ا‬
e.g. ‫َجاءَ اِثانَا َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬ (‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫) َحالَة‬ ‫ت اِثا َ ان َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ِ‫ص‬
(‫ب‬ ‫) َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
Twelve men came. I saw twelve men.
‫ت ِبِثا َ ان َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬ (‫اْلَِر‬
‫) َحالَةُ ا‬
I passed by twelve men.

5. َ‫َكَبَ َمَنَعَ َالصَرَف‬

‫ – الَمَر‬Indeclinable Phrase: It is a phrase in which two words are joined to
form a single word.
 The first part of this phrase is always ‫ َم افتُ اوح‬.
 ِ ‫ع‬.
The second part changes according to the ‫امل‬ َ
Examples:
1. ‫ت‬
ُ ‫ضَرَم او‬
َ ‫ َح‬is the name of a region in Yemen. It is composed of two words ‫ضَر‬
َ ‫ َح‬and ‫ َم اوت‬.
‫ضَر‬
َ ‫ َح‬is a verb, which means “he/it became present” and ‫ َم اوت‬is a noun, which means
“death.” Thus, literally, ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ضَرَم او‬
َ ‫ َح‬means “[a place where] death became present.”
2. ‫ بَ اعلَبَك‬is a city in Lebanon. It is composed of two words ‫ بَ اعل‬and ‫ك‬ َّ َ‫ب‬. ‫ بَ اعل‬was the name
of an idol and ‫ك‬ َّ َ‫ ب‬was the name of a king.

Note: The above mentioned various types of phrases/incomplete sentences form part of a
complete sentence.

Example 1 َ‫الَمي‬ َ‫التاجر‬ َ‫ربَح‬ The trustworthy/honest trader

gained profit.
‫ِص َفة‬ + ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫َم او‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

11
 ‫‪Example 2‬‬ ‫مرف وعَ‬ ‫فاعلَ‬ ‫ك يلَ‬ ‫‘‪Every faa‘il is marfoo‬‬
‫‪and every maf‘ool is‬‬
‫منصوبَ‬ ‫مفعولَ‬ ‫ك يلَ‬ ‫َو‬
‫‪mansoob.‬‬
‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
‫ضاف ‪ُ +‬م َ‬
‫ُم َ‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

‫‪Example 3‬‬ ‫الكتابَ‬ ‫ٰهذا‬ ‫اشت ريتَ‬ ‫‪I bought this book.‬‬
‫اِ اسم اِ‬
‫ال َش َارةِ ‪ُ +‬م َشار إِلَاي ِه‬ ‫ُ‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َم افعُول‬ ‫فِ اعل َم َع فَاعِلِ ِه ‪+‬‬

‫‪Example 4‬‬ ‫أَرب عَةََعشرََرج اَلَ‬ ‫‪ Fourteen men came.‬ج َ‬

‫اء‬
‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫فَ ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ اعل ‪+‬‬

‫‪Example 5‬‬ ‫ب عَلَبُّيَ‬ ‫‪ٰ This is Ba‘labakk.‬هذهَ‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ ‪+‬‬

‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following phrases.‬‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫سيارة الرجل‬ ‫الوردة اْلميلة‬
‫‪v.‬‬
‫أربع عشر ‪ii.‬‬ ‫قلم رخيص ‪vi.‬‬
‫بب فصل املدرسة ‪iii.‬‬ ‫معديكرب ‪vii.‬‬
‫قلم الرجل الطويل ‪iv.‬‬ ‫ذلك الكتاب ‪viii.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬ ‫?‪What is the difference between the following sentences‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ُغ ََلم َعاقِل‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫ُغ ََل ُم َعاقِل‬

‫هذه تفاحة ‪ii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫هذه التفاحة‬
‫َنفذة السيارة الكبيةُ ‪iii.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫َنفذة السيارة الكبيةِ‬
‫الثوب نظيف ‪iv.‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫الثوب النظيف‬

‫‪12‬‬
3. Correct the following and state the reason(s).

i. ‫َولَد القبيح‬ ِ
iii. ‫املدرسة‬ ‫املعلم‬
ُ
ii. ‫الرجَلن الطويل‬ ِ
iv. ‫شر‬ َ ‫مثانيةُ َع‬
4. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following.

i. ‫بب فضل قيام ليلة القدر‬

13
Section 1.4.4
Additional Notes About َ‫جَلَةََاَسَيَة‬
1. Sometimes, the ‫خبَ ر‬
َ is not mentioned, in which case it will be regarded as hidden (‫) ُم َقدَّر‬.
7

e.g. ‫اَاِل َم ُام ِف الا َم اس ِج ِد‬ The Imam is in the mosque.

َ‫المسجد‬ َ
‫ف‬ ]َ‫[حَاضَر‬ َ‫الَمام‬
‫َاَمُراور‬ + ‫ف َجر‬ُ ‫َح ار‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫ُمتَ َعلِق ِب اْلَاَِب‬ + ‫َخبَ ر ُم َق َّدر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

2. The ‫خبَ ر‬
َ can be a complete sentence.
Example 1: ‫َمياد أَبُ اوهُ َع ِاَل‬ Zayd’s father is knowledgeable.

َ‫عال‬ ‫أب وَه‬ َ‫زيد‬

‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬+ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬

‫جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ = ‫َخبَ ر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

‫جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ = ‫َخبَر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

Example 2: ‫َمياد أَ َك َل الطَّ َع َام‬ Zayd ate the food.

َ‫الطعَام‬ َ‫أكل‬ َ‫زيد‬

‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ = ‫ َم افعُ اول‬+ ‫فِ اعل َم َع فَاعِلِ ِه‬

‫جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ = ‫َخبَر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫القلم ف الفصل‬ ii. ‫الثور حيرث الرض‬

7
However, generally, to simplify matters, the ‫ ُمتَ َعلِق‬is taken to be ‫ َخبَر‬. See Mawlana Hasan Dockrat, A Simplified
Arabic Grammar, (Azaadvillle: Madrasa Arabia Islamia, 2003 ), 37.

14
‫‪Summary‬‬
‫لَافظ‬

‫ض اوع‬
‫َم او ُ‬ ‫ُم اه َمل‬

‫ُم افَرد‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب‬

‫اِ اسم‬ ‫فِ اعل‬ ‫َحارف‬ ‫جُالَة ُم ِفاي َدة‬ ‫جُالَة َغاي ُر ُم ِفاي َدة‬

‫َج ِامد‬ ‫َماض‬ ‫َع ِامل‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب تَ او ِصاي ِفي‬

‫ص َدر‬
‫َم ا‬ ‫ضا ِرع‬
‫ُم َ‬ ‫َغاي ُر الا َع ِام ِل‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب إِ َ‬
‫ض ِاف‬

‫ُم اشتَق‬ ‫أ اَمر‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب إِ َشا ِري‬

‫جُالَة إِنا َشائِيَّة‬ ‫جُالَة َخ ََِبيَّة‬
‫نَ اهي‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب بِنَائِي‬

‫الصر ِ‬
‫ف‬ ‫ُمَرَّكب َمان ُع َّ ا‬

‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة‬ ‫جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة‬

‫تَ َعجب‬ ‫َعارض‬ ‫تَ َرِج اي‬ ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬ ‫أ اَمر‬
‫ُع ُق اود‬ ‫قَ َسم‬ ‫نِ َداء‬ ‫َتََِ ان‬ ‫نَ اهي‬

‫‪15‬‬
Section 1.5

َ‫ – عََلَمَاتََاْلَسَم‬Signs of a Noun:َ
It is preceded by an ‫ال‬. e.g. ‫ل‬
1. ُ ‫اَ َّلر ُج‬ the man
2. It accepts ‫جر‬
َ. e.g. ‫اْلَ ِديا ِد‬
‫ت َميا ِد ِن ا‬
ِ ‫ ِف ب ي‬in Zayd’s new house
‫ا َا‬
3. There is tanween on the last letter. e.g. ‫جل‬ ُ ‫َر‬ a man
4. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. e.g. ‫َكلِ َمة‬ a word
5. It is a dual )‫(تَثانِيَة‬.8 e.g. ‫ج ََل ِن‬
ُ ‫َر‬ two men
6. It is a plural )‫(جَاع‬. e.g. ‫جال‬ َ ‫ِر‬ men
It is a ‫سنَد إِلَاي ِه‬ ِ
‫ ُماب تَ َدأ) ُم ا‬or ‫(فَاعل‬. e.g. ‫ل قَ ِوي‬
7. ُ ‫اَ َّلر ُج‬ The man is strong.
e.g. ‫جلَس َمياد‬ َ Zayd sat.
َ
It is ‫ضاف‬ ِ ِ
8. َ ‫ ُم‬. e.g. ‫اب مياد‬ ُ َ‫كت‬ book of Zayd
9. It is ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫ َم او‬. e.g. ‫َر ُجل طَ ِويال‬ tall man
10. It is ‫ ُمنَادٰى‬. e.g. ‫ََي َر ُج ُل‬ O man!
11. It is ‫صغَّر‬
َ ‫ ُم‬. e.g. ‫ُر َجايل‬ a little man
12. It is ‫س اوب‬
ُ ‫ َمان‬. e.g. ‫َم ِكي‬ a Makkan

َ‫ – عََلَمَاتََالَفَعَل‬Signs of a Verb:
1. It is preceded by ‫قَ اد‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
َ ‫قَ اد َخَر‬ He has gone out.
2. It is preceded by ‫س‬
َ. e.g. ‫ج‬
ُ ‫َسيَ اخُر‬ He will soon go out.
3. It is preceded by ‫ف‬
َ ‫ َس او‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
ُ ‫ف ََياُر‬
َ ‫َس او‬ He will go out after a while.
4. It is preceded by ‫ج ازم‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
‫ََلا ََياُر ا‬ He did not go out.
5. It is preceded by ‫صب‬
‫ف نَ ا‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
َ ‫لَ ان ََياُر‬ He will never go out.
6. It has a hidden ‫ض ِماي ر‬
َ. e.g. ‫ج‬
َ ‫َخَر‬ He went out.
7. It is an imperative )‫( اأمر‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
‫اُ اخُر ا‬ Go out.
8. It is a prohibitive )‫(نَ اهي‬. e.g. ‫ج‬
‫َْل ََتاُر ا‬ Do not go out.
9. It has taa saakin (‫ت‬
‫ ) ا‬at the end. e.g. ‫ت‬
‫أَ َكلَ ا‬ She ate.

َ‫ – عََلَمَةََالَرَف‬Sign of a Particle:
That word which has no sign of a noun or verb is a particle (a particle has no sign of its own).

8
Verbs are said to be dual and plural with respect to their doers ِ َ‫(ف‬. The action is one. Thus, duality and
)‫اعل‬
plurality are signs of a noun and not a verb.

16
Section 1.5.1
General Notes

1. The indefiniteness of a noun )‫ (اِ اسم‬is indicated by a tanween. Such a noun is called ‫كَرة‬
ِ َ‫ن‬.
e.g. ‫بَايت‬ a house (any house)

2. The definiteness of a noun is indicated by an ‫ال‬. Such a noun is called ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬.

e.g. ‫ت‬
ُ ‫اَلابَ اي‬ the house (a specific house)

3. A noun can never have a tanween and an ‫ ال‬at the same time.
e.g. ‫اَلابَ ايت‬ is incorrect.

4. When the last letter of a word and the first letter of the following word have sukoon (‫)ﹿ‬, it
ِ ‫الساكِنَ ا‬
is called ‫ي‬ َّ ‫اع‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫( ا اجت َم‬the meeting of two sukoons). In this case, the first sukoon is
generally changed to a kasrah.
ِ . The ‫ َهازةُ الاوص ِل‬before the ‫ ل‬will not be
e.g. ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ت الابِان‬
‫ضَربَ ا‬
َ will become ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ضَربَت الابِان‬
َ ‫َ َا‬
pronounced.
In some case, the first sukoon is changed to a fathah.
e.g. ‫اب ِن‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ َ‫( م ان الاي‬from Japan) will become ‫م َن الايَ َابن‬.
In some cases, the first sukoon is changed to dammah.
‫س‬ ِ ِ
e.g. َ ‫( فَه امتُ ام الد اَّر‬you understood the lesson) will become ‫س‬
َ ‫فَه امتُ ُم الد اَّر‬.
5. When an ‫ ال‬appears before a noun, which begins with a letter from ُ‫الش ام ِسيَّة‬
َّ ‫وف‬
ُ ‫( اَ الُُر‬sun
letters) then the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬must not be pronounced. The ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will not get a sukoon. Instead
the ‫ح ارف َشا ِسي‬
َ will get a tashdeed.
e.g. ُ‫َّجَرة‬
َ ‫ اَلش‬the tree ‫س‬
ُ ‫َّم‬
‫ اَلش ا‬the sun
ُ‫الش ام ِسيَّة‬
َّ ‫وف‬
ُ ‫ت ث د ذ ر م س ش ص ض ط ظ ل ن = اَ الُُر‬
6. The remaining letters are known as ُ‫وف الا َق َم ِريَّة‬
ُ ‫( اَ الُُر‬moon letters). In these, the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬will get
a sukoon and will be pronounced. The ‫ح ارف قَ َم ِري‬
َ will not get a tashdeed.
e.g. ‫اَلا َقلَ ُم‬ the pen ‫اَلا َق َمُر‬ the moon

7. Generally, a noun ending with a round ‫ (اَلتَّاءُ الا َم اربُوطَةُ) ة‬is a feminine )‫ ( ُم َؤنَّث‬noun.
e.g. ‫ َسب اوَرة‬blackboard
ِ – ِ‫ال َشارة‬
8. The ‫ص َفة‬ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫ خب ر – اَاِْلسم الاموص‬etc. of a ‫( َغي ر الاعاقِ ِل‬non-human) plural will
َ ‫ول – ف اعل – ا اس ُم ا‬ ُ ‫ا ُ َا‬ ََ َ ُ‫ا‬
ِ
generally be ‫ َواحد ُم َؤنَّث‬.

17
 e.g. ‫صنَام َكثِاي َرة‬
‫أَ ا‬ many idols ‫صنَ ُام َْل تَان َف ُع‬
‫اَالَ ا‬ The idols do not benefit.
‫صنَ ُام‬ ِِ ‫الَا ِر َسةُ َجالِ َسة‬ ِ
‫ٰهذه االَ ا‬ these idols ‫ب ا‬ ُ ‫اَلاك ََل‬ The guard dogs are sitting.
ً‫ت َكثِاي َرة‬ ِ
ُ ‫َكانَت الابُيُ او‬ The houses were many.

9. When writing a noun ending with two fathahs (‫)ﹱ‬, an alif ) ‫ ( ا‬must be added at the end.
e.g. ‫َميا ًدا‬
However, If there is a round ‫ (اَلتَّاءُ الا َم اربُوطَةُ) ة‬at the end of such a word, alif should not be
added.
e.g. ً‫ِر َسالَة‬

18
Section 1.6
َ‫ – الضَمَائَر‬Personal Pronouns

Definition: ‫ض َمائُِر‬ ِ ) are those words, which are used in place of names and refer
َ (singular: ‫ضمي‬
َ
to the speaker )‫ ( ُمتَ َكلِم‬or the second person )‫اضر‬
ِ ‫ (ح‬or the third person )‫( َغائِب‬.
َ

Table 1.1
َ‫ – الضَمَائَر‬Personal Pronouns

Unattached Form )َ‫(مَنَفَصَل‬ Attached Form )َ‫(مَتَصَل‬

‫ُه َو‬ He (one male), it ‫ُه‬ ‫احد ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
his, its, him ِ‫و‬
َ
‫ُهَا‬ They (two males) ‫ُهَا‬ their, them ِ
‫تَثانيَة ُم َذ َّكر َغائب‬ِ
‫ُه ام‬ They (many males) ‫ُه ام‬ their, them ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
‫ِه َي‬ She (one female), it ‫َها‬ her, its ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬ ِ‫و‬
َ
‫ُهَا‬ They (two females) ‫ُهَا‬ their, them ِ
‫تَثانيَة ُم َؤنَّث َغائب‬ ِ
‫ُه َّن‬ They (many females) ‫ُه َّن‬ their, them ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫ت‬ ِ ‫احد م َذ َّكر ح‬ ِ
َ ‫أَنا‬ You (one male) ‫َك‬ your ‫اضر‬ َ ُ ‫َو‬
‫أَناتُ َما‬ ‫ُك َما‬ ِ ‫تَثانِية م َذ َّكر ح‬
‫اضر‬
You (two males) your َ ُ َ
‫أَناتُ ام‬ You (many males) ‫ُك ام‬ your ِ
‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َحاضر‬
‫ت‬ ِ ‫أَنا‬ ‫ِك‬ ِ ‫احد مؤنَّث ح‬
‫اضر‬ ِ
You (one female) your َ َ ُ ‫َو‬
‫ أَناتُ َما‬You (two females) ‫ُك َما‬ ِ ‫تَثانِية مؤنَّث ح‬
‫اضر‬
your َ َُ َ
‫ت‬َّ ُ ‫ أَنا‬You (many females) ‫ُك َّن‬ your ِ
‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َحاضر‬
‫أَ ََن‬ I (one male or female) 9 ِ
‫ن‬
‫ ا‬،‫ﹻي‬ ‫ا‬ my, mine, me )‫كلِم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث‬ ِ‫و‬
َ َ‫احد ُمت‬ َ
‫َاحن ُن‬ We (many males or females) ‫ََن‬ our ‫م‬ِ
‫ل‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ت‬ ‫م‬ ‫ع‬ ‫ج‬‫و‬
َ َ ُ ‫َ ا َ َ َا‬ ‫ة‬ ‫ي‬ِ
‫ن‬ ‫ث‬ ‫ت‬
)‫( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث‬

In the unattached form, these dameers can appear as mubtada, faa‘il, etc. In the attached form,
they can appear as maf‘ool or mudaaf ilayhi. For more details, see section 2.4.1.

e.g. ‫ُه َو َمياد‬ He is Zayd. ‫ك‬َ ‫قَلَ ُم‬ your pen

‫أَ ََن طَالِب‬ I am a student. ‫ص ارتُ َها‬
َ َ‫ن‬ I helped her.

9
Sometimes, a ‫ن‬ )‫ (نُو ُن الا ِوقَايَِة‬is added before the ‫ض ِميا ر‬ َ ‫ ََيء‬to protect an i‘raab as in ‫ضَربَِ ان‬
َ , which would otherwise be
ِ ِ ِ ِ
‫ضَرِ ا‬
incorrectly read as ‫ب‬ َ (the ‫ َْل ُم الا َكل َمة‬of ‫ اَلاف اع ُل الا َماضى‬is ‫) َمبا ِن َعلَى الا َفات ِح‬.

19
Section 1.710
َ‫ – اَلَ َروفََاْلَ َارة‬Prepositions

Effect: A ‫جر‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬gives a ‫ َجر‬to the noun it enters upon, which is then known as ‫ َاَمُرور‬.

Table 1.2
َ‫ – اَلَ َروفََاْلَ َارة‬Prepositions

َ‫حرفََجر‬ Meaning Example

1. ‫ب‬ ِ with ‫ت ِبلا َقلَِم‬
ُ ‫َكتَ اب‬ I wrote with the pen.
‫ت‬ ِ‫ََتلل‬
2. َ by (for oath) By Allah!
3. ‫َك‬ like ‫َمياد َك االَ َس ِد‬ Zayd is like a lion.
‫ِل‬ ِ‫اَ المد ِِٰل‬
4. for ُ ‫َا‬ All praise is for Allah.
5. ‫َو‬ ِ‫وهللا‬
by (oath) َ By Allah!
6. ‫ُمان ُذ‬ since ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُمان ُذ أُ اسبُ اوع‬ I have not seen him since a week.
7. ‫ُم اذ‬ since/for ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُم اذ أَاربَ َع ِة أَََّيم‬ I have not see him for four days.
8. ‫َخ ََل‬ besides, except ‫َّاس َخ ََل َمياد‬ ُ ‫َجاءَ الن‬ The people came except Zayd.
9. ‫ب‬
َّ ‫ُر‬ many a… ‫ب َع ِاَل يَ اع َم ُل بِعِال ِم ِه‬ َّ ‫ُر‬ Many a learned person acts on his
knowledge.
10. ‫اشا‬
َ ‫َح‬ besides, except ‫اشا َمياد‬َ ‫َّاس َح‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ الن‬ The people came except Zayd.
11. ‫ِم ان‬ from َّ ‫ت ِم َن‬
‫الس َف ِر‬ ُ ‫َر َج اع‬ I returned from the journey.
12. ‫َع َدا‬ besides, except ‫َّاس َع َدا َمياد‬ ُ ‫َجاءَ الن‬ The people came except Zayd.
13. ‫ف‬ ِ ‫ت‬ ِ ‫ميد ِف الاب ي‬
‫ا‬ in, regarding ‫َا‬ ‫َا‬ Zayd is in the house.
ِ ‫ب َع ِن الا َم ِريا‬ َِّ
14. ‫َع ان‬ from, regarding ‫ض‬ ُ ‫َسأَ َل الطباي‬ The doctor asked about the patient.
15. ‫َع ٰلى‬ on ‫ب َع ٰلى الا ُك ارِس ِي‬ ُ ‫اَلث اَّو‬ The cloth/clothes is/are on the chair.
16. ‫ح ِٰت‬ ‫ت َح َِّت الصاب ِح‬ ِ
َ up to, until ُ ‫ِنا‬ I slept till dawn.
17. ‫إِ ٰٰل‬ up to, towards ‫ت إِ َٰل الا َم ِديانَ ِة‬
ُ ‫َسافَ ار‬ I travelled to Madinah.

Example 1: ‫اَلنَّ اح ُو ِف الا َك ََلِم َكالا ِم ال ِح ِف الطَّ َع ِام‬ Grammar in speech is like salt in food.

10
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 76-81.

20
Example 2 with Sentence Analysis:
َ‫ََََبلقلم‬ َ‫كت بت‬ I wrote with the pen.
‫ َاَمُرور‬+ ‫َح ارف َجر‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫ُمتَ َعلِق ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬ + ‫ فَا ِعل‬+ ‫فِ اعل‬
Note: Together, the ‫جر‬ ِ ِِ
َ ‫ َح ارف‬and ‫ َاَمُرور‬are known as ‫( ُمتَ َعلق‬connected) of the ‫ َخبَر‬in ‫جُالَة ا اسيَّة‬
(there is more detail to this, and will follow later), and of the ‫ فِ اعل‬in ‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة‬.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.
i. ‫املسجد قريب من بيت ميد‬ iii. ‫الكتب على املنضدة‬
ii. ‫نزل املطر من السماء‬ iv. ‫مينب جالسة على الكرسي ف الجرة‬

21
Section 1.811
َ‫( اَلَ َروفََ َالمَشَبَهَةَََبَلَفَعَل‬also called ‫ – )إَنََوأخوات ها‬Those Particles That Resemble the
Verb

 These are called ‫شبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬ ُ ‫ اَ الُُر‬because like ‫اَلا ِف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َع ِد اي‬, they also govern two words.
َ ‫وف الا ُم‬
These ‫ح ُروف‬ ِِ
 ُ appear before a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and ‫(جُالَة ا اسيَّة) َخبَر‬.
ِ ِ
Effect: Such a particle gives a ‫صب‬ ‫ نَ ا‬to the ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬which is then known as ‫( ا اس ُم إِ َّن‬or ‫ ا اس ُم أَ َّن‬and so
َ which is then known as ‫( َخبَ ُر إِ َّن‬or ‫ َخبَ ُر أَ َّن‬and so on).
on) and a ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫خبَ ر‬

Table 1.3
َ‫ – اَلََروفََالَمَشَبَهَةَََبََلفَعَل‬Those Particles That Resemble the Verb

Meaning Example
1. ‫إِ َّن‬ certainly, verily, indeed ‫إِ َّن هللاَ َعلِايم‬ Verily Allah is All-Knowing.
2. ‫أَ َّن‬ that ‫اْل امتِ َحا َن قَ ِرياب‬
ِ‫ف أَ َّن ا‬
ُ ‫أَ اع ِر‬ I know that the examination is
near.
3. َّ ‫ َكأ‬as if
‫َن‬ ‫ت َج ِدياد‬ َّ ‫َكأ‬
َ ‫َن الابَ اي‬ It is as if the house is new.
ِ ‫ ٰل‬but, however
4. ‫ك َّن‬ ‫ث قَ ِد امي‬ ِ
َ ‫ت َجدياد ٰلكِ َّن االَ ََث‬
ُ ‫ اَلابَ اي‬The house is new but the
furniture is old.
5. ‫ت‬ َ ‫ لَاي‬if only, I wish ‫اب َعائِد‬
َ َ‫ت الشَّب‬ َ ‫لَاي‬ I wish youth would return.
6. َّ‫ لَ َعل‬maybe, hopefully, ‫اْل امتِ َحا َن َس اهل‬
ِ‫لَعلَّ ا‬
َ
Hopefully, the examination
perhaps will be easy.

Sentence Analysis:
‫علي َم‬ َ
‫للا‬ َ‫إَن‬ Indeed, Allah is All-Knowing.
‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫اِ اس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫ف الا ُم َشبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬
ُ ‫اَ الَار‬

Notes:
1. Difference between ‫ إِ َّن‬and ‫أَ َّن‬:
a. ‫ إِ َّن‬is generally used at the beginning of a sentence.
‫ أَ َّن‬is generally used in the middle of a sentence.

11
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 69-75.

22
 b. Sometimes, ‫ إِ َّن‬appears in the middle of a sentence. This happens in the following
two cases:
i. When it is used after a word with root letters ‫ق – و – ل‬.
e.g. َ ‫يَ ُق او ُل إِن ََّها بَ َقَرة‬
ُ‫ص افَراء‬ He says, indeed, it is a yellow cow.
ii. ِ .12
When it is at the beginning of a ‫صلَة‬

ُ‫َح َِتُمه‬
‫نأا‬ ِِ ِ َّ ُ ‫ُمار‬
e.g. ‫ت الذ اي إ ا‬ I visited the one whom I respect.

2. The ‫خبَ ر‬
َ can be a complete sentence.
ِ ‫إِ َّن ميدا أُمه ص‬
‫الَة‬
Example 1: َ ُ ً ‫َا‬ Indeed, Zayd’s mother is pious.

َ‫صالَة‬ َ‫أَ يمه‬ ‫زي ادا‬ َ‫إَن‬

‫ضاف إِلَ ِيه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬+ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬

)‫= (جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫اِ اس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫ف الا ُم َشبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬

ُ ‫اَ الَار‬

Example 2: ‫إِ َّن َميا ًدا أَ َك َل الطَّ َع َام‬ Indeed, Zayd ate the food.

َ‫الطعَام‬ َ‫أَكل‬ ‫زي ادا‬ َ‫إَن‬

)‫ َم افعُول = (جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬+ ‫فِ اعل َم َع فَاعِلِ ِه‬

‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن‬ ‫اِ اس ُم إِ َّن‬ ‫ف الا ُم َشبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬

ُ ‫اَ الَار‬

3. If the ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ
َ is (‫) َجار َوَاَمُرور‬, then the ‫ َخبَ ر‬will appear first and the ‫ ا اسم‬second.
e.g. ‫إِ َّن إِلَينَا إِ ََيبَ ُه ام‬ Indeed, to us is their return.

َ‫إَيب هم‬ ‫إلينا‬ َ‫إن‬

‫ضاف إِلَ ِيه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬+ ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ُم‬ ‫َجار َو َاَمُرور‬

ِ ِ ِ ‫ف الا ُم َشبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬

ُ ‫ا اس ُم إ َّن‬
)‫(م َؤ َّخر‬ ُ ‫َخبَ ر إ َّن‬
)‫(م َق َّدم‬ ُ ‫اَ الَار‬

12
‫ ِصلَة‬will be discussed in Section 2.4.2.

23
4. When ُ‫ َما الا َكافَّة‬is joined to any of these ‫ح ُروف‬
ُ , their effect is cancelled.
ِ ‫إَِِّنَا إِ ٰل ُكم إِٰله َّو‬
‫احد‬
e.g. ‫ُ ا‬ Your god is only one god.
Note: In this example, the meaning has also changed to “only.”

5. ‫ إِ َّن‬by itself conveys emphasis. Sometimes, ‫ َْل ُم التَّأاكِاي ِد‬can be added before the ‫خبَ ر‬
َ to convey
even more emphasis.
ِ‫إِنِك لَرسو ُل هللا‬
e.g. ‫َ َ ُا‬ Indeed, you are the messenger of Allah.

‫اك‬
َ ‫َخ‬ ُ ‫ن َل اَع ِر‬
َ‫فأ‬ ِِ
‫إا‬ Indeed, I know your brother.

EXCERISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫لعل املريض َنئم‬ iv. ‫كأن القمر مصباح‬

ii. ‫اعلم أن ميدا عاقل‬ v. ‫ليت القمر طالع‬
iii. ‫إن رجَل دخل البيت‬ vi. ‫إن علينا بيانه‬

24
Section 1.913
َ‫( اَلَفَعَالََالنَاقَصَة‬also called ‫ – )كانََوأخوات ها‬Auxiliary (Defective) Verbs

 ‫ فِ اعل ََنقِص‬is called ‫( ََنقِص‬incomplete/defective) because even though it is a ‫فِ اعل َْل ِمم‬, it needs
two ma‘mools (‫ي‬ ِ ‫) َم اعمولَ ا‬. The sentence remains incomplete with one ‫ َم اعمول‬.
ُ ُ
e.g. ‫َكا َن َمياد‬ Zayd was (the sentence remains incomplete).
 These verbs enter on a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and a ‫خبَ ر‬ َ.
Effect: They give ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬, which becomes known as ‫( اِ اس ُم َكا َن‬or ‫ار‬ َ‫ص‬
ِ
َ ‫ ا اس ُم‬and so on) and
‫صب‬‫ نَ ا‬to the ‫ َخبَ ر‬, which becomes known as ‫( َخبَ ُر َكا َن‬or ‫ص َار‬ َ ‫ َخبَ ُر‬and so on).
Table 1.4

َ‫فَعَلََنَقَص‬ Meaning Example

1. ‫َكا َن‬ was ‫ت نَ ِظاي ًفا‬ُ ‫َكا َن الابَ اي‬ The house was clean.
2. ‫ار‬
َ‫ص‬ َ became ‫الر ُج ُل َغنِيًّا‬
َّ ‫ص َار‬ َ The man became wealthy.
3. ‫ح‬
َ َ‫صب‬
‫أَ ا‬ happen in the morning ‫ضا‬ً ‫صبَ َح َمياد َم ِريا‬ ‫أَ ا‬ Zayd became ill in the
morning.
OR
became ‫صبَ َح َمياد َغنِيًّا‬ ‫أَ ا‬ Zayd became rich.
4. ‫أَام ٰسى‬ happen in the evening, ‫أَام َسى الا َع ِام ُل ُمات َعبًا‬ The worker became tired in
became the evening.
5. ‫ض ٰحى‬
‫أَ ا‬ happen at midmorning, ‫ض َحى الاغَ َم ُام َكثِاي ًفا‬
‫أَ ا‬ The clouds became dense at
became mid morning.
6. َّ‫ظَل‬ happen during the day, ‫ظَ َّل الا َمطَُر ََن ِمًْل‬ It rained the whole day.
became
7. ‫ت‬
َ ‫َب‬ happen during the ‫ت َمياد ََنئِ ًما‬
َ ‫َب‬ Zayd passed the night
night, became sleeping.
8. ‫ام‬ ‫س َما َد َام َمياد َجالِ ًسا‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫َما َد‬ as long as ‫ا اجل ا‬ Sit as long as Zayd is sitting.
9. ‫ال‬
َ ‫َما َم‬ always, continuously ‫ضا‬ً ‫َما َم َال َمياد َم ِريا‬ Zayd was continuously sick.
10. ‫ِح‬
َ ‫َما بَر‬ always, continuously ‫صائِ ًما‬َ ‫َما بَر َِح َمياد‬ Zayd was always fasting.
11. ‫َما فَتِ َئ‬ always, continuously ‫َما فَتِ َئ َمياد نَ ِشايطًا‬ Zayd was always active.
12. ‫ك‬
َّ ‫ َما انا َف‬always, continuously ‫ص ِادقًا‬ ِ َّ ‫ما انا َف‬
َ ‫ك التَّاجُر‬ َ The trader was always
truthful.
13. ‫لَايس‬
َ no, not ‫اْلَ ِاد ُم قَ ِوًَّي‬
‫س ا‬ َ ‫لَاي‬ The servant is not strong.

13
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 62-68 & vol. 2, 151-
155.

25
Sentence Analysis:
‫نظي افَا‬ َ‫الب يت‬ َ ‫ك‬
‫ان‬ The house was clean.
‫َخبَ ُر َكا َن‬ ‫اِ اس ُم َكا َن‬ ‫فِ اعل ََنقِص‬

Notes:
1. When ‫ َكا َن‬is used with ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬, it gives the meaning of past continuous or past habitual.
e.g. ‫ب‬
ُ ُ‫َكا َن َمياد يَكات‬ Zayd was writing/Zayd used to write.
Note: Here, the ‫خبَ ر‬ ِِ
َ of ‫ َكا َن‬is a ‫جُالَة ف اعليَّة‬. Also, note the two ways it is translated above.

2. ‫ص َار – َكا َن‬

َ – ‫صبَ َح‬
‫ض ٰحى – أَام ٰسى – أَ ا‬ َ ‫ َب‬can be used in ‫ضا ِرع‬
‫ت – ظَ َّل – أَ ا‬ َ ‫ ُم‬and ‫ أَامر‬as well.

‫ِح – َما َم َال‬ ِ َّ ‫ َما انا َف‬can be used in ‫ضا ِرع‬

3. َ ‫ك – َما فَت َئ – َما بَر‬ َ ‫ ُم‬but not in ‫أَامر‬.

4.
َ ‫ لَاي‬have a past tense only (no ‫ضا ِرع‬
‫ َما َد َام‬and ‫س‬ َ ‫ ُم‬or ‫)أَامر‬.

5. ‫ َما َد َام‬must be preceded by another sentence.

6. The ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ
َ of ‫س‬
َ ‫ لَاي‬is sometimes prefixed with a ‫ب‬.
‫ي‬ ِ ِ ‫ أَلَيس هللا ِبَح َك ِم ا‬Is Allah not the greatest of rulers/best of judges?
e.g. َ ‫الَاكم ا‬ ‫ا ُ ا‬ َ

7. If the ‫خبَ ر‬
َ is (‫) َجار َوَاَمُرور‬, then the ‫ َخبَ ر‬will appear first and the ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬second.
e.g. َ‫سحَاب‬ َ‫فََالسماء‬ َ ‫ك‬
‫ان‬ There were clouds in the sky.
َّ ‫اِ اس ُم َكا َن ( ُم َؤ‬
)‫خر‬ )‫خبَ ُر َكا َن ( ُم َقدَّم‬
َ ‫فِ اعل ََنقِص‬

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫ليس العامل نشيطا‬ v. ‫صار الكبش سينا‬

ii. ‫كان منامه مناما صادقا‬ vi. ‫ْل يزال لسانك رطبا من ذكر هللا‬
iii. ‫أمسى الغن فقيا‬ vii. ‫يصبح املداد جافا‬
iv. ‫نويت اْلعتكاف ما دمت ف املسجد‬

26
 CHAPTER 2
َ‫ن‬
‫ – اََلمَعََربََوََ َالمَبَ ي‬Declinable and Indeclinable Words

Words are of two types with respect to changes, which may or may not take place at their
ends. If the end of a word remains the same in all conditions, it is called ‫ ; َماب ِن‬and that word
whose end changes is called ‫ ُم اعَرب‬.

Section 2.114
َ‫أن واع َالبناء‬: Those conditions or states (‫َح َوال‬ ‫)أ ا‬, which remain unchanged at the end of ‫ َماب ِن‬words
ِ
are four: ‫ضم‬ َ , ‫فَ اتح‬, ‫ َك اسر‬and ‫ ُس ُك اون‬. These are called ‫ع الابِنَاء‬
ُ ‫أَنا َوا‬.

َ‫أن واع َالعرَاب‬: Those conditions or states (‫َح َوال‬

‫)أ ا‬, which occur at the end of ‫ ُم اعَرب‬words are four:
‫ َرفاع‬, ‫صب‬ ِ ‫ اَاِل اعراب( أَناواعُ ا ِل اعرا‬for short). These changes are
‫نَ ا‬, ‫ َجر‬, and ‫ٌ ْمَجز‬. These are called ‫ب‬ َ َ ُ َ
brought about at the end of a ‫ ُم اعَرب‬word in accordance with the requirement of the ‫امل‬ ِ‫ع‬
َ
(governing word).

َ‫ – عَلماتَالَعَرَاب‬Signs of I‘raab
ِ ‫ال اعر‬
I‘raab can be expressed in different ways. These are called ‫اب‬ ِ ُ ‫( َع ََل َم‬signs of i‘raab). The
َ ‫ات ا‬
two common ones are as follows:
1. ‫اب ِب الَرَك ِة‬ ِ
َ ُ ‫اَال اعَر‬: These are the basic signs and are the most common. I‘raab is shown by
means of a ‫حرَكة‬ َ i.e. ‫ض َّمة‬
َ or ‫ فَ ات َحة‬or ‫ َك اسَرة‬or ‫( ُس ُك اون‬which is the absence of a ‫) َحرَكة‬.
َ َ
e.g. ‫َر ُجل‬ ‫َر ُج ًَل‬ ‫َر ُجل‬ ‫ض ِر ا‬
‫ب‬ ‫ََلا يَ ا‬
ِ ‫اَاِلعراب ِب الر‬: Sometimes, the i‘raab is shown by means of any of the ‫وف ِعلَّة‬
2. ‫وف‬ ُ ‫ ُحُر‬i.e. ‫ و‬or ‫ ا‬or
ُُ ُ َ ‫ا‬
‫ي‬.
e.g. ‫أَبُ او َك‬ ‫أََب َك‬ َ ‫أَبِاي‬
‫ك‬

َ‫ – حَاْلَتََالمعرب‬States of Mu‘rab
As mentioned above, the conditions or states that occur at the end of ‫ ُم اعَرب‬words are four.
Below, we look at them in more detail.

14
This section is based upon the discussion in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibdtida’iyyah, vol. 2,
7-18.

27
 ِ ُ ‫ (و) حر‬appears at the
1. َ‫الرفَع‬ َ or its substitute such as ‫ف علَّة‬
َ ََ‫ حَالَة‬is the condition in which a ‫ض َّمة‬ ‫َا‬
end of a word. Such a word is said to be ‫ َم ارفُوع‬.
e.g. ‫أَخ‬ ‫أَ ُخ او َك‬ ‫أَبُ او َخالِد‬
ِ ُ ‫ (ا) حر‬appears at
َ ‫ فَ ات‬or its substitute such as ‫ف علَّة‬
2. َ‫ حَالَةَ َالنَصَب‬is the condition in which a ‫حة‬ ‫َا‬
the end of a word. Such a word is said to be ‫صوب‬ ُ ‫ َمان‬.
e.g. ‫أَ ًخا‬ ‫اك‬
َ ‫أَ َخ‬ ‫أ ََب َخالِد‬
ِ ُ ‫ (ي) حر‬appears at the
‫ َك ا‬or its substitute such as ‫ف علَّة‬
3. َ‫ حَالَةََاْلَر‬is the condition in which a ‫سَرة‬ ‫َا‬
end of a word. Such a word is said to be ‫َم ُرور‬ ‫ َا‬.
e.g. ‫أَخ‬ َ ‫أَ ِخاي‬
‫ك‬ ‫َب َخالِد‬
‫أِ ا‬
4. َ‫ حَالَةَ َاْلََزم‬is the condition in which a ‫ك اون‬ ُ ‫ ُس‬appears at the end of a word or its substitute (‫ن‬
in the case of ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ )ف اعل ُم‬is dropped from the end. Such a word is said to be ‫ َاَمُزوم‬.
e.g. ‫ض ِر ا‬
‫ب‬ ‫ََلا يَ ا‬ ‫ض ِربُ اوا‬
‫ََلا يَ ا‬
Note: It should be remembered that verbs can only be in the state of ‫ َرفاع‬, ‫صب‬
‫ نَ ا‬or ‫ َج ازم‬, while
nouns can only be in a state of ‫ َرفاع‬, ‫صب‬
‫نَ ا‬, or ‫ َجر‬.

Difference Between َ‫ كَسَرَةََ–َفَتَحَةََ–َضَمَة‬and َ‫كَسَرََ–َفَتَحََ–َضَم‬

 َ – ‫ َك اسر – فَ اتح‬are used to describe the states at the end of a ‫ َماب ِن‬, e.g. ‫ب‬
The words ‫ضم‬ َ ‫ضَر‬
َ has
a ‫ فَ اتح‬at the end. It is ‫ َماب ِن َعلَى الا َفات ِح‬.
 The words ‫ض َّمة‬
َ – ‫ َك اسَرة – فَ ات َحة‬are used for all other places where (‫)ﹹ‬, (‫ )ﹷ‬and (‫ )ﹻ‬appear.
In other words, (‫)ﹹ‬, (‫ )ﹷ‬and (‫ )ﹻ‬are normally called ‫ض َّمة‬
َ – ‫ َك اسَرة – فَ ات َحة‬, respectively, wherever
they occur except when one needs to precisely point out the end of a ‫ َماب ِن‬word. Thus, one
could say ‫ب‬ َ ‫ضَر‬َ has a ‫ فَ ات َحة‬on (‫)ض‬, a ‫ فَ ات َحة‬on (‫)ر‬, and a ‫ فَ ات َحة‬on (‫)ب‬, but one must say (‫ب‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ ) is
‫ َماب ِن َعلَى الا َفات ِح‬.

28
Section 2.2
َ‫ن‬
‫ – اَلَمَبَ ي‬Indeclinable Word
As mentioned earlier, a ‫ َماب ِن‬is that word whose end remains unchanged in all conditions i.e.
irrespective of the requirement of the ‫امل‬ِ ‫ ع‬governing it.
َ
e.g. ‫َجاءَ ٰهذا‬ ‫ت ٰهذا‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ‫ت ِبٰذا‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬
This came. I saw this. I passed by this.

Note: The ‫حرَكة‬

َ َ at the end of ‫ ٰه َذا‬remained constant and did not change according to the
‫ َع ِامل‬requirement.

Types of َ‫مَبَن‬:
1. All Particles )‫ح ُروف‬
ُ(*
ِ ‫* اَلا ِفعل اَلام‬
‫اض اي‬
2. َ ُ‫ا‬
‫ف‬ ِ ‫* اَالَمر اَ ال‬
ُ ‫اضُر اَلا َم اعُراو‬
3. َ ُ‫ا‬
ِ ِ ِ ِِ ِ
4. Those seeghahs of ‫ضا ِرع‬ َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬that are ‫ َغائب( جَا ُع ُم َؤنَّث‬and ‫ ) َحاضر‬or have ‫ ثَقاي لَة( نُ او ُن التَّأاكايد‬and
‫) َخ ِفاي َفة‬.
Amongst nouns )ُ‫(اَالَ اسَاء‬, those whose ends remain constant are called ‫ك ِن‬ ِ ‫ َغي ر الامتم‬i.e.
5. َ َُ ُ ‫ا‬
nouns, which do not give place to changes. These nouns are ‫ َماب ِن‬and are recognized by
ِ
their resemblance with any one of the three types of ‫ل‬ ‫ اَلا َماب ِن االَ ا‬words (‫ ُحُراوف‬or ‫اَلاف اع ُل‬
ُ‫ص‬
‫اضى‬ِ ‫ اَلام‬or ‫ف‬ ِ ‫)اَالَمر اَ ال‬. This resemblance can be in any one of the following ways:
ُ ‫اضُر اَلا َم اعُراو‬
َ َ ُ‫ا‬
a. Resemblance in meaning. For example, the noun ‫( ُرَويا َد‬give grace/respite) resembles
the word ‫أَام ِه ال‬, which is ‫ف‬ ِ ‫( اَالَمر اَ ال‬one of the ‫ )اَلامب ِن االَصل‬and has the same
ُ ‫اض ُر اَلا َم اعُراو‬َ ُ‫ا‬ ُ‫ا‬ ‫َا‬
meaning.
Resemblance in dependency. For example, the noun ‫ارةِ) ٰه َذا‬ ِ ِ
b. َ ‫(ا اس ُم اال َش‬, which is
dependent on a ‫شار إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬to give meaning, resembles a ‫( َح ارف‬one of the ‫ص ُل‬ ‫)اَلا َماب ِن االَ ا‬,
which is also dependent on another word to give meaning.
c. Resemblance in having less than three letters. For example, the noun ‫ َم ان‬, which is
less than three letters, resembles ‫ح ارف‬
َ (e.g. ‫) َو‬, which is also generally less than three
letters.
d. Resemblance in having had a ‫ح ارف‬ َ originally. For example, the noun ‫أَ َح َد َع َشَر‬
resembles a ‫ح ارف‬
َ in the sense that originally it contained a ‫(أَ َحد َو َع اشر) َح ارف‬.
*These three are known as ‫ل‬
ُ‫ص‬‫اَلا َماب ِن االَ ا‬.

29
َ‫العرابَالمحلي‬:15
When a ‫ َماب ِن‬word appears in a sentence in a place where it is supposed to be in the state of ‫ َرفاع‬,
‫صب‬‫نَ ا‬, ‫ َجر‬, or ‫ َج ازم‬, its end does not change because it is ‫ َماب ِن‬. However, it is said that it is in the
place of ‫ َرفاع‬, ‫صب‬ ‫)ِ اف َُمَ ِل َرفاع أ اَو نَ ا‬, in accordance with its place in the
‫نَ ا‬, ‫ َجر‬, or ‫صب أ اَو َجر أ اَو َج ازم( َج ازم‬
sentence.
For example,
ُ‫ص ارََنه‬
َ َ‫ن‬ We helped him.
Keeping in mind that all pronouns are ‫ َماب ِن‬, this sentence will be analyzed as follows:
ِ ِ
‫صَر‬َ َ‫ ن‬is ‫ ف اعل َماض‬and is ‫ َماب ِن َعلَى الس ُك اون‬.
‫ ََن‬is ‫اعل‬ِ َ‫ف‬, is ‫ مب ِن علَى الس ُكو ِن‬and ‫ِف َُم ِل رفاع‬.
‫ا‬ َ ‫َا‬ َ َ ‫ا‬
‫ِ اف َُمَ ِل نَ ا‬.
ِ ‫ َماب ِن َعلَى الض‬and ‫صب‬
ِ
ُ‫ ه‬is ‫م اف ُع اول بِه‬,
َ is ‫َّم‬

EXERCISE
1. Analyze the following sentences like in the example given above.

i. ‫أت هذا الكتاب‬

ُ ‫قر‬
ii. ‫ذهبت إٰل عمه‬
َ
iii. ‫كتابه ف بيته‬

15
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 35-38.

30
Section 2.3
َ‫ – اَلَمَعََرب‬Declinable Word
As mentioned above, a ‫ ُم اعَرب‬is that word whose end accepts any of the i‘raab according to the
ِ ‫ ع‬governing it.
requirement of the ‫امل‬ َ
e.g. َ‫َجاءَ رجل‬ َ‫ت رج اَل‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ َ‫ت برجل‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬
A man came. I saw a man. I passed by a man.

ِ ‫ع‬.
Note: The i‘raab of ‫ رجل‬keep on changing according to the requirement of the ‫امل‬ َ

Types of َ‫مَعَرَب‬:
ِ ِ
ُ ‫(اَالَفا َع‬, all of the seeghahs of ‫ضا ِرع‬
1. Amongst verbs )‫ال‬ َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬besides those of ‫ َغائب( جَا ُع ُم َؤنَّث‬and
ِ ‫ )ح‬and those with ‫ ثَِقي لَة( نُو ُن التَّأكِي ِد‬and ‫ )خ ِفي َفة‬are ‫معرب‬.
‫اضر‬ َ ‫ا‬ ‫ا ا‬ ‫َا‬ َ‫ُ ا‬
2. Amongst nouns )ُ‫(اَالَ اسَاء‬, those nouns, which accept i‘raab changes are ‫ ُم اعَرب‬. They are
known as ‫ ُمتَ َمكِن‬i.e. nouns which give place to i‘raab changes.
Note: These nouns will be ‫ ُم اعَرب‬only when they are used in a sentence. If not used in a
sentence, such a word will be ‫ َماب ِن‬. For example, ‫ بَايت‬on its own, when not part of a
ِ ‫ َماب ِن َعلَى الض‬.
sentence, will be ‫َّم‬

EXERCISES

1. State with reason whether the following words are ‫ َماب ِن‬or ‫ ُم اعَرب‬.

i. ‫َِس َع‬ v. ِ ‫يك‬

‫اس ار َن‬ َ
ii. ‫ُمان ُذ‬ ِ
vi. ‫ٰلك َّن‬
ِ
iii. ‫ص ُر‬
ُ ‫يَان‬ vii. ‫ك‬ َ ‫ٰذل‬
iv. ‫ض ِربا َن‬
‫يَ ا‬ viii. ‫اِ اسَعِي‬
‫ا‬

2. Translate the following sentences and identify the ‫ َماب ِن‬and ‫ ُم اعَرب‬words in them.
i. ِ‫الزاهرة‬
َ َّ ‫ت إ َٰل‬
ِ ُ ‫نَظَر‬
‫ا‬ v. ‫َم ِٰت يُ َسافُِر َعلِي؟‬
ِ
ii. ‫صديا ِق‬ ِ
َّ ‫اب م َن ال‬ ِ vi. ‫َب ِف الدَّا ِر‬
َ َ‫ت الاكت‬
ُ ‫َخ اذ‬
َ‫أ‬ ُ ‫اَال‬
iii. ‫ج ِة‬ ِ ِ ِ‫فَرِح الطَّال‬
َ ‫ب بلنَّتاي‬ُ َ vii. ‫اَلا َولَ ُد ُم َؤ َّدب‬
iv. ‫خالد؟‬ ِ ِِ ِ
َ َ‫ف َجاء‬ َ ‫َكاي‬ viii. ‫ي‬
َ ‫اَللُ ُحيب الا ُم احسن ا‬

31
Section 2.4
َ‫ – أقسامَالَسَاءََالَمَبَنَيَة‬Types of Indeclinable Nouns
The types of ُ‫ اَالَ اسَاءُ الا َمابنِيَّة‬are as follows:
1. ‫ض َمائُِر‬
َّ ‫( اَل‬personal pronouns)
2. ُ‫ص اولَة‬
ُ ‫( اَالَ اسَاءُ الا َم او‬relative pronouns)
3. ِ‫ارة‬ ِ
َ ‫( أَ اسَاءُ اال َش‬demonstrative pronouns)
ِ ‫( أَ اسَاء االَفا ع‬those nouns which have the meaning of verbs)
4. ‫ال‬ َ ُ
ِ ‫( أَ اساء االَصو‬those nouns which denote a sound)
5. ‫ات‬َ‫َ ُ ا‬
6. ‫ف‬
ُ ‫( اَلظُراو‬adverbs)
7. ‫ت‬ ِ
ُ ‫( اَلاكنَ َاَي‬those nouns which indicate an unspecified quantity)
8. ‫ب الابِنَائِي‬
ُ ‫( اَلا ُمرَّك‬numerical phrase)
َ

In the following pages, we will look at each of these in detail.

32
Section 2.4.116
َ‫ – الضَمَائَر‬Personal Pronouns

We have discussed ‫ض َمائُِر‬

َ before. Now, we will look at them in greater detail.
Definition: ‫ض َمائُِر‬
َ (singular: ‫ضمي‬
ِ ) are those words, which are used in place of names and refer
َ
to the speaker )‫ ( ُمتَ َكلِم‬or the second person )‫اضر‬
ِ ‫ (ح‬or the third person )‫( َغائِب‬.
َ
There are two types of ‫ض َمائُِر‬
َ:
1. ‫لض ِماي ُر الابَا ِرُم‬
َّ َ‫ – ا‬Visible or Independent Pronoun: It is that ‫ض ِمي‬
َ , which is visible and has a
distinct form. It can appear on its own, i.e. unattached to another word (known as
ِ ‫)مان َف‬, or it can be attached to another word (known as ‫َّصل‬
‫صل‬ ِ ‫)مت‬. These two are defined as
ُ ُ
follows:
‫ص ُل‬ِ ‫لض ِمي ر الامان َف‬
i. ُ ُ ‫اَ َّ ا‬: The unattached pronoun is that pronoun which can be
pronounced on its own without being connected to another word.
ِ ‫لض ِمي ر الامت‬
‫َّص ُل‬
ii. ُ ُ ‫اَ َّ ا‬: The attached pronoun is that pronoun which cannot be pronounced
on its own without being connected to another word.
2. ُ‫ستَِت‬
‫الا ُم ا‬ ‫لض ِماي ُر‬
َّ َ‫ – ا‬Hidden or Implied Pronoun: It is that ‫ض ِمي‬
َ , which is not visible but is
ِ ‫)مت‬.
implied. It is always attached (‫َّصل‬ ُ
Note: A hidden ‫ض ِمي‬
َ can only appear in ‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬. (refer to Table 2.2)

Below are tables showing different forms that the ‫ض َمائُِر‬

َ will assume in the various
conditions/states (haalaat).

16
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 120-135.

33
 ‫‪Table 2.1‬‬
‫الرفَعَ ‪ in‬ضميَرََمن فصلََ(َبََرزَ)‬
‫)ضميَرََمرفوعَمن فصلَ ‪ (also called‬حَالَةََ َ‬

‫ُه َو‬ ‫احد ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬

‫َ‬
‫ُهَا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َذ َّكر َغائب‬
‫ُه ام‬ ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
‫ِه َي‬ ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُهَا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َؤنَّث َغائب‬‫ِ‬
‫ُه َّن‬ ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫ت‬ ‫احد م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أَنا َ‬ ‫اضر‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َو ُ‬
‫أَناتُ َما‬ ‫تَثانِية م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫أَناتُ ام‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َحاضر‬
‫ت‬‫أَنا ِ‬ ‫احد مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َو ُ َ َ‬
‫أَناتُ َما‬ ‫تَثانِية مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫َ َُ َ‬
‫ت‬
‫أَنا ُ َّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َحاضر‬
‫أَ ََن‬ ‫احد ُمتَ َكلِم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َاحن ُن‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانِيَة َوجَاع ُمتَ َكلم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫رجلَ‬ ‫هوَ‬

‫َخبَ ر‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬
‫الرفا ِع)‬
‫(حالَةُ َّ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪34‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.2‬‬
‫الرفَعَ ‪ in‬ضميَرََمتصلَ‬
‫)ضميَرََمرفوعَمتصلَ ‪ (also called‬حَالَةََ َ‬

‫َبََرزَ‬ ‫مَسَتَتَ‬

‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫(ه َو)‬

‫ب ُ‬‫ضَر َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫(ه َو)‬
‫ب ُ‬‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫يَ ا‬ ‫احد ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ضَرَب (ا)‬ ‫ض ِرَب ِن (ا)‬‫يَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َذ َّكر َغائب‬
‫َ‬
‫ضَربُ اوا (و)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربُ او َن (و)‬
‫يَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ضربت ِ‬
‫(ه َي)‬ ‫تَض ِرب ِ‬
‫(ه َي)‬ ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ ََ ا‬ ‫ا ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ضَربَتَا (ا)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِرَب ِن (ا)‬‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫تَثانِيَة ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫ضَربا َن (ن)‬
‫َ‬ ‫ض ِربا َن (ن)‬
‫يَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫احد م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫(ت)‬
‫ت َ‬‫ضَربا َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ت)‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫ب (أَنا َ‬ ‫تَ ا‬ ‫اضر‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َو ُ‬
‫ضَرباتُ َما (َتَُا)‬ ‫ض ِرَب ِن (ا)‬ ‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫تَثانِية م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫ضَرباتُ ام ( ُات)‬ ‫ض ِربُ او َن (و)‬‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َحاضر‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫احد مؤنَّث ح ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ضَربات (ت)‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ي (ي)‬ ‫ض ِربِ ا َ‬
‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫اضر‬ ‫َو ُ َ َ‬
‫ضَرباتُ َما (َتَُا)‬ ‫ض ِرَب ِن (ا)‬ ‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫تَثانِية مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َُ َ‬
‫ت (تُ َّن)‬
‫ضَربا ُ َّ‬ ‫ض ِربا َن (ن)‬
‫تَ ا‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َحاضر‬
‫َ‬
‫(ت)‬
‫ت ُ‬ ‫ضَربا ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫ب (أَ ََن)‬ ‫أَ ا‬ ‫احد ُمتَ َكلِم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬
‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫تَثانِيَة َوجَاع ُمتَ َكلم ( ُم َذكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬
‫(َن)‬
‫ضَربانَا َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫(حن ُن)‬
‫ب َا‬ ‫ض ِر ُ‬
‫نَ ا‬ ‫َّ‬

‫‪, is indicated after its‬فَ ِ‬

‫اعل ‪, which in many cases is the‬ض ِمي ر مت ِ‬
‫َّصل ‪Note: In the table above, the‬‬ ‫َ ا ُ‬
‫‪respective verb in parentheses.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬
 ‫‪Table 2.3‬‬
‫)ضميََمنصوبَمتصَلَ ‪ and‬ضميََمنصوبَمن فصلَ ‪ (also called‬حَالَةََالنَصَبَ ‪ in‬ضميََمتصلَ ‪ and‬ضميََمن فصلَ‬

‫(ب ِرم)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬

‫(ب ِرم)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫صوب ُمتَّصل َ‬
‫ضمي َمان ُ‬‫َ‬
‫صوب ُمان َفصل َ‬
‫ضمي َمان ُ‬‫َ‬
‫‪Dameer‬‬ ‫‪Example‬‬
‫إِ ََّيهُ‬ ‫ه‬ ‫ضَربَهُ‬‫َ‬ ‫احد ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُهَا‬ ‫ها‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه َما‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َذ َّكر َغائب‬
‫َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُه ام‬ ‫هم‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه ام‬
‫َ‬ ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
‫إِ ََّي َها‬ ‫ها‬ ‫ضَربَ َها‬‫َ‬ ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُهَا‬ ‫ها‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه َما‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َؤنَّث َغائب‬
‫َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُه َّن‬ ‫هن‬ ‫ضَربَ ُه َّن‬
‫َ‬ ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫إِ ََّي َك‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ضَربَ َ‬ ‫احد م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َو ُ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُك َما‬ ‫كما‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك َما‬ ‫تَثانِية م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُك ام‬ ‫كم‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك ام‬
‫َ‬ ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َحا ِضر‬
‫إِ ََّي ِك‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ك‬‫ضرب ِ‬ ‫احد مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ ََ‬ ‫َو ُ َ َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُك َما‬ ‫كما‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك َما‬ ‫اضر‬‫تَثانِية مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َُ َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ُك َّن‬ ‫كن‬ ‫ضَربَ ُك َّن‬ ‫جَاع مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬
‫َ‬ ‫َُ َ‬
‫ي‬
‫إ ََّي َ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ِ ‪17‬‬
‫ضَربَ ان‬‫َ‬ ‫احد ُمتَ َكلِم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫إِ ََّي ََن‬ ‫َن‬ ‫ضَربَنَا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانِيَة َوجَاع ُمتَ َكلم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬
‫َ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ن عبدَ‬ ‫إََيكَ‬ ‫‪You alone we worship.‬‬

‫فِ اعل َم َع فَاعِلِ ِه‬ ‫صِ‬
‫ب)‬ ‫َم افعُول ُم َق َّدم َ‬
‫(حالَةُ النَّ ا‬

‫‪17‬‬
‫ن ‪Sometimes, a‬‬ ‫ض ِميا ر ‪( is added before the‬نُو ُن الا ِوقَايَِة)‬ ‫ضَربَِ ان ‪ََ to protect an i‘raab as in‬يء َ‬
‫‪َ , which would otherwise be‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ضَرِ ا‬
‫ب ‪incorrectly read as‬‬ ‫‪َ ).‬مبا ِن َعلَى الا َفتا ِح ‪ is‬اَلاف اع ُل الا َماض اي ‪َْ of‬لم َكل َمة ‪َ (the‬‬

‫‪36‬‬
‫(ب ِرم) ‪There are two ways in which‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪. One is when it is preceded‬حالَةُ ا اْل ِر ‪ِ appears in‬‬
‫ضماي ر ُمتَّصل َ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬
‫جر ‪by a‬‬
‫ف َ‬
‫ضاف ‪َ ; and the other is when some other word is‬ح ار ُ‬ ‫‪ُ to it.‬م َ‬

‫‪Table 2.4‬‬
‫)ضميَرَََمرورَمتصلَ ‪ (also called‬حَالَةََاْلَرَ ‪ in‬ضميَرََمتصلََ(َبرز)‬

‫بََرفََاْلَرَ‬ ‫َبَلَضَافَةَ‬
‫لَهُ‬ ‫َد ُارهُ‬ ‫احد ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َلَُما‬ ‫َد ُارُهَا‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َذ َّكر َغائب‬
‫َلُام‬ ‫َد ُارُه ام‬ ‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َغائِب‬
‫َلَا‬ ‫َد ُارَها‬ ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬ ‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َلَُما‬ ‫َد ُارُهَا‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانيَة ُم َؤنَّث َغائب‬‫ِ‬
‫َلُ َّن‬ ‫َد ُارُه َّن‬ ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث َغائِب‬
‫ك‬‫لَ َ‬ ‫َد ُارَك‬ ‫احد م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َو ُ‬
‫لَ ُك َما‬ ‫َد ُارُك َما‬ ‫تَثانِية م َذ َّكر ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬
‫لَ ُك ام‬ ‫َد ُارُك ام‬ ‫ِ‬
‫جَاع ُم َذ َّكر َحاضر‬
‫ك‬‫لَ ِ‬ ‫َد ُار ِك‬ ‫احد مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َو ُ َ َ‬
‫لَ ُك َما‬ ‫َد ُارُك َما‬ ‫اضر‬‫تَثانِية مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫َ َُ َ‬
‫لَ ُك َّن‬ ‫َد ُارُك َّن‬ ‫جَاع مؤنَّث ح ِ‬
‫اضر‬ ‫َُ َ‬
‫ِ ال‬ ‫َدا ِر اي‬ ‫احد ُمتَ َكلِم ( ُم َذ َّكر َوُم َؤنَّث)‬
‫وِ‬
‫َ‬
‫لَنَا‬ ‫َد ُارََن‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫تَثانِيَة َوجَاع ُمتَ َكلم ( ُم َذكر َوُم َؤنث)‬
‫َّ‬

‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫لهَ‬ ‫دارهَ‬ ‫‪His house is his.‬‬

‫ف َجر ‪َ +‬اَمُرور‬
‫َح ار ُ‬ ‫ضاف إِلَ ِيه‬
‫ضاف ‪ُ +‬م َ‬ ‫ُم َ‬
‫َّصل َمرور ِبر ِ‬‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ضافَِة)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اْلَِر)َ‬
‫ف ا‬ ‫(ضمي ُمت َا َا‬ ‫َ‬ ‫(ضمي ُمتَّصل َاَمرور ِباِل َ‬ ‫َ‬

‫ض ِماي ر َب ِرم ‪Note: The‬‬

‫اْلَِر ‪َ in‬‬
‫‪.‬مت ِ‬
‫َّصل ‪َ will always be‬حالَةُ ا‬ ‫ُ‬

‫‪37‬‬
َ‫ضمي رَالشَأَن‬:
It is that ‫ض ِماي ر َغائِب ُم َذ َّكر‬ َ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
‫( َم ار َجع‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ض ِماي ر‬َ.
e.g. ‫إِنَّهُ َمياد قَائِم‬ Indeed, the matter is that Zayd is standing.

َ‫ضمي رَالقصة‬:
It is that ‫ض ِماي ر َغائِب ُم َؤنَّث‬
َ , which sometimes appears at the beginning of a sentence without a
‫( َم ار َجع‬an earlier word that it refers to). The sentence after it clarifies such a ‫ض ِماي ر‬
َ.
e.g. ‫اط َمةُ قَائِ َمة‬
ِ َ‫إِنَّها ف‬
َ Indeed, the matter is that Fatimah is standing.

َ‫ضمي رَالفصل‬:
It is that ‫ض ِماي ر‬
َ , which appears between a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and a ‫ َخبَر‬for emphasis.
e.g. ‫ك ُه ُم الا ُم افلِ ُح او َن‬
َ ِ‫أُوٰلئ‬ It is they who are successful.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences, pointing out all the ‫ض َمائُِر‬
َ,
as well as their type and ‫ح َاْلت‬
َ.
i. ‫القطار قدم ف وقته‬ iii. ‫صَرََن‬
َ َ‫ن‬
ii. ‫حنن نرمقك‬ iv. ‫هللا يرمقها وإَيكم‬

38
Section 2.4.218
َ‫ اَلَسَاءََالَمَوَصَوَلَة‬- Relative Pronouns

ِ ِ
ُ ‫ ا اسم َم او‬is an ‫ ا اسم َم اع ِرفَة‬whose meaning/purpose is understood through the
Definition: An ‫ص اول‬
sentence, which comes after it, which is called ‫صلَة‬ ِ.
An ‫وص اول‬ ِ ِ
 ُ ‫ ا اسم َم‬cannot form a complete part of a sentence on its own. It must have a ‫صلَة‬
ِ , which is generally a ‫جُالَة خ َِبيَّة‬, must have a ‫ض ِمي ر‬
which relates (refers back) to it. The ‫صلَة‬ ََ ‫َ ا‬
(visible or hidden) referring to the ‫وص اول‬ ِ ِ is called ‫عائِد‬.
ُ ‫ا اسم َم‬. This ‫ضماي ر‬
َ َ

Table 2.5
َ‫اَلَسَاءََالَمَ َوصَ َولَةََللَمذكر‬
‫احد‬ِ‫و‬
َ ‫اَلَّ ِذ اي‬ who, that, which
ِ
‫تَثانيَة‬ ‫اَللَّ َذ ِان‬ those two who, that, which ‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬
‫تَثانِيَة‬ ‫اَللَّ َذيا ِن‬ those two who, that, which ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ِ‫ص‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
‫جَاع‬ ‫اَلَّ ِذيا َن‬ those who, that, which

Table 2.6
َ‫اَلَسَاءََالَمَ َوصَ َولَةََللمؤنث‬
‫احد‬ِ‫و‬ ‫اَلَِّ اِت‬ who, that, which
َ
ِ
‫تَثانيَة‬ ِ َ‫اَللَّت‬
‫ان‬ those two who, that, which ‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬
‫تَثانِيَة‬ ‫ي‬ِ ‫اَللَّتَ ا‬ those two who, that, which ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ِ‫ص‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
ِ
‫جَاع‬ ‫اَ َّلَل ا‬
‫ت‬ those who, that, which
‫جَاع‬ ‫ات‬ِ َّ
‫اَلل َو ا‬
those who, that, which

Examples
1. ‫صَرَك‬َ َ‫َجاءَ الذَيَ ن‬ The one (masculine) who helped you, came.
2. َ َ‫َجاءَ الذَانَ ن‬
‫صَرا َك‬ The two (masculine) who helped you, came.
3. ‫ضَرَب َك‬َ َ‫ت اللَذين‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ I saw the two (masculine) who hit you.
‫ن‬ ِ َ َ‫ت الذينَ ن‬ ِ
4. ‫ص ُراو ا‬ ُ ‫لَقاي‬ I met those (masculine) who helped me.
ِ
5. ‫ك‬َ ‫صَرتا‬َ َ‫َجاءَت الَتَ ن‬ The one (feminine) who helped you, came.
ِ
6. َ َ‫َجاءَت اللَتانَ ن‬
‫صَرََت َك‬ The two (feminine) who helped you, came.

18
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 136-140.

39
 7. ‫اك‬ َ َ‫ت اللَتَي‬
َ َ‫ضَربَت‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ I saw the two (feminine) who hit you.
ِ
8. ‫ك‬ َ َ‫َجاءَت الَلَتَ ن‬
َ َ‫ص ارن‬ Those (feminine) who helped you, came.

Additional Relative Pronouns:

1. ‫ ما‬and َ‫( من‬that and who)
 These are used for all genders and all numbers.
 The difference is that ‫ َم ان‬is used for intelligent beings (‫ )ذَ ِوى الا ُع ُق اوِل‬and ‫ َما‬is used for non-
intelligent beings (‫) َغاي ُر َذ ِوى الا ُع ُق اوِل‬.
ِ
e.g.
َ ‫أَ اح ِس ان ا ٰٰل َم ان أَ اح َس َن إِلَاي‬
‫ك‬ Show goodness to that person who has
shown goodness to you.
‫ت‬ ُ ‫قَ َرأا‬
َ ‫ت َما َكتَ اب‬ I read what you wrote.

2. َ‫ أَي‬and َ‫أَيَة‬
 َ ِ‫إ‬.
They are generally ‫ ُم اعَرب‬and used in ‫ضافَة‬
 ‫ أَي‬has the meaning of ‫اَلَّ ِذ اي‬.
e.g. ‫ِم ان أَ ِي كِتَاب‬ from which book…
 ‫ أَيَّة‬has the meaning of ‫اَلَِّ اِت‬.
e.g. ‫أَيَّةُ بِانت‬ which girl…

ِ َ‫ اِسم ف‬and an ‫اِسم م افعول‬, has the effect of ‫اِسم موصول‬.

3. ‫ال‬, which appears before an ‫اعل‬ ُ‫ا‬ ‫ا ُ َ ُا‬ ‫ا َا ُا‬
ِ
ُ ‫اَلضَّا ِر‬
‫ب‬ ‫ب‬َ ‫ضَر‬ َ ‫اَلَّذ اي‬
e.g. would equal
ِ
‫ب‬ُ ‫ضُراو‬ ‫اَلا َم ا‬ would equal ‫ب‬َ ‫ض ِر‬ ُ ‫اَلَّذ اي‬
‫لس ِام ُع او َن‬
َّ َ‫ا‬ would equal ‫اَلَّ ِذيا َن َِسعُ اوا‬

4. َ‫ذَو‬
According to the dialect of the tribe ‫بَنُ او طَي‬, it is an ‫ص اول‬ ِ
ُ ‫ا اسم َم او‬.
It is used for all genders and all numbers, without its form changing.

ِ
e.g. ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ضَرب‬َ ‫َجاءَ ذُ او‬ equals ‫ك‬َ َ‫ضَرب‬َ ‫َجاءَ الَّذ اي‬ The one who hit you, came.
ِ ‫رأَي‬
‫ضَربَك‬ َ ‫ت ذُ او‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ equals ‫ك‬َ َ‫ضَرب‬َ ‫ت الَّذ اي‬ُ ‫َا‬ I saw the one who hit you.
ِ
‫ك‬ َ ‫ت بِ ُذ او‬
َ َ‫ضَرب‬ ُ ‫َمَرار‬ equals ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ضَرب‬ َّ
َ ‫ت بلذ اي‬ ِ ُ ‫َمَرار‬ I passed by the one who hit you.

40
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫‪َ That person whose father is knowledgeable, came.‬جاءَ الَّ ِذ اي أَبُ اوهُ َع ِاَل‬
‫عالَ‬ ‫أَب وهَ‬ ‫الذَيَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬
‫ضاف إِلَ ِيه‬
‫ضاف ‪ُ +‬م َ‬
‫ُم َ‬

‫‪َ +‬خبَ ر = جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ اَِبيَّة‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

‫ِصلَة‬ ‫ص اول‬ ‫ِ‬

‫ا اسم َم او ُ‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ اَِبيَّة‬ ‫فَ ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫فِ اعل ‪+‬‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أين الذي ضرب ميدا؟‬

‫هللا يعلم ما ف الرض ‪ii.‬‬
‫جاءت اللتان تسكنان أمامنا ‪iii.‬‬
‫إن الذين كفروا ْل يدخلون اْلنة ‪iv.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬
Section 2.4.319
َ‫ – أَسَاءََالَشارة‬Demonstrative Pronouns

Definition: An ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ا اس ُم اال َش‬is that noun, which is used to point at something. These nouns are
of of two types.
i. ‫ب‬ ِ ‫لِال َق ِريا‬: It is used for pointing at something near.
ii. ‫لِالبَعِاي ِد‬: It is used for pointing at something far.

Table 2.7
َ‫أَسَاءََالَشارةََللمذكر‬

َ‫لَلَقََريَب‬ َ‫لَلَبَعَيَد‬
ِ‫و‬ ِ
‫احد‬ َ ‫ٰه َذا‬ this َ ‫ ٰذل‬that
‫ك‬
‫تَثانِيَة‬ ‫ٰه َذ ِان‬ َ ِ‫ٰذان‬
these those
‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬ ‫ك‬ ‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬
two… two…
‫تَثانِيَة‬ َ ِ‫َذيان‬
these ِ‫ص‬ those ِ‫ص‬
‫ٰه َذيا ِن‬ ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬ ‫ك‬ ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
two… two…
‫جَاع‬ ‫ٰه ُؤَْل ِء‬ these َ ِ‫ أُوٰلئ‬those
‫ك‬

Table 2.8
َ‫أَسَاءََالَشارةََللمؤنث‬

َ‫لَلَقََريَب‬ َ‫لَلَبَعَيَد‬
ِ‫و‬ ِ‫ٰه ِذه‬
‫احد‬ َ this َ ‫تِال‬
‫ك‬ that

‫تَثانِيَة‬ ‫اَت ِن‬ َ ِ‫ََتن‬

these those
َ ‫َه‬ two…
‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬ ‫ك‬
two…
‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫َحالَة‬

‫تَثانِيَة‬ َ ِ‫تَاين‬
ِ ‫َهاتَ ا‬ these ِ‫ص‬ those ِ‫ص‬
‫ي‬ ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬ ‫ك‬ ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
two… two…
‫جَاع‬ ‫ٰه ُؤَْل ِء‬ these َ ِ‫ أُوٰلئ‬those
‫ك‬

‫اب‬ ِ َ ِ‫ٰذل‬
e.g. ُ َ‫ك الاكت‬ that book
ِ ِ
ُ‫ٰه ُؤَْلء الن َساء‬ these women

َ ِ‫أُوٰلئ‬
‫ك ال ِر َجا ُل‬ those men

19
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 141-145.

42
Notes:
ِ ‫ال َشارةِ لِلا َق ِريا‬
1. In the case of ‫ب‬ ِ
َ ‫أَ اسَاءُ ا‬, for both masculine and feminine, the ‫ ٰه‬in the beginning is
not part of the actual ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫حر‬. However, it is so often used with
َ ‫ا اس ُم اال َش‬. It is, in fact, a ‫ف تَانبايه‬‫َا‬
ِ ‫ال َشارةِ لِال َق ِريا‬
the ‫ب‬ ِ
َ ‫أَ اسَاءُ ا‬, that it is normally considered a part of them.
2. The ‫ ك‬of ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ (اَلابَعاي ُد) ا اس ُم اال َش‬is sometimes changed according to the number of persons being
addressed. The meaning will not be affected.
e.g. ‫ٰذلِ ُك َما َرب ُك َما‬ He is the Lord of both of you.

3. If the ‫يه‬ ِ ِ
ِ َ‫ م َشار إِل‬is a ‫مضاف‬, then the ِ‫ال َشارة‬ ِِ
ُ َُ َ ‫ ا اس ُم ا‬will come after the ‫ضاف إلَيه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬.
e.g. َ ُ‫كِتَاب‬
‫ك ٰه َذا‬ this book of yours

4. If the ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ا اس ُم اال َش‬occurs as a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬, then the ‫ َخبَر‬will generally be a ‫نَكَرة‬.
e.g. ‫ٰه َذا كِتَاب‬ This is a book.
ِ should be added between the ‫مب تَ َدأ‬,
However, if the ‫خبَ ر‬ َ is also ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬, then a suitable ‫ضماي ر‬
َ ‫ُا‬
which is an ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ا اس ُم اال َش‬, and the ‫ َخبَر‬for it to remain a complete sentence.
‫اب‬ ِ
e.g. ُ َ‫ ٰه َذا ُه َو الاكت‬This is the book.
If no ‫ض ِمي‬
َ is added, it would be an incomplete sentence.
‫اب‬ ِ
e.g. ُ َ‫ٰه َذا الاكت‬ this book

5. If the ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ to be added between the ‫ مب تَ َدأ‬and

َ is a ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ ُم‬, then there will be no need for a ‫ضمي‬
َ ‫ُا‬
the ‫خبَ ر‬
َ.
ِ ِ‫ٰه َذا ابن الامل‬
‫ك‬
e.g. َ ُ‫ا‬ This is the son of the king.

ِ‫اِ اسم ا‬. However, they do not have any special

َ َ‫( ُهن‬there) are also ِ‫ال َش َارة‬
6. ‫ ُهنَا‬or ‫( ٰه ُهنَا‬here) and ‫اك‬ ُ
rules.

Sentence Analysis:

َ‫نفيَس‬ ‫القل َم‬ ‫ٰهذا‬ This pen is precious.

ِ‫اِ اسم ا‬
‫ ُم َشار إِلَ ِيه‬+ ِ‫ال َش َارة‬ ُ

‫َخبَ ر = جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

43
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Translate, fill in the i‘raab, and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫تلك السيارة قدمية‬ ‫هذه حجرة واسعة ‪iv.‬‬

‫أولئك َتار صادقون ‪ii.‬‬ ‫هذان ولدان مهذبن ‪v.‬‬
‫هؤْلء طَلب املدرسة ‪iii.‬‬ ‫هذان الولدان مهذبن ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪44‬‬
Section 2.4.420
َ‫ – أَسَاءََالَف عال‬Those Nouns Which Have the Meaning of Verbs

Definition: These are nouns that have the meaning of verbs but do not accept its signs.
 That which has the meaning of ‫اضي‬ ِ ‫اَلا ِفعل الام‬, gives the noun after it a raf‘; and the one
َ ُ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬
ِ ‫ال‬
which has the meaning of ‫اض ُر‬َ‫اَال اَمُر ا‬, gives the noun after it a nasb.

Table 2.9
Nouns in the Meaning of ‫الفعلَالماضي‬

Noun Verb Meaning Example

‫ات‬
َ ‫َهاي َه‬ ‫بَ ُع َد‬ he/it became far, it is ‫ات َمياد أَ ان يَ اف َع َل ٰه َذا‬
َ ‫ َهاي َه‬It is far from (beyond)
far (from him) Zayd to do this.
‫َشتَّا َن‬ ‫ بَ ُع َد َو‬same as above; and ِ ‫اْل‬
‫اه ِل‬ ِ
َ‫ي الا َعاَل َو ا‬
َ ‫َشتَّا َن بَ ا‬ What a difference there is
‫ اِفا تَ َر َق‬there is a difference
what a difference, between the learned and
the ignorant!
between
‫َس ار َعا َن‬ ‫ع‬
َ ‫َسُر‬ he hastened ‫َس ار َعا َن َمياد‬ Zayd hastened.

Table 2.10
Nouns in the Meaning of َ‫المرَالاضر‬

Noun Verb Meaning Example

‫ُرَويا َد‬ ‫أَام ِه ال‬ Give respite! ‫ُرَويا َد َميا ًدا‬ Give Zayd respite.

َ‫بَاله‬ ‫َد اع‬ Leave!; Give up! ‫بَالهَ التَّ َفكَر فِاي َما َْل‬ Give up thinking about

َ ‫يَ اعنِاي‬
that which does not
‫ك‬ concern you.
‫ك – َها‬ َ َ‫ُد اون‬ ‫ُخ اذ‬ Take! ََ َّ‫ك الل‬
‫ب‬ َ َ‫ُد اون‬ Take the milk.
‫ك‬
َ ‫َعلَاي‬ ‫اِلاَزام‬ Hold on to (it)!; ِ ِ َ ‫َعلَاي‬
‫َِّت‬
‫ك ب ُسن ا‬
Hold on to my
(It is) incumbent on Sunnah.
you
‫َحيَّ َه ال – َح َّي‬ ‫ت – َع ِج ال‬ ِ ‫اِئا‬ Come!; Hasten! ِ‫الص ََلة‬
َّ ‫َح َّي َعلَى‬ Come to salah.
‫ت – َهلُ َّم‬
َ ‫َهاي‬ ‫أَقابِ ال‬

20
For more examples and exercises, please refer to ‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen, al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-
Madaris al-Thanawiyyah, (Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif, n.d.), vol. 1, 40-43.

45
Notes:
1. There are some other nouns which have the meaning of verbs. These are as follows:
‫ال‬ ِ ‫ – اِئا‬come)
َ ‫ت( تَ َع‬ ‫ي‬ ِ ٰ ‫ – اِست ِج‬accept)
َ ‫ب( أ م ا‬
‫اَ ا‬
‫ص اه‬ (‫ت‬‫ – اُ اس ُك ا‬keep quite) ‫ف( فَ َق اط‬ِ َ‫ – اِ اكت‬suffice)
َ
ِ ‫ – اِع ِط( ه‬bring, give)
‫ات‬ َ ‫ا‬ ‫ك َع ِ ان‬َ ‫ – تَبَ َّع اد َع ِ ان( إِلَاي‬away from me)
‫ – ِج ائ بِِه ِعاند اي( َعلَ َّى بِِه‬bring him/it to me)
ِ

2. Some of these nouns are inflectable (‫ص ِرف‬

َ َ‫) ُمت‬, i.e. their form changes.
ِ ‫ه‬
‫ات‬ ‫ات َهاتُ اوا َهاتِيَا‬ ِ ِ ِ
i. َ ‫َهاتيَا َه ا‬ ‫ي‬
َ ‫َهات ا‬
ِِ
e.g. َ ‫قُ ال َهاتُ اوا بُارٰهنَ ُك ام إِ ان ُكان تُ ام ٰصدق ا‬
‫ي‬
Say: bring your proof, if you are truthful.
ii. ‫ال‬
َ ‫تَ َع‬ ‫ال تَ َعالَاوا تَ َعالَيَا‬
‫ي تَ َعالَيَا تَ َع َ ا‬
َ ‫تَ َعالَ ا‬
21‫اآلية‬...‫ب ت عالوا إِ ٰٰل كلِمة‬ ِ ِ
e.g. َ َ ‫قُ ال ٰيَ اه َل الاكٰت َ َ َا‬
Say: O people of the book! Come to a word…
َِ ‫فَتَ عالَي أُمتِع ُك َّن و أُس ِرح ُك َّن سراحا‬
)‫جاي ًَل (القرآن‬
e.g. ً ََ ‫َ ا َ َ ا َ َ ا‬
Then, come, I will make provision for you and release you with
kindness.

Section 2.4.5
َ‫ – أَسَاءََالَصوات‬Those Nouns Which Denote a Sound

‫أُ اح أُ اح‬ To denote a cough.

‫ف‬ ‫أُ ا‬ To denote pain.
‫بَ اخ‬ To denote happiness, pleasure.
‫نَ َّخ‬ To make a camel sit.
‫اق‬َ ‫َغ‬ To denote the cawing of a crow.

21
‫ اآلية‬is an abbreviation for ‫آخ ِر ااآليَِة‬
ِ ‫( إِ ٰٰل‬until the end of the ayah).

46
Section 2.4.622
َ‫ – اَلظيَروف‬Adverbs

Definition: An ‫ اِ اس ُم ظَارف‬is that noun, which gives us an idea of the place or time when (or
where) some work is done. It is also called ‫ َم اف ُع اول فِاي ِه‬.

ِ ‫الزم‬
‫ ظُُروف‬are of two kinds: ‫ان‬ ِ ‫ف الام َك‬
ََّ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫( ظَار‬adverb of time) and ‫ان‬ َ ُ ‫( ظَار‬the adverb of place).

َ‫ – ظَرَوَفََالزَمَان‬Adverbs of Time:
1. ‫إِ اذ‬ (when)
 ِ ‫ اَلام‬even when it appears before ‫فِعل مضا ِرع‬.
It gives the meaning of ‫اضي‬ َ ‫ا‬ َُ ‫ا‬
 ِ‫ جلَة اِ ا‬or a ‫جلَة فِعلِيَّة‬.
The sentence after ‫ إِ اذ‬could be a ‫سيَّة‬ ‫ُا‬ ‫ُا ا‬
e.g. ‫َواذا ُكُراوا إِ اذ أَناتُ ام قَلِايل‬ Remember when you were less.
ِ ‫اع َد ِمن الاب ي‬
‫ت‬ ِ ‫ وإِ اذ ي رفَع إِب ٰرِهيم الا َقو‬And when Ibrahim (Allah give him peace) was
e.g. ‫َ َا‬ َ ُ ‫َ َا ُ ا ا‬
raising the foundation of the House (Ka‘ba).
Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness )‫اجأَة‬ ِ ِ
 َ ‫( ُم َف‬. This is called ُ‫إ اذ اَلا ُف َجائيَّة‬.
e.g. ‫ت إِ اذ ُم ِديا ُر الا َم اد َر َس ِة ََن ِظر‬
ُ ‫َخَر اج‬ I came out and suddenly the principal of
the school was watching.
 َّ ‫)ِل‬. This is called ُ‫إِ اذ اَلات اَّعلِايلِيَّة‬.
Sometimes, it gives the meaning of because (‫َن‬
ِ ‫لَن يَّان َفع ُكم الاي وم إِ اذ ظَلَمتُم أَنَّ ُكم ِف الاع َذ‬
)‫اب ُم اش َِتُك او َن (القرآن‬
e.g. َ ‫اا ا‬ َ ‫ا َ ُ َا‬
That you are together in punishment will never benefit you today because
you oppressed.
[This is according to one translation.]

2. ‫إِذَا‬ (when/if)
It gives the meaning of ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ُم‬even when it appears before ‫ف اعل َماض‬.
 It gives the meaning of ‫ش ارط‬
َ and ‫ َجَزاء‬but does not give either a ‫ َج ازم‬.
 ِ‫ جلَة اِ ا‬or preferably a ‫جلَة فِعلِيَّة‬.
The sentence after ‫ إِ َذا‬could be a ‫سيَّة‬ ‫ُا‬ ‫ُا ا‬
‫س طَالِ َعة‬ ِ ‫اٰتِي‬
e.g.
ُ ‫َّم‬
‫ك اذَا الش ا‬َ‫ا‬ I will come to you when the sun is up.
‫ اآلية‬...ِ‫صُر هللا‬ ِ
e.g. ‫اذَا َجاءَ نَ ا‬ When the help of Allah comes...

22
The list of ‫ ظُُروف‬given in this section is by no means exhaustive. There are many more that should be studied
in advanced books of Nahw.

47
 Sometimes, it gives the meaning of suddenness )‫اجأَة‬ ِ
 َ ‫( ُم َف‬, in which case ‫ إ َذا‬must be
ِ‫جلَة اِ ا‬.
followed by a ‫سيَّة‬ ‫ُا‬
e.g. ‫ب َواقِف‬ ِ ُ ‫َخر اج‬
ُ ‫ت فَإذَا الا َك ال‬ َ I came out and suddenly the dog was standing.

3. ‫َم ِٰت‬ (when)

 It can be used as an interrogative )‫(اِ استِ اف َهام‬.
e.g. ‫َم ِٰت تُ َسافُِر؟‬ When will you travel?
 It can also be used as a conditional noun in which case the ‫ش ارط‬
َ and ‫ َجَزاء‬get a ‫ َج ازم‬.
e.g. ‫ص ام‬
ُ َ‫ص ام أ‬
ُ َ‫َم ِٰت ت‬ When you fast, I will fast.

4. ‫ف‬َ ‫( َكاي‬how)
 It is used to enquire condition.
e.g. ‫ك؟‬
َ ُ‫ف َحال‬
َ ‫َكاي‬ How are you? (In what condition are you?)

5. ‫أَََّي َن‬ (when)

 It is used as an interrogative.
ِ ‫أَََّي َن ي وم‬
‫الديا ِن؟‬
e.g. ُ ‫َا‬ When will be the day of recompense?

Note: ‫ أَ ََّي َن‬is used only to enquire of great events of the future as compared to ‫ َم ِٰت‬.

ِ ‫( أَام‬yesterday)
6. ‫س‬
ِ ‫ن َمياد أَام‬
‫س‬ ِ
e.g. ‫َجاءَ ا‬ Zayd came to me yesterday.

7. ‫( ُمان ُذ – ُم اذ‬since, from)

 These two can be used to convey the beginning of a time period.
e.g. ‫م اذ يَ اوِم ا‬/
‫اْلُ ُم َع ِة‬ ُ ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُمان ُذ‬ I have not seen him since Friday.

 They can also be used to refer to an entire period.

ِ ‫م اذ يَوَم‬/
‫ي‬
e.g. ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُمان ُذ ُ ا‬ I have not seen him for two days.

 These can be used as ‫جر‬ ِ

َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫( َح ار‬followed by a ‫ ) َاَمُرور‬or as ‫ا اسم‬, which will be regarded
as a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬followed by a ‫ َم ارفُوع‬.
e.g. ‫م اذ يَ اوِم ا‬/
‫اْلُ ُم َع ِة‬ ُ ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُمان ُذ‬ I have not seen him since Friday.
‫اْلُ ُم َع ِة‬
‫م اذ يَ اوُم ا‬/
ُ ‫َما َرأَياتُهُ ُمان ُذ‬

48
 8. ‫قَط‬ (not, never)
 It is used to emphasize ‫اضي اَلا َمان ِفي‬
ِ ‫اَلام‬.
َ ‫ا‬
e.g. ‫ضَرباتُهُ قَط‬
َ ‫َما‬ I never hit him.

9. ‫ض‬
ُ ‫( َع او‬never)
 It is used to emphasize ‫ع الا َمان ِفي‬
ُ ‫ضا ِر‬
َ ‫اَلا ُم‬.
e.g. ُ ‫ض ِربُهُ َع او‬
‫ض‬ ‫َْل أَ ا‬ I will never hit him.

10. ‫ل‬
ُ ‫قَ اب‬ (before)
‫بَ اع ُد‬ (after)
ِ
َ ‫ ُم‬and the ‫ضاف إِلَيه‬
 They are ‫ َماب ِن‬when they are ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬is not mentioned, but intended.
e.g. )‫َي ِم ان قَ اب ِل ُك ِل َش ايء َو ِم ان بَ اع ِد ُك ِل َش ايء‬ ِ ِ ِِ
‫ِٰل االَ امُر م ان قَ اب ُل َو م ان بَ اع ُد (أ ا‬
Allah’s is the decision before and after (i.e. before everything and after
everything).
ِ
e.g. َ ‫َي ِم ان قَابل‬
)‫ك‬ ِ ِ
‫أ َََن َحاضر م ان قَ اب ُل (أ ا‬
I have been present from before (i.e. before you).

)‫َي بَ اع َد ٰه َذا‬ ِ
e.g. ‫َم ِٰت ََتيئُنَا بَ اع ُد؟ (أ ا‬
When will you come after (i.e. after this)?
ِ َ‫ مضاف إِل‬is mentioned, they will be ‫معرب‬.
 When the ‫يه‬ َُ َ‫ُ ا‬
e.g. ‫ِم ان قَاب ِل الا َفات ِح‬ before the victory

َ‫ – ظَرَوَفََالَمكان‬Adverbs of Place:
1. ‫ث‬
ُ ‫( َحاي‬where)
 It is generally ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ ُم‬to a sentence.
‫ث َمياد َجالِس‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫س َحاي‬
‫ ا اجل ا‬Sit where Zayd is sitting.
2. ‫َّام‬
ُ ‫قُد‬ (in front of) & ‫ف‬
ُ ‫َخ ال‬ (behind)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ل‬
ُ ‫ قَ اب‬and ‫بَ اع ُد‬.
e.g. )ُ‫َّامهُ َو َخ ال َفه‬
َ ‫َي قُد‬
‫ف (أ ا‬
ُ ‫َّام َو َخ ال‬
ُ ‫َّاس قُد‬
ُ ‫قَ َام الن‬
The people stood in front and behind.
(i.e. in front of him and behind him).

49
 3. ‫ت‬
ُ ‫( َاَت‬under) & ‫( فَ او ُق‬on top, above)
 It has the same rules as those for ‫ل‬ ُ ‫ قَ اب‬and ‫بَ اع ُد‬.
e.g. )ِ‫َّجَرة‬
َ ‫َّجَرةِ َو فَ او َق الش‬
َ ‫ت الش‬
َ ‫َي َاَت‬
‫ت َو َع امرو فَ او ُق (أ ا‬
ُ ‫س َمياد َاَت‬
َ َ‫َجل‬
Zayd sat under and ‘Amr above. (i.e. under the tree and above the tree.)

4. ‫ِعان َد‬ (by, at, near, with)

e.g. ‫ال عِان َد َمياد‬
ُ ‫اَلا َم‬ The money is with Zayd.

Note: ‫ ِعان َد‬will get a kasrah if it is preceded by ‫ ِم ان‬.

ِ‫ِمن عِان ِد هللا‬
e.g. ‫ا‬ from Allah

5. ‫أَ ٰن‬/‫( أَيا َن‬where)

 They are used for ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬.
e.g. ‫ب؟‬ ُ ‫ أَ ٰن تَ اذ َه‬Where are you going?
ُ ‫ب – أَيا َن تَ اذ َه‬
 They are used for ‫ش ارط‬
َ (‫ َش ارط‬and ‫ َجَزاء‬will get a ‫) َج ازم‬.
‫س‬ ِ ِ
e.g. ‫س أَ اجل ا‬
‫أَيا َن َاَتل ا‬ Where you sit, I will sit.
‫س‬ ِ ِ ٰ
‫س أَ اجل ا‬
‫أَن َاَتل ا‬
6. ‫لَ ُد ان‬/‫( لَ ٰدى‬at, by, near, with (same meaning as ‫)) ِعان َد‬.
e.g. ‫ال لَ ٰدى َمياد‬ُ ‫اَلا َم‬ The money is with Zayd.
‫ِم ان لَ ُد ان َح ِكايم َخبِ اي‬ from the All-Wise, All-Knowing

 ‫ لَ ُد ان‬is generally preceded by ‫ ِم ان‬.

 When used in the meaning of possession (with), the difference between ‫لَ ُد ان‬/‫لَ ٰدى‬
and ‫ ِعان َد‬is that in the case of ‫لَ ٰدى‬/‫لَ ُد ان‬, the possessed thing must be present with the
person; whereas, in the case of ‫ ِعان َد‬, the possessed thing need not be present with
the person.

َ ‫ ُم‬to a sentence or the word ‫إِ اذ‬, could be ‫َماب ِن َعلَى الا َفات ِح‬
Note: That adverb which is ‫ ُم اعَرب‬and is ‫ضاف‬
ِ ‫ع‬.
or it could get the i‘raab according to the ‫امل‬ َ
e.g. the adverb ‫ يوم‬which is ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ ُم‬in the following ayahs:
‫ي ِص ادقُ ُه ام‬ ِ ِ ٰ ‫ ٰه َذا ي وم ي ان َفع‬and ‫الص ِدقِي ِص ادقُهم‬
َ ‫الصدق ا‬ ُ َ َ ‫َا‬ ‫ُا‬ َ ‫ٰه َذا يَ اوُم يَان َف ُع ٰ ا‬
This is the day when the truth of the truthful will benefit them.
‫ ُو ُج اوه يَّ اوَمئِذ‬and ‫ُو ُج اوه يَّ اوُمئِذ‬
faces on that day

50
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪ in them. Also identify‬ظُُروف ‪1. Translate the follows ayahs of the Qur’an and identify the‬‬
‫الزم ِ‬
‫ان ‪whether they are from among‬‬ ‫ف الا َم َكا ِن ‪ or‬ظُُراو ُ‬
‫ف ََّ‬ ‫‪.‬ظُُراو ُ‬
‫اش الامب ث و ِ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫ث‬ ‫َّاس َكالا َفَر ِ َ ا ُ ا‬ ‫يَ اوَم يَ ُك او ُن الن ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫اْلُال َد‬
‫ك ا‬ ‫َوَما َج َع النَا لبَ َشر ِم ان قَ ابل َ‬
‫صبِ ُح او َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ي تُ ا‬ ‫ي َتُا ُس او َن َوح ا َ‬ ‫فَ ُساب َحا َن هللا ح ا َ‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫ك ِم ان بَ اع ِد َك‬ ‫ال فَإِ ََّن قَ اد فَتَ نَّا قَ اوَم َ‬
‫قَ َ‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫إِ اذ َجاءُ اوُك ام ِم ان فَ اوقِ ُك ام‬
‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫َما ِعان ِد اي َما تَ استَ اع ِجلُ او َن بِِه‬
‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫َو َعلَّ امنَاهُ ِم ان لَّ ُد ََّن ِع الماً‬
‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫ي أَيا ِديا ِه ام َوَما َخ ال َف ُه ام‬ ‫يَ اعلَ ُم َما بَ ا َ‬
‫احبِ ِه َْل َاَتَز ان إِ َّن هللاَ َم َعنَا‬ ‫إِ اذ ي ُقو ُل لِص ِ‬
‫‪ix.‬‬ ‫َا َ‬
‫‪x.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫أ ََع َّد هللاُ َلُام َجٰنت َاَت ِري من َاَتت َها االَنا ٰهُر‬

‫‪51‬‬
Section 2.4.7
َ‫ – اَلَكناَيت‬Those Nouns Which Indicate an Unspecified Quantity

1. ‫ َك َذا‬،‫( َك ام‬so many, so much, how many, how much)

 They can be used for numbers
e.g. ‫ َك ام ِد ارَهًا عِان َد َك؟‬How many silver coins do you have?
e.g. ‫ت َك َذا ِد ارَهًا‬
ُ ‫َخ اذ‬
َ‫أ‬ I took this many silver coins.
 ‫ َك َذا‬is also used in the meaning of “such and such.”
e.g. ‫ال ِ ا‬
‫ل َك َذا َو َك َذا‬ َ َ‫ق‬ He said to me such and such.
2. ‫ت‬
َ ‫ َذيا‬،‫ت‬
َ ‫( َكاي‬so and so, such and such)
e.g. ‫ت‬
َ ‫ت ذَيا‬
َ ‫ت َكاي‬
ُ ‫ قُ ال‬or ‫ت‬ َ ‫ت َو َذيا‬
َ ‫ت َكاي‬
ُ ‫قُ ال‬ I said such and such.
e.g. ‫ت‬
َ ‫ت ذَيا‬
َ ‫ت َكاي‬
ُ ‫ فَ َع ال‬or ‫ت‬
َ ‫ت َوذَيا‬َ ‫ت َكاي‬
ُ ‫فَ َع ال‬ I did such and such.

Section 2.4.8
َ‫ – اَلمركبَالبنائ يي‬Numerical Phrase

This has been discussed earlier. Please, refer to section 1.4.3.

52
Section 2.5
َ‫ – أقسامَاَلَسَاءََالَمَعَربَة‬Types of Declinable Nouns
These are of two types:

1. َ‫منصرف‬

Definition: It is that noun which does not have two causes from amongst the nine causes
that prevent declension (‫ف‬ِ ‫الصر‬
‫اب َمان ِع َّ ا‬
ُ َ‫ )أَ اسب‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 It accepts all harakaat as well as tanween.

2. َ‫غي رَمنصرف‬

Definition: It is that noun which has two causes from amongst the nine causes that
ِ ‫الصر‬
prevent declension (‫ف‬ ‫اب َمان ِع َّ ا‬
ُ َ‫ )أَ اسب‬or one such cause, which is equivalent to two.
 Such a noun does not accept a kasrah and never gets a tanween. In ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ َحالَةُ ا‬, it gets a
fathah in place of a kasrah.

َ‫ أَسبابَمنعَالصرف‬23
There are nine reasons/causes which prevent i‘raab changes. Each one of these has its own
conditions, which must exist for it to be a cause. The nine causes are as follows:
1. ‫َع ادل‬ 2. ‫صف‬ ‫َو ا‬ 3. ‫َعلَم‬ 4. ‫َتانِايث‬ 5. ‫ج َمة‬
‫ُع ا‬
6. ‫تَ اركِايب‬ 7. ‫أَلِف َونُ اون َمائِ َد ََت ِن‬ 8. ‫َوام ُن فِ اعل‬ 9. ‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬
‫جَا ُع ُمان تَ َهى ا‬

1. ‫ع ادل‬:
َ It refers to the case when a noun gives up its original form to assume a new form.
‫ َع ادل‬is of two types:
i. ‫يقي‬ ِ ‫ع ادل ََت ِق‬: It refers to the case when a noun has an original.
‫َ ا‬
e.g. In the case of ‫ث‬ َ ‫( ثََُل‬three and three together), the original is ‫ثَََلثَة َوثَََلثَة‬.

ii. ‫ع ادل تَ اق ِدي ِري‬:

َ It refers to the case when it is assumed that a noun had an original because
it is used as ‫ص ِرف‬
َ ‫ َغاي ُر ُمان‬by the Arabs.
e.g. The Arabs use ‫ ُع َم ُر‬as ‫ص ِرف‬
َ ‫ َغاي ُر ُمان‬. However, there is only one apparent cause,
‫ َعلَم‬. Therefore, in order to keep the grammar rule intact, it is assumed that the
ِ ‫ع‬.
second reason is ‫ َع ادل‬, and the original for ‫ ُع َم ُر‬is ‫امر‬ َ

23
This discussion is based upon Hidayat al-Nahw. It is presented in an entirely different manner in al-Nahw al-
Wadih. See al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibdtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 125-133.

53
2. ‫صف‬ ِ ِ
‫و ا‬/
َ ‫ص َفة‬: There can be two cases when a noun, which is a ‫ص َفة‬, would be ghayr munsarif.
24

These are as follows:

i. The ‫ص َفة‬ ِ was originally devised to give a descriptive (‫ )وص ِفي‬meaning. If such a ‫ ِص َفة‬is
‫َا‬
on the wazn of (‫)أَفا َعل‬, and does not accept taa for its ‫ ُم َؤنَّث‬, it will be ghayr munsarif.
e.g. ‫أَ امحَُر‬ red ‫ضُر‬
َ ‫َخ‬
‫ أ ا‬green
ِ has ‫أَلِف و نُون مائِ َد ََت ِن‬. Its conditions are given below in (7).
ii. The ‫ص َفة‬ َ ‫َ ا‬

3. ‫ َعلَم‬: It refers to the case when a noun is a proper noun (name of a person, place or thing).
e.g. ِ َ‫ف‬
ُ‫اط َمة‬ female name
‫ت‬
ُ ‫ضَرَم او‬
َ ‫َح‬ name of a region in Yemen

4. ‫ َتانِايث‬: It refers to the case when a noun is such a feminine proper noun, which has one of
the following characteristics:
i. It ends with a round ‫ة‬. For example, ُ‫طَال َحة‬25 ُ‫َم َّكة‬
ii. It does not end with a round ‫ ة‬and has more then three letters. For example, ‫ب‬
ُ َ‫ َميان‬.
iii. It is a non-Arabic three-letter word and the middle letter is ‫ساكِن‬
َ . For example, ‫صُر‬
ِ
‫م ا‬.

Note:
All nouns ending in ُ‫ورة‬ ِ ِ
 َ‫ص‬ ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫ ( ٰى) اَالَل‬or ُ‫ودة‬
َ ‫ف الا َم ام ُد‬
ُ ‫ (اء) اَالَل‬are feminine.
e.g. ‫ُحاب ٰلى‬ pregnant

ُ‫محَاَراء‬ red
Presence of ُ‫ورة‬ ِ ِ
 َ‫ص‬ ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫ ( ٰى) اَالَل‬or ُ‫ودة‬
َ ‫ف الا َم ام ُد‬
ُ ‫ (اء) اَالَل‬is equivalent to two reasons.

5. ‫ج َمة‬
‫ع ا‬:
ُ It refers to the case when a word, which is a proper noun in a non-Arabic language,
has either
 more than three letters e.g. ‫إِبا َر ِاهاي ُم‬
or
 has three letters and the middle letter is ‫ح ِرك‬
َ َ‫ ُمت‬. ‫( َشتَ ُر‬name of a fort)
e.g.
˗ Thus, ‫ نُ اوح‬is munsarif because its middle letter is not ‫ح ِرك‬َ َ‫ ُمت‬.

24
Sharh ibn ‘Aqil, vol. 3, 322-324.
25
Even though ُ‫ طَلا َحة‬is a masculine proper noun, it is considered a feminine noun because of the presence of a
round ‫ة‬. For more discussion on the subject, see Section 3.4.

54
 Note: The difference between ‫ نُ اوح‬and ‫ص ُر‬ ِ ِ
‫ م ا‬is that ‫صُر‬
‫ م ا‬is a feminine noun because of
it being the name of a country, while ‫ نُ اوح‬is not a feminine noun. Thus, ‫ص ُر‬ ِ
‫ م ا‬is
ghayr munsarif because of ‫ َتانِايث‬and ‫ َعلَم‬, while ‫ نُ اوح‬is munsarif because it only has ‫ َعلَم‬.
‫ ُع اج َمة‬does not apply to either.

6. ‫تَ اركِايب‬: It refers to the case when a word is a combination of two words. This word must be
an ‫ َعلَم‬.
e.g. ‫بَ اعلَبَك‬ name of a city in Lebanon
‫ت‬
ُ ‫ضَرَم او‬
َ ‫َح‬ name of a region in Yemen

7. ‫أَلِف َونُ اون َمائِ َد ََت ِن‬: It refers to the case when a noun ends with an ‫ أَلِف‬and ‫ﹷان) نُ اون‬
ِ ( and one of
the following is true:
i. The ‫ أَلِف‬and ‫ نُ اون‬appear at the end of such a noun which is an ‫( َعلَم‬proper noun).
e.g. ‫ُعثا َما ُن‬ ‫ِع امَرا ُن‬
Note: Thus, the word ‫س اع َدان‬
َ (grass) is not ghayr munsarif because it is not a proper
noun.
ii. The ‫ أَلِف‬and ‫ نُ اون‬appear at the end of such a ‫ص َفة‬
ِ whose feminine is not on the ‫وامن‬
َ
of ‫فَ اع ََلنَة‬.
e.g. ‫ارا ُن‬
َ‫ َسك‬intoxicated
26
‫ َعطا َشا ُن‬27 thirsty
Their feminines are not on the ‫ َوامن‬of ‫فَ اع ََلنَة‬.
Note: Thus, the word ‫ نَ اد َمان‬is not ghayr munsarif because its feminine )‫ (نَ اد َمانَة‬is on
the wazn of ‫فَ اع ََلنَة‬.
 If the ‫ أَلِف‬and ‫ نُ اون‬are not extra or added (i.e. not ‫ ) َمائِ َد ََت ِن‬but are part of the original letters
of the word, then it will not be ghayr munsarif. For example, ‫شايطَان‬.
َ

26
‫ َسكَاران‬is mainly used as ghayr munsarif (without tanween), and is sometimes used as munsarif (with tanween).
The reason is that it has two feminines. The main feminine is ‫سك ٰارى‬ َ , which requires that the masculine be ghayr
munsarif (‫ارا ُن‬
َ‫) َسك‬. However, in the dialect of Banu Asad, the feminine is ‫ َسكَارانَة‬. This requires that the masculine
be munsarif (‫اران‬ َ‫) َسك‬. See E. W. Lane, An Arabic-English Lexicon, (Beirut: Librairie du Liban, 1968), book I, part
4, 1391.
27
‫ َعطا َشان‬is interchangeably used as munsarif (with tanween) and ghayr munsarif (without tanween). The reason
is that it has two feminines. One is ‫ َعطا ٰشى‬, and the other is ‫شانَة‬
َ ‫ َعطا‬. Considering the first, it becomes ghayr
munsarif (‫شا ُن‬
َ ‫ ;) َعطا‬and considering the second, it becomes munsarif (‫) َعطا َشان‬. See Lane, book I, part 5, 2079.

55
8. ‫ َوام ُن فِ اعل‬: It refers to the case when a proper noun )‫ ( َعلَم‬is on the wazn of a ‫ فِ اعل‬or when a ‫ص َفة‬
ِ
is on the wazn of ‫أَفا َعل‬.
e.g. ‫َسبَ َق ِم ان أَ امحَ َد‬
‫ت ِب ا‬
َ ‫ لَ اس‬You are not more advanced/ahead than Ahmad.
Here, ‫ أَ امحَ َد‬is an ‫ َعلَم‬and is on the wazn of the verb ‫ل‬ ِ
ُ ‫أَفا َع‬, and ‫َسبَ َق‬
‫ أ ا‬is a ‫ ص َفة‬and
is on the wazn of the verb ‫أَفا َعل‬. Therefore, these two are ghayr munsarif.

e.g. ‫َجاءَ يَِزيا ُد‬ Yazeed came.

Here, ‫ يَِزيا ُد‬is an ‫ َعلَم‬and is on the wazn of the verb ‫ل‬
ُ ‫يَ اف َع‬.

9. ‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬
‫جَا ُع ُمان تَ َهى ا‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫اْلَ ام ِع‬
‫ف ا‬ ِ
ُ ‫( أَل‬alif of plural) one of the
following:
two ‫ح ِرك‬ ِ ‫ مس‬mosques
i. َ َ‫ ُمت‬letters. e.g. ‫اج ُد‬ ََ
ii. one ‫ش َّدد‬
َ ‫ ُم‬letter. e.g. ‫ َد َواب‬animals
iii. three letters, the middle letter being ‫ساكِن‬
َ. e.g. ‫ َم َفاتِاي ُح‬keys
Note:
 If any of the above words ends with a round ‫ة‬, it will not be ghayr munsarif.
e.g. ‫صيَاقِلَة‬
َ polishers
 ‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬
‫ جَا ُع ُمان تَ َهى ا‬is equivalent to two reasons/causes.

General Note: A ghayr munsarif noun will get a kasrah in ‫حالَةُ ا اْلَِر‬
َ in the following cases:
 when it is ‫ضاف‬
َ ‫ ُم‬. e.g. ‫اج ِد ِه ام‬
ِ ‫ صلَّيت ِف مس‬I prayed in their mosques.
ََ ‫َا ُ ا‬
 when it has ‫ ال‬before it. e.g. ‫ت إِ َٰل الا َم َقابِ ِر‬
ُ ‫َذ َهاب‬ I went to the graves.

EXERCISES
1. Mention with reason why the following words are munsarif or ghayr munsarif.

i. ‫مفر‬ 28
v. ‫صحراء‬
ii. ‫شيطان‬ vi. ‫مصابيح‬
iii. ‫أسود‬ vii. ‫يزيد‬
iv. ‫أساتذة‬ viii. ‫ غضبان‬29

28
This is the name of a major Hanafi Imam. It is non-Arabic in origin and is pronounced with a dammah on
the first letter and a fathah on the second letter.
29
Its main feminine is ‫ض ٰب‬
‫ َغ ا‬. In the dialect of Banu Asad, its feminine is ‫ضبَانَة‬
‫ َغ ا‬. See Lane, book I, part 6, 2265.

56
‫‪2. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out with reason the words which are ghayr munsarif.‬‬
‫مررت بعمر ‪i.‬‬
‫ذهب أمحد مع مينب إٰل مكة ‪ii.‬‬
‫ْل تسئلوا عن أشياء‪...‬اآلية ‪iii.‬‬
‫سقيت ولدا عطشان ‪iv.‬‬
‫َي أهل يثرب‪...‬اآلية ‪v.‬‬
‫مررت مبساجد ‪vi.‬‬
‫شهر رمضان الذى أنزل فيه القرآن‪...‬اآلية ‪vii.‬‬
‫إن هللا اصطفى أٰدم ونوحا وأٰل إ ٰبرهيم وأٰل عمران على ال ٰعلمي (القرآن) ‪viii.‬‬

‫‪57‬‬
Section 2.6
َ‫ – إعرابَأَقسامَالساءَالمعرَبت‬I‘raab of the Various Types of Mu‘rab Nouns
We begin this section by defining some terms. Then, we will outline the i‘raab of each of the
various types of mu‘rab nouns.

َ‫اَْلسمَالصحيح‬: It is that noun, which does not end with any of the ‫ف الاعِلَّ ِة‬
ُ ‫(ي – ا – و) ُحُراو‬.
e.g. ‫ َر ُجل‬man
َ‫اَْلسمََالقائمَمقامََالصحيح‬: It is that noun, which ends with a ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬preceded by a ‫ ُس ُك اون‬.
e.g. ‫َدلاو‬ bucket ‫ظَ اب‬ deer
َ‫الَساء َالستة َالمكَب رة‬: These are six nouns, which are not in their diminutive form )‫صغَّر‬
َ ‫( ُم‬. These
are as follows:
‫أَب‬ father ‫فَم‬ mouth
‫أَخ‬ brother ‫َهن‬ something insignificant
‫َحم‬ brother-in-law ‫( ذُ او‬plural: ‫)أُولُاو‬ someone who possesses something

َ‫اْلَسمَالمقصور‬: It is that noun, which ends with an ُ‫ص َورة‬ ِ ٰ .

ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫(ى) اَالَل‬
e.g. ‫ُم او ٰسى‬
َ‫اْلسمَالمن قوص‬: It is that noun which ends with a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah.
e.g. ِ ‫اَلا َق‬
‫اض اي‬ the judge
Note: It should be remembered that the ‫ ي‬is visible in an ‫ اِ اسم َمان ُق اوص‬when it is ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬.
When it is ‫كَرة‬ ِ َ‫ن‬, the ‫ ي‬is not visible, e.g. ‫اضي‬ِ ِ ‫ َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬, it
‫ اَلا َق ا‬becomes ‫قَاض‬. However, in ‫صب‬
does become visible, e.g. ‫اضيًا‬ ِ َ‫( رأَيت ق‬I saw a judge).
ُ ‫َا‬
Before we list the i‘raab of each of the various types of mu‘rab nouns in a table, it
would be useful to remember that a simple method of illustrating different i‘raab is to make
three sentences on the following pattern:

َ‫الرفَع‬
َ ََ‫حالَة‬ َ‫حَالَةََالنَصَب‬ َ‫حَالَةََاْلَر‬
‫َجاءَ مياد‬ ‫ت َميا ًدا‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ‫ت بَِزياد‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬
Zayd came. I saw Zayd. I passed by Zayd.

In these three sentences, the word ‫ َمياد‬is displaying the different i‘raab according to the
changing state (‫حالَة‬ َ ). Thus, it has a dammah in ‫الرفا ِع‬ ِ‫ص‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬, and a fathah in ‫ب‬ ‫ َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬, and a
kasrah in ‫اْلَِر‬
‫ َحالَةُ ا‬.

58
 ‫‪Table 2.11‬‬
‫إعرابَأقسامَالساءَالمعرَبتَ‬

‫‪Noun Type‬‬ ‫الرفَعَ‬

‫حالَةََ َ‬ ‫حَالَةََالنَصَبَ‬ ‫حَالَةََاْلَرَ‬ ‫‪Examples for Each State‬‬
‫ص ِحاي ُح‬‫ف ال َّ‬ ‫ص ِر ُ‬‫اَلا ُم افَرُد الا ُمان َ‬ ‫ض َّمة‬
‫َ‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫َك اسَرة‬ ‫َجاءَ مياد‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬
‫ت َميا ًدا‬ ‫ت بَِزياد‬
‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫الص ِحاي ِح‬
‫اَلا ُم افَرُد الا َقائِ ُم َم َق َام َّ‬ ‫ض َّمة‬
‫َ‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫َك اسَرة‬ ‫ٰه َذا ظَ اب‬ ‫ت ظَاب يًا‬‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ت بِظَ اب‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫ف‬‫ص ِر ُ‬
‫اَ اْلَ ام ُع الا ُم َك َّسُر الا ُمان َ‬ ‫ض َّمة‬
‫َ‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫َك اسَرة‬ ‫ُه ام ِر َجال‬ ‫ت ِر َج ًاْل‬‫َرأَيا ُ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ت لِ ِر َجال‬
‫قُ ال ُ‬
‫َغي الامانص ِر ِ‬ ‫ت بِ ُع َمَر‬
‫ف‬ ‫ُ ُ َ‬ ‫ض َّمة‬
‫َ‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫َجاءَ عُ َمُر‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬
‫ت عُ َمَر‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫اَالَ اساء ِ‬
‫الستَّةُ اَلا ُم َكبَّ َرةُ‬ ‫َُ‬
‫ضاف ‪a. When‬‬
‫‪ُ to‬م َ‬
‫‪any noun besides‬‬ ‫و‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َجاءَ أَبُ او َك‬ ‫ت أََب َك‬
‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ت ِبَبِاي َ‬
‫ك‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫‪ dameer.31‬ي ‪the‬‬

‫ضاف ‪b. When‬‬

‫‪ُ to‬م َ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َجاءَ أَِ اب‬ ‫ت أَِ اب‬
‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ت ِبَِ اب‬
‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫‪ dameer.‬ي ‪the‬‬

‫ضاف ‪c. when not‬‬

‫ُم َ‬ ‫ض َّمة‬
‫َ‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫َك اسَرة‬ ‫َجاءَ أَب‬ ‫ت أًَب‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ت ِبَب‬
‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫اف إِ َٰل ََي ِء الا ُمتَ َكلِ ِم‬
‫ض ُ‬‫اَلا ُم َ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َجاءَ َمِميلِ اي‬ ‫ت َمِميلِ اي‬‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ت بَِزِميلِ اي‬
‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ت ِمبُ ٰ‬
‫ص اوُر‬
‫اَاْل اس ُم الا َم اق ُ‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫وسى‬
‫َجاءَ ُم ٰ‬ ‫وسى‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬
‫ت ُم ٰ‬ ‫وسى‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫َم اع ِرفَة‬ ‫اضي جاء الا َق ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫مررت ِبلا َق ِ‬
‫اَاِْل اس ُم‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫اض اي‬ ‫ت الا َق َ َ َ‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫اض اي‬ ‫ََا ُ‬
‫ص‬
‫الا َمان ُق او ُ‬ ‫نَ ِكَرة‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫فَ ات َحة‬ ‫‪hidden‬‬ ‫َجاءَ قَاض‬ ‫رأَيت قَ ِ‬
‫اضيًا‬ ‫َا ُ‬ ‫ت بَِقاض‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫اَلا ُمثَ ٰن‬ ‫ﹷ ِان‬ ‫ﹷيا ِن‬ ‫ﹷيا ِن‬ ‫َجاءَ َر ُج ََل ِن‬ ‫ت ر ُجلَ ا ِ‬
‫ي‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ َ‬
‫ت بِر ُجلَ ا ِ‬
‫ي‬ ‫َمَرار ُ َ‬
‫)‪ (masculine‬اِثانَ ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫ﹷ ِان‬ ‫ﹷيا ِن‬ ‫ﹷيا ِن‬ ‫جاء اِثانَ ِ‬ ‫ت اِثانَ ا ِ‬ ‫ت ِبِثانَ ا ِ‬
‫)‪ (feminine‬اِثانَ تَ ِ‬
‫ان‬
‫ان‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫ي‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬

‫)‪ (masculine‬كِ ََل‬

‫)‪ (feminine‬كِالتَا‬ ‫َجاءَ‬ ‫ت كِلَاي ِه َما‬ ‫ت بِ ِكلَاي ِه َما‬
‫ﹷا‬ ‫ﹷ اي‬ ‫ﹷ اي‬ ‫‪32‬‬
‫كِ ََل ُهَا‬ ‫َرأَيا ُ‬ ‫َمَرار ُ‬
‫الض ِم اِي)‬
‫ضاف إِ َٰل َّ‬
‫( ُم َ‬

‫‪30‬‬
‫‪I said to some men.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ضاف ‪ is dropped when it is‬فَم ‪ of‬م ‪The‬‬
‫‪ُ to any noun besides the‬م َ‬ ‫‪ dameer.‬ي‬ ‫‪For example, it is dropped in the‬‬

‫اامرأَتِ َ‬
‫ك‪followng hadith: ...‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫)…‪َ (Whatever you put in the mouth of your wife‬ما َاَت َع ُل اف ف َ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪Both of them.‬‬

‫‪59‬‬
 Table 2.11 – Continued

Noun Type َ‫الرفَع‬

َ ََ‫حالَة‬ َ‫حَالَةََالنَصَب‬ َ‫حَالَةََاْلَر‬ Examples for Each State

ِ ‫ث‬ ‫ُه َّن ُم اسلِ َمات‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬

‫ت‬ ‫ت‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬
َّ ِ َّ‫جَا ُع الا ُم َؤن‬
ُ‫الساَل‬ ‫ﹷات‬ ‫ﹷات‬ ‫ﹷات‬
‫ُم اسلِ َمات‬ ‫ِمبُ اسلِ َمات‬
ِ ‫جع الام َذ َّك ِر‬ ‫َجاءَ ُم اسلِ ُم او َن‬ ِِ ِ ِ ِ ‫مرر‬
ُ‫الساَل‬
َّ ُ ُ ‫َا‬ ‫ﹹ او َن‬ ‫ﹻيا َن‬ ‫ﹻيا َن‬ ‫ي‬
َ ‫ت ُم اسلم ا‬ ُ ‫ي َرأَيا‬
َ ‫ت مبُ اسلم ا‬ ُ ‫ََا‬
– ‫ِع اشُراو َن إِ َٰل تِ اس ُع او َن‬ ‫َجاءَ ِع اشُراو َن‬ ‫ت ِع اش ِريا َن‬ ِ ‫مرر‬
ُ ‫ت بِع اش ِريا َن َرأَيا‬ ُ ‫ََا‬
‫ﹹ او َن‬ ‫ﹻيا َن‬ ‫ﹻيا َن‬
‫ِسنُ او َن‬ ً‫َر ُجَل‬ ً‫َر ُجَل‬ ً‫َر ُجَل‬
ِ ُ ‫مرر‬
‫أُولُاو‬
‫ﹹ او‬ ‫ﹻ اي‬ ‫ﹻ اي‬ ‫َجاءَ أُولُاو َمال‬ ‫ت أُ ِ ا‬
‫ول‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ‫ت بُ ِ ا‬
‫ول‬ ‫ََا‬
(plural of ‫)ذُ او‬ ‫َمال‬ ‫َمال‬
ِ ‫جع الام َذ َّك ِر‬ ‫ٰه ُؤْٰل ِء‬
‫ضاف‬
َ ‫الساَلُ ( ُم‬
َّ ُ ُ ‫َا‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ي‬
‫ت‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ ‫ت ِمبُ اسلِ ِم َّي‬
ِ ِ
)‫إِ َٰل ََيء الا ُمتَ َكلم‬
ِ
hidden َّ َّ 33 ِ ِ
‫ُم اسلم َّي‬ 34 ِ ِ
‫ُم اسلم َّي‬ ُ ‫َمَرار‬

EXERCISE35

1. Translate, fill in the iʻraab and identify which rule from among those given in Table
2.11, is applicable.
i. ‫جنى الفِت من الغرق‬
ii. ‫اْلقتصاد سبيل الغن‬
iii. ‫حنتم القاضى‬
iv. ‫َنديت العاملي‬
v. ‫كان التَلميذ منتبهي‬
vi. ‫هجم الثعلب على الدجاجات‬
vii. ‫اغسل فاك بعد كل طعام‬

33
‫ ُم اسلِ ِم َّي‬was originally َ‫ ُم اسلِ ُم او َن‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ‫ضافَة‬ َ ِ‫إ‬. It became ‫ي‬
ِ
َ ‫ ُم اسل ُم او‬. Then, the ‫ و‬was
changed to a ‫ ي‬and the two were joined according to the following morphological )‫ص ارِف‬ َ ( rule: “when a ‫ و‬and a ‫ي‬
appear together and the first is ‫ساكِن‬ َ , then the ‫ و‬is changed to a ‫ي‬, and the two ‫ ي‬are joined (this is called ‫)إ اد َغام‬,
ِ
and the dammah before the ‫ و‬is changed into a kasrah.” Thus, it became ‫سلِ ِم َّي‬ ‫ ُم ا‬.
34 ِ ِ ِ ِ ِِ
‫ ُم اسلم َّي‬was originally ‫ن‬ ََ ‫ ُم اسلماي‬. First, the ‫ ن‬was dropped because of ‫ضافَة‬ َ ِ‫إ‬. It became ‫ي‬ َ ‫ ُم اسلم اي‬. Then, the two ‫ي‬
were joined (‫)إِ اد َغام‬. Thus, it became ‫سلِ ِم َّي‬ ‫ ُم ا‬.
35
For more exercises, refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 13-51 & 83-94.

60
 CHAPTER 3
Further Discussion of Nouns

Section 3.1
َ‫ – اَْلَسَمََالَمَنسَوب‬Relative Adjective
Definition: It is that noun, which shows something or someone to be related to it.
e.g. ‫بَ اغ َد ِادي‬ someone or something from Baghdad
‫ص ارِف‬
َ an expert in morphology
‫َاحن ِوي‬ an expert in Arabic grammar
‫ِهان ِدي‬ someone or something from India

Rules of Forming َ‫اَْلَسَمََالَمَنسوَب‬:

َ ‫ ( ََيءُ النِ اسبَ ِة الا ُم‬preceded by a kasrah is added at the end of the
To show this relation, a ‫ش َّد َدةُ) ي‬
noun after affecting the following changes, if needed:

1. If a three-letter or a four-letter noun ends with an ُ‫ص اوَرة‬ ِ ٰ , then ُ‫(ى) اَالَلِف الام اقصورة‬
ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫(ى) اَالَل‬ َ‫ُ َ ُ ا‬ ٰ
should be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫ِعاي ٰسى‬ becomes ‫ِعاي َس ِوي‬
Note: In the case of a five-letter noun, the ُ‫ص اوَرة‬ ِ ٰ should be dropped.
ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫(ى) اَالَل‬
e.g. ‫صطَفٰى‬
‫ُم ا‬ becomes ‫صطَِفي‬
‫ُم ا‬
2. If a noun ends with an ُ‫ف الا َم ام ُد اوَدة‬ ِ
ُ ‫(اء) اَالَل‬, then the ‫ ء‬should be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫َسَاء‬ becomes ‫َسَا ِوي‬
3. That noun which already ends with a ‫ ي‬does not require ‫سبَ ِة‬ ِ
‫ ََيءُ الن ا‬.
e.g. ‫َشافِعِي‬ would remain as is.

4. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of a noun should be dropped.

e.g. ُ‫َم َّكة‬ becomes ‫َم ِكي‬ ِ َ‫ف‬
ُ‫اط َمة‬ becomes ِ َ‫ف‬
‫اط ِمي‬
5. The round ‫ ة‬and ‫ ي‬of a noun, which appears on the ‫ َوامن‬of ‫ فَعِاي لَة‬and ‫ فُ َعاي لَة‬should be
dropped.
e.g. ‫َم ِديانَة‬ becomes ‫َم َدِن‬ ‫ُج َهاي نَة‬ becomes ‫ُج َه ِن‬

61
6. In case of the noun, which appears on the ‫ َوامن‬of ‫ فَعِايل‬and ends with a ‫ي‬, the first ‫ ي‬should
be changed to a ‫ و‬preceded by a fathah, and the second ‫ ي‬should be dropped.
e.g. ‫( َعلِايي) َعلِي‬ becomes ‫َعلَ ِوي‬

7. If the fourth letter of a noun is a ‫ ي‬preceded by a kasrah, then the ‫ ي‬can be dropped or it
can be changed to a ‫و‬.
e.g. ‫ِد اهلِ اي‬ becomes ‫ِد اهلِي‬ or ‫ِد اهلَ ِوي‬

8. If an original letter from the end of a noun was dropped, it should first be brought back,
and then, the relative adjective should be made.
e.g. ‫( أَب‬originally ‫)أَبَو‬ becomes ‫أَبَ ِوي‬
‫( أَخ‬originally ‫)أَ َخو‬ becomes ‫أَ َخ ِوي‬
‫( َدم‬originally ‫) َد َمو‬ becomes ‫َد َم ِوي‬

9. Some words do not follow any particular rule. They are based on usage.
e.g. ‫نُ اور‬ becomes ‫نُ اوَرِان‬ ‫َحق‬ becomes ِ ‫َحق‬
‫َّان‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the relative adjective from the following words.

i. ‫نب‬ iv. ‫موسى‬

ٰ
ii. ‫مصر‬ v. ‫كوفة‬

iii. ‫بيضاء‬

62
Section 3.2
َ‫ – اَْلَسَمََالَتصغي‬Diminutive Noun
Definition: It is that noun, which is used to express the diminutive form of a noun.
Sometimes, the purpose is to show affection or contempt.

Rules:
1. A three-letter noun would come on the wazn of ‫( فُ َعايل‬or ‫ فُ َعاي لَة‬for feminine).
e.g. ‫َر ُجل‬ becomes ‫( ُر َجايل‬a little man)
‫َعابد‬ becomes ‫( ُعبَ ايد‬a little slave)

2. A four-letter noun would come on the wazn of ‫فُ َعايعِل‬.

e.g. ‫َج اع َفر‬ becomes ‫ُج َعاي ِفر‬

3. A five-letter noun, without a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth, would also come on the wazn of ‫فُ َعايعِل‬.
The fifth letter would be dropped.
e.g. ‫( َس َف ار َجل‬name of a plant) becomes ‫ُس َف اِيج‬

A five-letter noun, having a ‫و‬, ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬as the fourth letter, would come on the scale of ‫فُ َعايعِايل‬.
e.g. ‫( قِارطَاس‬paper) becomes ‫قُ َريا ِطايس‬

Notes:
1. In the diminutive form, the hidden ‫ ة‬of a ‫ ُم َؤنَّث َسَاعِي‬becomes apparent.
e.g. ‫َشاس‬ becomes ‫ُشَاي َسة‬
2. In the diminutive form, the last letter of a noun which has been dropped becomes
apparent.
e.g. ‫اِبان‬ (originally ‫)بَان و‬ becomes ‫بُ َن‬
(‫ بُ َن‬was originally ‫بُنَ اي و‬, and underwent a morphological process to become ‫)بُ َن‬

EXERCISE
1. Form the diminutive noun from the following words.

i. ‫عقرب‬ iv. ‫كلب‬

ii. ‫سلطان‬ v. ‫أرض‬
iii. ‫عصفور‬ vi. ‫قمر‬

63
Section 3.3
َ‫ – اََلمعرفةَوالنكرة‬Definite and Common Nouns

َ‫( النكرة‬common noun): It is that noun, which denotes something unspecified.

e.g. ‫ َر ُجل‬a man
َ‫( المعرفة‬definite noun): It is that noun which denotes something specific. There are seven types
of ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬.

1. ‫ض ِماي ر‬
َ : It is a personal pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.1.
2. ‫ َعلَم‬: It is a proper noun, i.e. the name of a specific person, place or thing.
e.g. ‫َمياد‬ ُ‫َم َّكة‬ ‫َمامَزُم‬

3. ِ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ا اس ُم اال َش‬: It is the demonstrative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in section 2.4.3.
4. ‫ص او ُل‬ ِ
ُ ‫ اَاْل اس ُم الا َم او‬: It is the relative pronoun. It has been discussed earlier in Section 2.4.2.
5. ‫لَلِم‬
َّ ‫ف ِب‬
ُ ‫ اَلا ُم َع ِر‬: It is that noun, which has ‫( ال‬definite particle) at the beginning.
e.g. ‫اَ َّلر ُج ُل‬ the man

6. That common noun )‫ (نَكَِرة‬which is mudaaf to any of the above five definite nouns.
e.g. ‫ك‬َ ُ‫كِتَاب‬ ‫اب َمياد‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬
‫اب الَّ ِذ اي‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬ ‫الر ُج ِل‬
َّ ‫اب ٰه َذا‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬
‫الر ُج ِل‬
َّ ‫اب‬ ِ
ُ َ‫كت‬

7. ‫اَلا ُمنَا ٰدى‬: It is the vocative noun, i.e. that noun, which appears after a ‫ف نِ َداء‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬.
e.g. ‫ََي َر ُج ُل‬

EXERCISE

1. Which of the following words are ma‘rifah (state what type) and which are nakirah.

i. ‫الفرس‬ v. ‫مكة‬
ii. ‫حنن‬ vi. ‫ذلك‬
iii. ‫سيارة الذي‬ vii. ‫سك‬
iv. ‫َي ولد‬ viii. ‫سيف الرجل‬

64
Section 3.4
َ‫ – اَْلَسَمََالمذكرَوالمؤنث‬Masculine and Feminine Noun

َ‫ اَْلسمَالمذكر‬- Masculine Noun: It is that noun, which does not have any sign from amongst the
signs of femininity )‫ث‬ِ ‫(ع ََلمات التَّأانِي‬.
‫َ َ ُ ا‬
َ‫ اْلسم َالمؤنث‬- Feminine Noun: It is that noun, which has a sign from amongst the signs of
femininity. This sign could be apparent or hidden.

َ‫عَلماتَالتَأَنيث‬: The signs of being feminine are of two types:

1. ‫( لَ اف ِظي‬in words): It is that sign, which is visible in words. These signs are of the
following three types:
 ‫ة‬: This renders the word ‫َّث‬ ُ ‫ اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬even if the ‫ ة‬appears in a masculine proper
noun. e.g. ‫َسيَّ َارة‬ ُ‫( طَال َحة‬a masculine proper noun)
 ُ‫ص اوَرة‬ ِ ٰ ‫ُحاب ٰلى‬
ُ ‫ف الا َم اق‬
ُ ‫(ى) اَالَل‬ e.g. ‫ص اغ ٰرى‬ ُ
 ُ‫ف الا َم ام ُد اوَدة‬ ِ
ُ ‫(اء) اَالَل‬ e.g. ُ‫محَاَراء‬ ُ‫ضاء‬ َ ‫بَاي‬
If a word has any of these three signs it will be ‫َّث‬ ُ ‫اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬.
2. ‫( تَ اق ِدي ِري‬assumed): It is that sign, which is not visible in words and is assumed to exist.
This is determined by looking at the diminutive form )‫صغِاي ر‬ ‫ (تَ ا‬of a particular word.
This reveals the original letters of the word.
e.g. ‫ أ اَرض‬The diminutive form is ‫ضة‬ ُ ‫اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬.
َ ‫أ َُريا‬. Therefore, it is ‫َّث‬
‫َشاس‬ The diminutive form is ‫سة‬ ُ ‫اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬.
َ ‫ ُشَاي‬. Therefore, it is ‫َّث‬

Based on the signs of femininity being ‫ لَ اف ِظي‬or ‫تَ اق ِدي ِري‬, ‫َّث‬
ُ ‫ اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬is of two types:
ِ ‫َّث الا ِقي‬
‫اسي‬ ِ
1. َ ُ ‫( اَلا ُم َؤن‬according to rule): It is that feminine noun, which has a ‫ لَ افظي‬sign of
femininity.
ِ ‫السم‬ ِ
2. ‫اعي‬ ُ ‫( اَلا ُم َؤن‬according to usage): It is that feminine noun, which has a ‫ تَ اقدي ِري‬sign of
َ َّ ‫َّث‬
femininity.

ُ ‫ اَاِْل اس ُم الا ُم َؤن‬is of two types:

In terms of ‫( َذات‬essence), ‫َّث‬
1. ‫ح ِقاي ِقي‬
َ ‫ ُم َؤنَّث‬: It is that feminine noun, which has an opposite masculine.
e.g. ‫( اِ امَرأَة‬woman). Its masculine is ‫( َر ُجل‬man).
2. ‫ ُم َؤنَّث لَ اف ِظي‬: It is that feminine noun, which does not have an opposite masculine.
e.g. ‫( ظُال َمة‬darkness) ‫( َعي‬spring)

65
Notes:
1. The following are used as feminine )‫( ُم َؤنَّث‬:
a. Name of females.
e.g. ُ‫َم ارَمي‬ ‫ب‬
ُ َ‫َميان‬
b. Words denoting the feminine gender.
e.g. ‫أُم‬ ‫ُخت‬‫أا‬
c. Names of countries, cities, towns and tribes.
‫صُر‬ ِ
e.g. ‫ما‬ ‫قُ َرياش‬
d. Parts of the body found in pairs.
e.g. ‫أُذُن‬ ‫يَد‬
Note: There are exceptions to the rule. ‫خد‬ ِ
َ (cheek), ‫( َحاجب‬eyebrow) etc. are
masculine.
e. Names of various types of winds.
e.g. ‫ِرياح‬ ‫صر‬
َ ‫ص ار‬
َ
f. Various names of Jahannam (hell).
e.g. ‫َّم‬
ُ ‫َج َهن‬ ‫َس َقُر‬
Letters of the alphabet )ُ‫جائِيَّة‬ ِ ُ ‫ (اَ الرو‬are generally used as ‫مؤنَّث‬. They can also be used
g. َ ‫ف ا ال‬ ‫ُُ ا‬ َُ
as masculine.
e.g. ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ ‫…… ت‬..

2. There are some words that Arabs use as feminine without regard to the presence or absence
of signs of femininity. Examples include the following:
‫َدلاو‬ (bucket) ‫( َح ارث‬tillage/field) ‫بِائ ر‬ (well)
‫نَ افس‬ (self) ‫ََنر‬ (fire) ‫َدار‬ (house)

66
Section 3.5
َ‫ – واحدَوت ثنيةَوجع‬Singular, Dual and Plural

َ‫ – واحد‬Singular: It is that noun, which denotes one.

e.g. ‫َر ُجل‬ one man

َ‫ – ت ثنية‬Dual: It is that noun, which denotes two. It is formed by placing at the end of a
singular )‫احد‬ ِ ‫ (و‬one of the following:
َ
 An ‫ أَلِف‬preceded by a fathah and followed by a ‫ نُ اون‬with a kasrah i.e. ]‫ان‬ ِ ‫ [ﹷ‬for ‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬.
)‫ورة‬ ِ
َ ‫(أَلف َما قَ اب لَ َها َم افتُوح َوبَ اع َد َها نُ اون َم اك ُس‬
e.g. ‫َر ُج ََل ِن‬ two men

 A ‫ ََيء‬preceded by a fathah and followed by a ‫ نُ اون‬with a kasrah i.e. ]‫ [ﹷيا ِن‬for ‫ب‬ ِ‫ص‬ ‫َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
‫اْلَِر‬
‫ َو ا‬. )‫( ََيء َما قَ اب لَ َها َم افتُوح َوبَ اع َد َها نُ اون َم اك ُس َورة‬
‫ي‬ِ ‫ر ُجلَ ا‬
e.g. َ two men

َ‫ – جع‬Plural: It is that noun, which denotes more than two.

e.g. ‫ِر َجال‬ men

Note: The ‫ نُ اون‬of ‫ تَثانِيَة‬and ‫ جَاع‬is dropped in case of ‫ضافَة‬

َ ِ‫إ‬.
‫قَلَ َما َمياد‬ (Originally, ‫ان َمياد‬ ِ ‫ قَلَم‬but the ‫ نُون‬was dropped due to ‫ضافَة‬ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
e.g. َ ‫ا‬
‫فَ َر َسا َر ُجل‬ (Originally, ‫جل‬ ِ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
ُ ‫ فَ َر َسان َر‬but the ‫ نُ اون‬was dropped due to ‫ضافَة‬
ِ ِ ِ ِ
‫صَر‬
‫ُم اسل ُم او م ا‬ (Originally, ‫صَر‬ َ ِ‫إ‬.)
‫ ُم اسل ُم او َن م ا‬but the ‫ نُ اون‬was dropped due to ‫ضافَة‬
‫( طَالِبُ او ِع الم‬Originally, ‫ طَالِبُ او َن ِع الم‬but the ‫ نُ اون‬was dropped due to ‫ضافَة‬ َ ِ‫إ‬.)

EXERCISE
1. Translate the following into Arabic.
i. The boy’s two bicycles.
ii. The farmer’s two servants.
iii. Your parents came.
iv. I saw your parents.
v. The servants of deen.
vi. The teachers of the school.

67
Section 3.6
َ‫ – أقسامَاْلمع‬Types of Plural
ِ ‫ و‬does not
ِ (letter sequence/form) of ‫احد‬
َ‫ – اْلمع َالسال‬Sound Plural: It is that plural whose ‫صيغَة‬ َ
change, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence does not break.
e.g. ‫سلِ ُم او َن‬
‫ُم ا‬ (singular – ‫سلِم‬
‫) ُم ا‬

There are two types of ُ‫الس ِاَل‬

َّ ‫اَ اْلَ ام ُع‬:
1. ‫ – جَا ُع ُم َذ َّكر َس ِاَل‬Masculine Sound Plural: It is formed by adding at the end of a singular
)‫احد‬ ِ ‫ (و‬one of the following:
َ
 A ‫ َواو‬preceded by a dammah and followed by a ‫ نُ اون‬with a fathah i.e. ]‫ [ﹹ او َن‬for
‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬. )‫ض ُم اوم َوبَ اع َد َها نُ اون َم افتُ او َحة‬
‫( َواو َما قَ اب لَ َها َم ا‬
e.g. ‫ُم اسلِ ُم او َن‬
 A ‫ ََيء‬preceded by a kasrah and followed by a ‫ نُ اون‬with a fathah i.e. [‫ ]ﹻيا َن‬for
‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ِ‫ص‬ ‫ َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬. )‫( ََيء َما قَاب لَ َها َم اك ُس اور َوبَ اع َد َها نُ اون َم افتُ او َحة‬
‫ي‬ ِِ
e.g. َ ‫ُم اسلم ا‬

2. ‫ – جَا ُع ُم َؤنَّث َس ِاَل‬Feminine Sound Plural: It is formed by discarding the round ‫ ة‬and
adding at the end of a singular, one of the following:
 An ‫ أَلِف‬preceded by a fathah and followed by a madmoom long ‫ ت‬i.e. ]‫ [ﹷات‬for
‫الرفا ِع‬
َّ ُ‫ َحالَة‬. )‫ض ُم اوَمة‬ ِ
‫(أَلف َما قَ اب لَ َها َم افتُ اوح َوبَ اع َد َها ََتء َم ا‬
e.g. ‫ُم اسلِ َمات‬
 An ‫ أَلِف‬preceded by a fathah and followed by a maksoor long ‫ ت‬i.e. ]‫ [ﹷات‬for
‫اْلَِر‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ِ‫ص‬ ِ
‫ َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬. )‫اسوَرة‬
ُ ‫(أَلف َما قَ اب لَ َها َم افتُ اوح َوبَ اع َد َها ََتء َمك‬
e.g. ‫ُم اسلِ َمات‬

َ‫ – اْلمعَالمكسر‬Broken Plural: It is that plural whose ‫( ِصيغَة‬the singular letter sequence/form) of

ِ ‫ و‬changes, when its plural is made. In other words, the singular letter sequence breaks.
‫احد‬ َ
e.g. ‫ِر َجال‬ (singular – ‫جل‬ُ ‫) َر‬

68
َ‫ – جع َقلة‬Restricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from three to ten. It has
four common ‫أ اَوَمان‬.
Table 3.1
َ‫أ َوزانَجعَقلة‬
Examples
Wazn
Singular Meaning Plural
‫أَفا ُعل‬ ‫نَ افس‬ self ‫أَنا ُفس‬
‫أَفا َعال‬ ‫قَ اول‬ statement ‫أَقا َوال‬
‫أَفاعِلَة‬ ‫طَ َعام‬ food ‫أَطاعِ َمة‬
‫فِ اعلَة‬ ‫ُغ ََلم‬ boy ‫ِغ ال َمة‬

Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural, which is not preceded by an ‫ ال‬is also
considered ‫جَا ُع قِلَّة‬.
e.g. ‫َعاقِ ََلت‬ intelligent females ‫ َعاقِلُ او َن‬intelligent males

َ‫ – ج عَكث رة‬Unrestricted Plural: It is that plural, which denotes a number from three upwards.
Some of the common ‫ أ اَوَمان‬are given below.

Table 3.2
َ‫أ َوزانَجعََكث رة‬
Examples
Wazn
Singular Meaning Plural
‫فِ َعال‬ ‫َعابد‬ slave ‫ِعبَاد‬
ُ‫فُ َع ََلء‬ ‫َعلِايم‬ knowledgeable ُ‫ُعلَ َماء‬
ِ ‫نَِب‬ ِ
ُ‫أَفاع ََلء‬ prophet ُ‫أَنابيَاء‬
‫فُ ُعل‬ ‫َر ُس اول‬ messenger ‫ُر ُسل‬
‫فُ ُع اول‬ ‫َاجنم‬ star ‫ُجنُ اوم‬
‫فُعَّال‬ ‫َخ ِادم‬ servant ‫ُخدَّام‬
‫فَ اع ٰلى‬ ‫َم ِرياض‬ patient ‫َم ارضٰى‬
‫فَ َعلَة‬ ‫طَالِب‬ student ‫طَلَبَة‬
‫فِ َعل‬ ‫فِارقَة‬ group/sect ‫فَِرق‬
‫فِ اع ََلن‬ ‫ُغ ََلم‬ boy ‫ِغ ال َمان‬

69
 Note: The masculine and feminine sound plural which is preceded by an ‫ ال‬is also
considered as ‫جَا ُع َكثا َرة‬.
‫ات‬ ِ ‫اَلا ُم اسلِ ُم او َن‬
e.g. ُ ‫اَلا ُم اسل َم‬

َ‫ – جع َاْلمع‬Plural of a Plural: It is the plural of a plural. Sometimes, it appears on the wazn of

‫ ُمان تَ َهى ا‬and sometimes on the wazn of ُ‫الس ِاَل‬
‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬ َّ ‫اَ اْلَ ام ُع‬. Not every plural has a plural. Some
examples of plurals, which have a plural are given below.

Table 3.3
َ‫أمثالَجعَاْلمع‬
Singular Meaning Plural Plural of Plural
‫نِ اع َمة‬ blessing ‫أَنا ُعم‬ ‫أ َََن ِع ُم‬
‫ظُافر‬ nail ‫أَظَافُِر‬ ‫أَظَافِاي ُر‬
‫بَايت‬ house ‫بُيُ اوت‬ ‫بُيُ او ََتت‬
ِ َ‫ف‬
‫اضل‬ well-qualified ‫اض ُل‬ِ َ‫أَف‬ ِ َ‫أَف‬
‫اضلُ او َن‬

َ‫من ت هىَاْلموع‬: It is that plural, which has after the ‫اْلَ ام ِع‬
‫ف ا‬ ِ
ُ ‫( أَل‬alif of plural), one of the following:
two ‫ح ِرك‬ ِ ‫مس‬
 َ َ‫ ُمت‬letters. e.g. ‫اج ُد‬ ََ
one ‫ش َّدد‬
َ ‫ ُم‬letter. ‫( َد َواب‬the original being ‫ب‬ ِ
 e.g. ُ ‫) َد َواب‬
 three letters, the middle one being ‫ساكِن‬
َ. e.g. ‫َم َفاتِاي ُح‬
Some of the common wazns of ‫اْلُ ُم اوِع‬
‫ ُمان تَ َهى ا‬are given below:

Table 3.4
َ‫أ َوزانَمن ت هىَاْلموع‬
Examples
Wazn
Singular Meaning Plural
‫اع ُل‬ ِ ‫م َف‬
َ ‫َم اس ِجد‬ mosque ‫اج ُد‬ ِ ‫مس‬
ََ
ِ
‫َم َفاعاي ُل‬ ‫ِم افتَاح‬ key ِ
‫َم َفاتاي ُح‬
‫فَ َوا ِع ُل‬ ِ َ‫ق‬
‫اع َدة‬ rule/maxim ِ ‫قَو‬
‫اع ُد‬ َ
‫فَ َعائِ ُل‬ ‫ِر َسالَة‬ message/letter ِ
‫َر َسائ ُل‬
ِ َ‫أَف‬
‫اع ُل‬ ‫أَ اكبَ ُر‬ elder ‫أَ َكابُِر‬

70
َ‫ – اسم َاْلمع‬Collective Noun:36 It is a singular noun, which gives a plural meaning. Generally,
it does not have a singular from the same word.
e.g. ‫قَ اوم‬ nation
‫َراهط‬ group
Note:
1. These words have plurals.
e.g. ‫قَ اوم‬ ‫أَقا َوام‬ ‫َراهط‬ ‫أ اَرَهاط‬
2. In usage, if the word is considered, it will be used as a singular noun.
ِ ‫اَلا َقوم ح‬
‫اضر‬
e.g. َ ُ‫ا‬ The people are present.
If its meaning is considered (as is commonly done), it will be used as a plural noun.
ِ ‫قَوم ص‬
‫الُاو َن‬
e.g. َ ‫ا‬ righteous people

Notes:
1. Some plurals do not have the same root letters as their singulars.
e.g. ‫اِ امَرأَة‬ (woman) ‫نِ َساء‬
‫ذُ او‬ (the one who possesses something) ‫أُولُاو‬

ِ َ‫ف الا ِقي‬

2. Some plurals are not according to rule )‫اس‬ ُ ‫( ِخ ََل‬.
e.g. ‫أُم‬ (mother) ‫أ َُّم َهات‬
‫فَم‬ (mouth) ‫أَفا َواه‬
‫َماء‬ (water) ‫ِميَاه‬
‫إِنا َسان‬ (human being) ‫ٌس َج‬
‫َن‬
‫َشاة‬ (goat/sheep) َ‫ٌه جَي‬

ِ ‫)م‬. Because of
َ‫ – اسمَاْلنس‬Generic Noun:37 It is that noun, which is devised for an essence (‫اهيَة‬ َ
that, it refers to an entire genus (category/class). Generally, its singular has a (‫)ة‬. For example,
‫ َش َجر‬refers to trees. Its singular is ‫( َش َجَرة‬a tree).
‫ ََنال‬refers to date-palm trees. Its singular is ‫( ََنالَة‬a date-palm tree).

36
For more details, please refer to ‘Abd al-Ghaniyy al-Daqr, Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah fi al-Nahw wa al-
Tasreef, (Damascus: Dar al-Qalam, 1986), 36.
37
For more details, please refer to Muʻjam al-Qawaʻid al-‘Arabiyyah, 36.

71
 EXERCISE
1. What type of plurals are the following?

i. ‫صائمات‬ ii. ‫جيش‬ iii. ‫أكلب‬

iv. ‫مصابيح‬ v. ‫بَلد‬ vi. ‫كتب‬
vii. ‫صائمون‬ viii. ‫إبل‬ ix. ‫غنم‬

72
Section 3.7
َ‫ الَمََرفَوعَات‬- Words That Are Always Marfoo‘

There are eight words that are always in the state of ‫ َرفاع‬. These are as follows:
ِ َ‫ف‬
1. ‫اعل‬ 2. ِ ‫ََنئِب الا َف‬
‫اع ِل‬ ُ 3. ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬ 4. ‫َخبَ ر‬ 5. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬
َ ‫َخبَ ُر إِ َّن َوأ‬
6. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ ِِ ِ ِ ‫اْلِان‬ ‫َخبَ ُر َْل اَلَِّ اِت لِنَ اف ِي ا‬
َ ‫ا اس ُم َكا َن َوأ‬ 7. ‫س‬ َ ‫ا اس ُم َما َوَْل اَلا ُم َشبَّ َهتَ اي بلَاي‬ 8. ‫س‬
Some of these have been discussed before. ‫( ُماب تَ َدأ‬subject) and ‫خبَ ر‬ َ (predicate) were
discussed in Section 1.4.1, ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ ‫ اِسم َكا َن وأ‬was
َ ‫ َخبَ ُر إِ َّن َوأ‬was discussed in Section 1.8, and ‫َخ َواِتَا‬
َ َ ُ‫ا‬
discussed in Section 1.9. We discuss the rest below.

Section 3.7.1
َ‫ – فاعل‬Subject/Doer
Definition: It is the doer of the action or of the meaning contained in the verb.
 The ‫اعل‬ ِ َ‫( اِسم ظ‬i.e. visible in words after the
ِ َ‫ ف‬can either be a personal pronoun or an ‫اهر‬
‫ا‬
‫)فِ اعل‬. We have discussed personal pronouns before in Section 2.4.1. Now, we will
discuss what the ‫ فِ اعل‬should be for various types of ‫اعل‬
ِ َ‫ف‬.

Table 3.5
َ‫استعمالَالفعلَحسبَالفاعل‬
If the َ‫ فاعل‬is Then the َ‫ فَعَل‬will be Example
1. ‫اهر ُم َؤنَّث َح ِقاي ِقي‬ِ َ‫ ظ‬and there is ‫احد مؤنَّث‬
َ ُ ‫َو‬
ِ ُ‫ت َعائِ َشة‬‫قَ َام ا‬
no word between the ‫فِ اعل‬
and the ‫اعل‬ ِ َ‫ف‬.
2. ‫ض ِماي ر ُم َؤنَّث‬ ‫ ُم َؤنَّث‬and its singularity, ‫صَرََت‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ َ َ‫ اَلا ُم َعل َمتَان ن‬- ‫ت‬ ‫صَر ا‬ َ َ‫اَلا ُم َعل َمةُ ن‬
‫ص ار َن‬ ِ
َ َ‫ات ن‬ ُ ‫ اَلا ُم َعل َم‬-
duality, or plurality will
be according to the
preceding noun that it
refers to.
3. ‫اهر ُم َؤنَّث َح ِقاي ِقي‬ِ َ‫ ظ‬and there is ‫احد م َذ َّكر‬
ِ ِ
ُ ‫ َو‬or ‫َواحد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ُ‫قَ َرأَ الايَ اوَم َعائِ َشة‬
a word between the ‫ فِ اعل‬and or
ِ َ‫ف‬. ِ ‫قَرأ‬
ُ‫َت الايَ اوَم َعائِ َشة‬
the ‫اعل‬ َ
4. ‫ح ِقاي ِقي‬ ِ
َ ‫ظَاهر ُم َؤنَّث َغ ُي‬
ِ ‫ و‬or ‫احد مؤنَّث‬
‫احد ُم َذ َّكر‬ ِ
َ ُ ‫َو‬ ‫س‬ ِ
َ ُ ‫َّم‬
‫ طَلَ َع الش ا‬or ‫س‬ُ ‫َّم‬
‫طَلَ َعت الش ا‬
5. ‫سر‬
َّ ‫اهر جَاع ُم َك‬ ِ َ‫ظ‬ ِ ‫ و‬or ‫احد مؤنَّث‬
‫احد ُم َذ َّكر‬ ِ ُ ‫ال ال ِر َج‬ ِ َ‫قَال‬
ُ ‫ت ال ِر َج‬
َ َ ُ ‫َو‬ ‫ال‬ َ َ‫ ق‬or ‫ال‬

73
 Table 3.5 – Continued

If the َ‫ فاعل‬is Then the َ‫ فَعَل‬will be Example

ِ َ‫ اِسم ظ‬beside the ‫احد‬
6. any ‫اهر‬ ِ ‫ و‬corresponding in ‫الر ُج ََل ِن‬
َّ ‫ب‬
‫ا‬ َ َ ‫ضَر‬ َ - ‫الر ُج ُل‬ َّ ‫ب‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ
above five categories gender ُ ‫ب ال ِر َج‬
‫ال‬ َ ‫ضَر‬ َ -
7. ‫ض ِماي ر ُم َذ َّكر‬
َ ‫ ُم َذ َّكر‬and its singularity, ِ ‫ اَ اْلَ ِادم‬- ‫اَ اْلَ ِادم ذَهب‬
‫ان ذَ َهبَا‬ َ َ َ ُ
duality, or plurality will ِ
‫ اَ اْلَاد ُم او َن ذَ َهبُ اوا‬-
be according to the
preceding noun that it
refers to
َّ ‫ض ِماي ُر جَاع ُم َك‬
8. ‫سر‬ ِ‫و‬
‫ جَاع ُم َذ َّكر‬or ‫احد ُم َؤنَّث‬ ُ ‫ اَل ِر َج‬or ‫ت‬
‫ال قَ ُام اوا‬ ُ ‫اَل ِر َج‬
َ َ ‫ال قَ َام ا‬

EXERCISE

1. Fill in a suitable ‫ فِ اعل‬in the spaces below.

i. _______ ‫الولدان‬ ii. ‫الطَلب‬
ُ _______/_______
iii. ‫_______ النساء‬ iv. ‫_______ السفينة‬/_______
v. _______/_______ ‫الطفال‬ vi. ‫_____ اليوم امرأة‬/_______

74
‫‪Section 3.7.2‬‬
‫فاعلَ ‪ – Substitute of‬مفعولََماَلَيسمَفاعلهَ ‪ /‬نئبَالَفاعلَ‬

‫اعل ‪Definition: It is that noun, which is the‬‬ ‫اعل ‪ (passive voice). The original‬فِعل َاَمهول ‪ of a‬فَ ِ‬ ‫‪ is‬فَ ِ‬
‫ا ُا‬
‫اع ِل ‪َ subsitutes it. This is why, it is called‬م افعُ اول بِِه ‪dropped and the‬‬‫اعل ‪ََ (substitute of‬نئِب الا َف ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪) or‬فَ ِ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪ is not mentioned).‬فَاعل ‪ whose‬ف اعل ‪َ of such a‬م اف ُع اول ‪َ (the‬م افعُ او ُل َما ََلا يُ َس َّم فَاعلُهُ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬
‫ب َمياد‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫)‪Zayd was hit. (The doer is not known/mentioned.‬‬

‫‪ usage rules apply as mentioned above in Table 3.5.‬فِعل – فَ ِ‬

‫اعل ‪The same‬‬ ‫ا‬
‫شةُ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ت َعائ َ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫نُصَر ا‬
‫ت ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫َعائ َشةُ نُصَر ا‬
‫صر الاي وم عائِشةُ ‪ or‬نُ ِ ِ‬
‫صَرت الايَ اوَم َعائِ َ‬
‫شةُ ‪3.‬‬ ‫نُ ِ َ َ ا َ َ َ‬
‫َّمس ‪4.‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫س ‪ُ or‬رئيَت الش ا ُ‬ ‫َّم ُ‬
‫ُرئ َي الش ا‬
‫ت ال ِر َج ُ‬‫ال ‪ or‬ض ِرب ِ‬ ‫ب ال ِر َج ُ‬
‫ال ‪5.‬‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ب ال ِر َج ُ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ال ‪6.‬‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬ ‫الر ُج ََلن ‪ُ or‬‬ ‫ب َّ‬‫ض ِر َ‬ ‫ض ِر َ‬
‫ب ا َّلر ُج ُل ‪ُ or‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ان طُلبَا ‪ or‬اَ اْلَاد ُم او َن طُلبُ اوا ‪7.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اَ اْلَادم طُلب ‪ or‬اَ اْلَادم ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬
‫ض ِربُ اوا ‪8.‬‬ ‫ت ‪ or‬اَل ِر َج ُ‬
‫ال ُ‬ ‫ض ِربَ ا‬ ‫اَل ِر َج ُ‬
‫ال ُ‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫البابَ‬ ‫فتحَ‬ ‫‪The door was opened.‬‬

‫ب الا َفاعِ ِل‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ََنئ ُ‬ ‫فِ اعل َاَم ُه اول‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫ِ‬ ‫‪ََ .‬نئِب الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪ with its‬ف اعل َا‬
‫َم ُه اول ‪1. Convert the following to‬‬ ‫ُ‬
‫سرق اللص املال ‪i.‬‬ ‫نعبد هللا ‪iii.‬‬
‫فتح ميد البواب ‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذبح الرجل الشاة ‪iv.‬‬

‫اعل – فِ اعل ‪2. Convert the following to‬‬

‫‪.‬م افعول – فَ ِ‬
‫َ ُا‬
‫ب البقرة ‪i.‬‬
‫ُاَتلَ ُ‬ ‫سِإ َل املعلم ‪iii.‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫قُ ِطع ِ‬
‫ت الزهرة ‪ii.‬‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُش ِر َ‬
‫ب اللب ‪iv.‬‬

‫‪75‬‬
Section 3.7.338
َ‫ – اسمَماَوْلَالمشب هتَيََبليس‬The Noun of Those ‫ ما‬and َ‫ْل‬, Which Are Similar to َ‫ليس‬
 It means that ‫ َما‬and ‫ َْل‬have the same meaning and effect (‫ ) َع َمل‬as ‫لَايس‬.
َ
e.g. ِ
‫َما َمياد قَائ ًما‬ Zayd is not standing.
‫ك‬َ ‫ض َل ِمان‬َ ‫َْل َر ُجل أَفا‬ No man is more virtuous than you.
 Like ‫لَايس‬, sometimes, an extra baa’ (‫ ) َبء َمائِ َدة‬is added before the ‫خبَ ر‬ َ.
َ
e.g. ‫َما أ َََن بَِقا ِرئ‬ I am not a reader/I cannot read.
 The effect of ‫ َما‬and ‫ َْل‬will be cancelled if any of the following occurs:
When the ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ
i. َ appears before the ‫ا اسم‬.
e.g. ‫َما قَائِم َمياد‬ Zayd is not standing.
ii. The word ‫ إَِّْل‬appears before the ‫خبَ ر‬ َ negating the negative meaning of ‫ َما‬and ‫َْل‬.
e.g. ‫َما ُُمَ َّمد إَِّْل َر ُس اول‬ And Muhammad is not but a messenger./
And Muhammad is only a messenger.
[Allah bless him and give him peace]
iii. If the ‫ اِ اسم‬and/or ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ ِ
َ of ‫ َْل‬is not ‫نَكَرة‬. (‫ َما‬can appear before a ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬or a ‫)نَكَرة‬
e.g. ‫َْل الا َم ِديانَةُ َكبِاي َرة‬ The city is not big.

38
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 95-102.

76
Section 3.7.439
َ‫ – خَبَرَْلَالِتَلن فَيََاْلنس‬The َ‫ خب ر‬of That َ‫ ْل‬Which Negates an Entire َ‫( جَنَس‬Category/Class)
 ‫ َْل‬gives its ‫ اِ اسم‬a single fathah and its ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ ِ
َ a dammah when the ‫ ا اسم‬and the ‫ َخبَ ر‬are ‫نَكَرة‬.
e.g. ‫َْل َر ُج َل قَائِم‬ No man is standing.

Table 3.6
Different Forms of the Noun of َ‫ ْل‬and Its I‘raab
If the َ‫ اَسَم‬of َ‫ ْل‬is Then it will be Explanation Example
1. ‫ضاف‬ ِ ‫ ِشبه الام‬40 ‫مانصوب‬
َ ‫ ُم‬or ‫ضاف‬
َ ُ ُ‫ا‬ ‫َ ُا‬ َّ ‫َْل َخ ِاد َم َر ُجل ِف‬
‫الدا ِر‬
There is no servant of
a man in the house.
‫َْل َسا ِعيًا َخ ًيا َم اذ ُموم‬
No one who attempts
to do good is
blameworthy.
2. ‫نَ ِكَرة ُم افَرَدة‬ ‫َماب ِن َعلَى الا َفات ِح‬ ‫الدا ِر‬
َّ ‫َْل َر ُج َل ِف‬
There is no man in
the house.
3. ‫َم اع ِرفَة‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ - The ‫ َْل‬has to be ‫الدا ِر َوَْل َع امرو‬
َّ ‫َْل َمياد ِف‬
repeated with Neither is Zayd in the
another ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬. house nor ‘Amr.
- The effect of ‫َْل‬
is cancelled.
4. ‫ نَ ِكَرة‬with a word ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ - The ‫ َْل‬has to be ‫َْل فِ َيها َر ُجل َوَْل اِ امَرأَة‬
between it and ‫َْل‬ repeated. Neither is there a
- The effect of ‫َْل‬ man in it nor a
is cancelled. woman.
5. ‫ َْل‬and ‫ نَ ِكَرة‬repeated ‫فَات ُح ُه َما‬ 41
‫ول َوَْل قُ َّوَة‬
َ ‫َْل َح‬
with no word ‫َرفا ُع ُه َما‬ ‫َْل َحول َوَْل قُ َّوة‬
between them ‫ب الثَّ ِان‬ ِ
ُ‫ص‬ ‫فَ ات ُح االََّول َونَ ا‬ ‫ول َوَْل قُ َّوًة‬
َ ‫َْل َح‬
‫فَ ات ُح االََّوِل َوَرفا ُع الثَّ ِان‬ ‫ول َوَْل قُ َّوة‬
َ ‫َْل َح‬
‫َرفا ُع االََّوِل َوفَ ات ُح الثَّ ِان‬ ‫َْل َحول َوَْل قُ َّوَة‬

39
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 118-122.
40
It refers to the case when a word is connected to another word, which completes its meaning, in the same way
that mudaaf and mudaaf ilayhi are connected to one another.
41
There is no power (to do good) and there is no power (to stay away from evil)[except with Allah’s help].

77
Note: The ‫خبَ ر‬
َ of ‫ َْل‬may be omitted when the meaning is understood.
e.g. َ ‫َْل َبا‬
‫س‬ i.e. ‫ك‬ َ ‫َْل َبا‬
َ ‫س َعلَاي‬ There is no harm upon you. / No
problem.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the rule which applies.

i. ‫ْل خي ف مال البخيل لنفسه‬ v. ‫ْل بكر ف الفصل وْل حسن‬

ii. ‫ْل طالب علم ف الفصل‬ vi. ‫ْل ف الفصل معلم وْل طالب‬
iii. ‫جود مذموم‬
ُ ‫ْل صاحب‬ vii. ‫ْل دار كتب ف املدينة‬
iv. ‫ْل الرجل كرمي وْل ابنه‬ viii. ‫ْل ف الديقة صبيان وْل بنات‬

78
Section 3.8
َ‫ – الَمَنَصَوََبَت‬Words Which Are Always Mansoob42

1. ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ 7. ‫ اَلت َِّماي ُز‬/ ‫اَلت اَّميِاي ُز‬
‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬ ِ
2. ‫َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق‬ 8. َ ‫ا اس ُم إِ َّن َوأ‬
3. ُ‫َم افعُ اول لَه‬ known as ُ‫سة‬ ‫اَلا َم َفاعِاي ُل ا‬
َ ‫اْلَ ام‬ 9. ‫س‬ ِِ
َ ‫َخبَ ُر َما َوَْل اَلا ُم َشبَّ َهتَ اي بلَاي‬
4. ُ‫َم افعُ اول َم َعه‬ 10. ‫س‬ِ ‫اْلِان‬ ‫اِ اس ُم َْل اَلَِّ اِت لِنَ اف ِي ا‬
5. ‫َم افعُ اول فِاي ِه‬ 11. ‫َخ َو ِاِتَا‬
َ ‫َخبَ ُر َكا َن َوأ‬
6. ‫ال‬
ُ َ‫اَ ال‬ 12. ‫اَلا ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬

Of these, 8,9,10 and 11 have been discussed before. Here, we will discuss the remaining.

Section 3.8.1
َ‫ – مفعولََبه‬Object
ِ َ‫ ف‬takes place.
Definition: It is that word on which the action of the ‫اعل‬
e.g. ‫اءا‬
َ‫م‬ َ‫خالد‬ َ‫شرب‬ Khalid drank water.
‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ ِ َ‫ف‬
‫اعل‬ ‫فِ اعل‬

 Sometimes, the verb governing the ‫ َم افعُ اول بِِه‬is dropped as in the following:
a. ‫( ُمنَادٰى‬the one being called):43
e.g. َ‫ابنََزيد‬ َ‫َي‬ O son of Zayd!
)‫ُمنَادٰى ( َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬ ‫ف النِ َد ِاء‬
ُ ‫َح ار‬
It was originally )‫(أ اَد ُع او اِبا َن َمياد‬. The verb ‫ أ اَد ُع او‬was dropped.

Note:
 The ‫ف النِ َد ِاء‬
ُ ‫( َح ار‬vocative particle) substitutes the omitted verb.
Some of the vocative particles are as follows:
َ‫ أ‬and ‫أَ اي‬ These are used when the ‫ ُمنَادٰى‬is near.
‫أ َََي‬ and ‫َهيَا‬ These are used when the ‫ ُمنَادٰى‬is far.
‫ََي‬ This is used for both (near and far).

42
There are exceptions to the rule. Mustathnaa, for example, is not always mansoob. It is still mentioned under
this category because most of the time, it is mansoob.
43
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 120-124.

79
 Table 3.7
Rules Governing the I‘raab of the ‫منادٰى‬

Then it will
If the ‫ منادٰى‬is Example
be
1. ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ُم‬ ‫ص اوب‬
ُ ‫َمان‬ ‫ََي ابا َن َمياد‬ O son of Zayd!
ِ ‫ شبِيه ِبلامض‬44
2. ‫اف‬ ‫ص اوب‬ ‫ََي قا ِرءًا كِتَ ًاب‬
ُ ‫َمان‬
َ O reader of a book!
َ ُ
ِ
3. ‫كرة َغي معيَّ نَة‬
َ ُ ُ َ َ‫ن‬ ‫ص اوب‬
ُ ‫َمان‬ ‫ ََي َر ُج ًَل! ُخ اذ بِيَ ِد اي‬O man! Take my hand. (call
(Unspecified nakirah) of a blind man to any person
for assisstance)
4. ‫نَ ِكَرة ُم َعيَّنَة‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ََي َر ُج ُل‬ O man!
(Specified nakirah)
5. ‫َم اع ِرفَة ُم افَرَدة‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ََي َميا ُد‬ O Zayd!
(Singular ma‘rifah)
6. ‫ُم َعَّرف بِ ال‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫( أَي َها‬masculine) or ‫( أَيَّتُ َها‬feminine) has to be
added between the ‫ف النِ َد ِاء‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬and ‫ ُمنَادٰى‬.
‫الر ُج ُل‬
َّ ‫ ََي أَي َها‬O man! ُ‫ ََي أَيَّتُ َها الا َم ارأَة‬O woman!

 ‫( تَ ارِخايم‬abbreviation) is allowed in munaadaa.

‫ك‬ ِ ُ ‫ ََي َم‬or ‫ََي َم ِال‬
e.g. ُ ‫ََي َمال‬ can become ‫ال‬
‫ص اوُر‬
ُ ‫ ََي َمان‬can become ‫ص‬
ُ ‫ََي َمان‬
Note: The last letter can be given a dammah or it can retain its original harakah.

b. ‫س اه ًَل‬
َ ‫أ اَه ًَل َو‬: This is said to one’s guest for welcoming him/her.
Its original is ‫س اه ًَل‬
َ ‫ت‬
َ ‫ت أ اَه ًَل َوَوطَاي‬
َ ‫أَتَاي‬, which means “You have come to your own people
and have trampled comfortable ground.” In other words, “you are welcome.” Here
two verbs, ‫ت‬
َ ‫ أَتَاي‬and ‫ت‬
َ ‫ َوطَاي‬have been dropped.
c. Sometimes, when warning someone, the verb governing the ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬is dropped due to
context. Examples include the following:
ِ ‫ اِت‬to give the same meaning, which is
 ‫ اَلطَّ ِريا َق اَلطَّ ِريا َق‬is used instead of ‫َّق الطَّ ِريا َق‬
ِ ‫ اِت‬has been dropped.
“Beware of the road!” Here, the verb ‫َّق‬
‫َس َد‬ ِ ِ ‫ اِت َِّق نَ افسك ِمن اال‬to give the same meaning, which
 َ ‫ إ ََّي َك َو اال‬is used instead of ‫َسد‬
َ َ َ َ
is “Save yourself from the lion.”

ِ ‫الامض‬
This is another term for ‫اف‬ ِ
َ ُ ُ‫شابه‬.
44
As mentioned earlier, it is similar to mudaaf in meaning.

80
Section 3.8.245
َ‫مفعولََمطلق‬

Definition: It is the masdar of the verb that governs it and is used for the following:
 ‫( َتاكِيد‬emphasis) e.g. ‫ض ارًب‬
َ ُ‫ضَرباتُه‬
َ I beat him severely.
 ‫( بَيَا ُن النَّ اوِع‬description of type) e.g. ‫ت ِج ال َسةَ الا َقا ِر ِئ‬
ُ ‫َجلَ اس‬ I sat like a Qari would
sit.
 ‫( بَيَا ُن الا َع َد ِد‬number of times) e.g. ِ ‫ضربَتَ ا‬
‫ي‬ َ َ ُ‫ضَرباتُه‬
َ I hit him twice.

Note: Sometimes, the verb governing ‫ َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق‬is dropped because of context. For example,
‫ َخاي َر َم اق َدم‬. Originally, it was ‫ت قُ ُد اوًما َخاي َر َم اق َدم‬ ِ
َ ‫قَد ام‬, which means “You came a good coming.”
Here, the verb ‫ت‬ ِ
َ ‫قَد ام‬, and ‫قُ ُد اوًما‬, which is the ‫ َم اف ُع اول ُمطالَق‬, have been dropped because of context.
ِ of the ‫م افعول مطالَق‬, which is ‫خي ر م اق َدم‬, remains.
Only the ‫ص َفة‬ ُ ‫َ ُا‬ َ َ‫َا‬

Section 3.8.346
َ‫َمَفَعَولََلَه‬/ََ‫مَفَعَولََلجله‬

Definition: It is that noun, which explains the reason for the action taking place. Generally, it
is a masdar.
e.g. ‫ضَرباتُهُ َتا ِديابًا‬
َ I beat/hit him to teach (him) manners.

Section 3.8.447
َ‫مفعولََمعه‬

Definition: It is that noun, which appears after such a ‫ َواو‬, which has the meaning of ‫( َم َع‬with).
This ‫ َواو‬is known as ‫ َو ُاو الا َمعِيَّ ِة‬.
‫اب‬ ِ
e.g. َ َ‫َجاءَ َمياد َوالاكت‬ Zayd came with the book.
‫ت َوَميا ًدا‬ ِ
ُ ‫جائ‬ I came with Zayd.

45
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 156-160. For
additional types of ‫ َم اف ُع اول ُمطالَق‬, with accompanying examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih,
Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 127-130.
46
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 161-164.
47
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 157-162.

81
Section 3.8.5
َ‫َمفعولََفيه‬/ََ‫ظرف‬

Definition: It is that noun, which denotes the time )‫ ( َمَمان‬or place )‫ ( َم َكان‬in which an action
took place.
e.g. ‫ت َش اهًرا‬
ُ ‫َسافَ ار‬ I travelled for a month.

Both types of ‫ظُُراوف‬, namely, ‫ َمَمان‬and ‫ َم َكان‬are of two types: ‫ُم ُد اود‬
‫( َا‬limited, restricted)
and ‫( ُماب َهم‬unlimited, unrestricted).
ِ ‫الزم‬
Types of ‫ان‬
 ََّ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ظُُراو‬
i. ‫( َاُم ُد اود‬limited, restricted): for example,
‫يَ اوم‬ day e.g. ‫ت يَ اوًما‬ُ ‫ص ام‬ُ I fasted for one day.
‫لَايل‬ ‫ت لَاي ًَل‬ ِ
night e.g. ُ ‫َعم ال‬ I worked for one night.
‫َشهر‬ month e.g. ‫ت َش اهًرا‬ ُ ‫ص ام‬ُ I fasted for a month.
‫َسنَة‬ year e.g. ً‫ت َسنَة‬ ُ ‫َسافَ ار‬ I travelled for a year.

ii. ‫( ُماب َهم‬unlimited, unrestricted): for example,

‫َد اهر‬ long period of time
e.g. ‫ت َد اهًرا‬
ُ ‫ص ام‬
ُ I fasted for a long time.
‫ِح اي‬ some time (could be short or long period of time)
‫َّه ِر‬ ِ ِ َ‫دعا نُوح ق‬
e.g. ‫ومهُ حاي نًا م َن الد ا‬
َ ‫ََ ا‬
Nuh (peace be upon him) called his people for some time.

ِ ‫ف الام َك‬
Types of ‫ان‬
 َ ُ ‫ظُُراو‬
i. ‫( َاُم ُد اود‬limited, restricted):
e.g. ‫ت ِف الا َم اس ِج ِد‬ُ ‫صلَّاي‬
َ I prayed in the mosque.
e.g. ِ
‫ت ف الدَّار‬ ِ ُ ‫َجلَ اس‬ I sat in the house.

ii. ‫( ُماب َهم‬unlimited, unrestricted):

‫ف‬
َ ‫َخ ال‬ behind e.g. ُ‫ت َخ ال َفه‬ُ ‫َجلَ اس‬ I sat behind him.
‫أ ََم َام‬ in front of e.g. ُ‫ت أ ََم َامه‬
ُ ‫قُ ام‬ I stood in front of him.

‫( َا‬, the preposition ‫ ِف‬is mentioned in words; while in the

Note: In the case of ‫ُم ُد اود) َم َكان‬
case of ‫( ُماب َهم) َم َكان‬, it is assumed to exist (‫) ُم َقدَّر‬.

82
 ‫‪The above-mentioned five maf‘ools have been combined in a couplet, which is as‬‬
‫‪follows:‬‬

‫مح ادت محَا ًدا ح ِام ًدا و َِ‬

‫محاي ًدا‬ ‫َِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ِر َعايَةَ ُش اك ِرهِ َد اهًرا َّم ِديا ًدا‬
‫‪I praised Haamid a lot, with Hameed,‬‬
‫‪out of regard for thanking him, for an extended period of time.‬‬

‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه = ُ‬
‫ش اك ِرهِ ‪1.‬‬ ‫ضاف ‪ُ +‬م َ‬
‫ُم َ‬
‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه = ِر َعايَةَ ُش اك ِرهِ‬
‫ضاف ‪ُ +‬م َ‬
‫ُم َ‬
‫ص َفة = َم ِديا ًدا ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ص اوف = َد اهًرا‬ ‫َم او ُ‬

‫ده اراَمديَ ادا‬ ‫رعايةَشكَرهَ‬ ‫وَحيَ ادَا‬ ‫حام ادا‬ ‫َح ادا‬ ‫َحدتَ‬
‫|‬ ‫|‬ ‫|‬
‫َم افعُ اول فِاي ِه = جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َم افعُ اول لَهُ‬ ‫َم افعُ اول َم َعهُ‬ ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ ‫)فِ اعل ‪ +‬فَا ِعل( َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪َ in the following sentences.‬م اف ُع اول ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and identify the type of‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أكل على أكلتي‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫سافر ميد طالبا للعلم‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ركب إبراهيم الصان‬ ‫‪ix.‬‬ ‫وقف الشرطي وقوف النشاط‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫سافرت وأخاك‬ ‫‪x.‬‬ ‫قرأت الدرس صباحا أمام املعلم‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫يثب النمر وثوب السد‬ ‫‪xi.‬‬ ‫تدور الرض دورة ف اليوم‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫يسافر خالد إٰل مصر طلبا للعلم‬ ‫‪xii.‬‬ ‫اعملوا اْلي حبا ف اْلي‬
‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ْل تبخلوا خشية الفقر‬ ‫‪xiii.‬‬ ‫جلست الرة َتت املكتب‬
‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫توقد املصابيح ليَل‬ ‫‪xiv.‬‬ ‫سارت السيارة ساعة‬

‫‪83‬‬
Section 3.8.648
َ‫ – حَال‬State / Condition

ِ َ‫ ف‬or the ‫ م افعول‬or both at

Definition: It is a noun, which describes the condition of either the ‫اعل‬ ‫َ ُا‬
the time the action contained in the verb takes place.
e.g. ‫جاءَ َمياد َراكِبًا‬
َ Zayd came while mounted/riding.
‫ت َميا ًدا ََنئِ ًما‬ ِ
ُ ‫جائ‬ I came to Zayd while he was sleeping.
ِ ‫ت َميا ًدا َجالِس ا‬
‫ي‬ ُ ‫َكلَّ ام‬ I spoke to Zayd while both of us were sitting.
َ
Notes:

1. The condition itself is known as ‫حال‬

َ , whereas the one whose condition is being
ِ ‫ال‬
described is known as ‫ال‬َ‫ذُو ا‬.
2. The ‫حال‬
َ gets a ‫صب‬
‫نَ ا‬, which is generally in the form of two fathahs.
ِ ‫ال‬ ِ
3. The ‫ال‬َ‫ ذُو ا‬is generally ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬and the ‫ َحال‬is generally ‫نَكَرة‬.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ َمياد َراكِبًا‬ Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.
ِ ‫ال‬
4. If the ‫ال‬ ِ ِ ‫ذُو ا‬.
َ‫ ذُو ا‬is ‫نَكَرة‬, the ‫ َحال‬is brought before the ‫الَال‬
e.g. ‫ن َراكِبًا َر ُجل‬ ِ
‫َجاءَ ا‬ A man came to me riding/while he was
mounted.
ِ ‫ال‬
5. The ‫ال‬ ِ .
َ‫ ذُو ا‬can be a ‫ضماي ر‬ َ
e.g. ‫َمياد أَ َك َل َجالِ ًسا‬ Zayd ate sitting.
ِ ‫ال‬
Here, the ‫ال‬ ِ in ‫أَ َكل‬.
َ‫ ذُو ا‬is ‫ ُه َو‬, which is the hidden ‫ضماي ر‬
َ َ
6. The ‫حال‬
َ can be a sentence.
If the ‫حال‬ ِِ ِ ) is added to give the
 َ is a ‫جُالَة ا اسيَّة‬, then a ‫( َواو‬with or without a ‫ضماي ر‬َ
meaning of condition.
e.g. ‫الص ٰلوةَ َوأَناتُ ام ُس ٰك ٰرى‬
َّ ‫َْل تَ اقَربُوا‬ Don’t come near salah while you are
intoxicated.

If the ‫حال‬ ِِ ِ ِ ِ ِ
 َ is a ‫ جُالَة ف اعليَّة‬and the ‫ ف اعل‬is ‫اَلاف اع ُل الا َماض اي‬, ‫ قَ اد‬has to appear before the ‫اَلاف اع ُل‬
ِ ‫الام‬.
‫اضي‬
‫ا‬ َ
ِ
e.g. ُ‫َجاءَ َمياد َوقَ اد َخَر َج َخاد ُمه‬ Zayd came while his servant had left.

48
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 101-109.

84
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫َجاءَ َمياد َراكِبًا‬ ‫‪Zayd came riding/while he was mounted.‬‬

‫راكباَا‬ ‫زيدَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫َحال‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫الَ ِال‬
‫ذُو ا‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫فَا ِعل‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫فِ اعل‬

‫ت َع امًرا ََنئِ ًما ‪2.‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫جائ ُ‬ ‫‪I came to ‘Amr while he was asleep.‬‬

‫نئ امَا‬ ‫عم ارا‬ ‫جئتَ‬

‫َحال‬ ‫ال ِ‬
‫ال ‪+‬‬‫ذُو اَ‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫فِعل ‪ +‬فَ ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫ا‬

‫جالِس ‪3.‬‬
‫ت بَكًارا َوُه َو َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫لَقاي ُ‬ ‫‪I met Bakr while he was sitting.‬‬

‫جالسَ‬ ‫هوَ‬ ‫وَ‬ ‫بك ارا‬ ‫لقيَتَ‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدا‬

‫َحال‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫الَ ِال ‪َ +‬واو َحالِيَة‬

‫ذُو ا‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ ‫(فِعل ‪ +‬فَ ِ‬

‫اعل) ‪+‬‬ ‫ا‬

‫سا ‪4.‬‬ ‫ِ‬

‫َميد أَ َك َل َجال ً‬ ‫‪Zayd ate while sitting.‬‬

‫سَا‬
‫جال ا‬ ‫أكلَ‬ ‫زيدَ‬
‫(ه َو)‬ ‫فِي ِه ِ‬
‫ضماي ر ُم استَ تَر ُ‬
‫ا َ‬
‫|‬
‫َحال‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫الَ ِال‬
‫ذُو ا‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫فَ ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫فِ اعل (أَ َك َل) ‪+‬‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدا‬

‫‪85‬‬
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫حال ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the‬‬ ‫‪ in the following sentences.‬ذُو ا ِ‬
‫الَال ‪َ and‬‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أحب التلميذ َمتهدا‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ْل تكلوا الطعام حارا‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫لقيت ميدا راكبي‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫نصرت ميدا مشدودا‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ْل تكلوا الفاكهة وهي فجة‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫غاب أخوك وقد حضر جيع أصدقاءه‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫رجع القائد منصورا‬ ‫‪ix.‬‬ ‫دخل اللص املنزل وأهله َنئمون‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫قطف التاجر العنب َنضجا‬ ‫‪x.‬‬ ‫ِنت الشجار وملا يثمر‬

‫‪86‬‬
Section 3.8.749
َ‫ َتي ز‬/ َ‫َتَيَي ز‬

Definition: It is an ‫كَرة‬ ِ َ‫اِسم ن‬, which removes the ambiguity or vagueness created by the previous
‫ا‬
noun. This ambiguity may be in distance, weight, measure, number, etc.
e.g. ‫ت أَ َح َد َع َشَر َك اوَكبًا‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ I saw eleven stars.
Here, the word (‫ ) َك اوَكبًا‬clarifies what (‫شَر‬
َ ‫ )أَ َح َد َع‬refers to.
Sentence Analysis:

‫كوكباَا‬ َ‫أَحدَعشَر‬ َ‫رأيت‬

‫ََتِاي ز‬ + ‫مَُيَّز‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ + ِ َ‫ ف‬+ ‫فِعل‬

‫اعل‬ ‫ا‬

Notes:
 The ambiguous noun is called ‫ مَُيَّز‬and the noun which clarifies it is called ‫ ََتِاي ز‬or
‫َتَايِاي ز‬.
 The ‫ ََتِاي ز‬is mansoob and gets two fathahs.
 Sometimes, the ‫ مَُيَّ ز‬is not mentioned in words but is understood from the
meaning of the sentence )‫ح اوظ‬
ُ ‫( َم ال‬.
e.g. ‫َح ُس َن الا َولَ ُد َك ََل ًما‬ The boy is good in terms of (his) speech.
 If the ‫ مَُيَّ ز‬is a number, the rules with regards to the usage of numerals (on the
next page) must be kept in mind.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ مَُيَّ ز‬and ‫ ََتِاي ز‬in the following sentences.

i. ‫ف القل عشرون بقرة‬ ‫طاب املكان هواء‬

v.
ii. ‫بعته ذراعا حريرا‬ vi. ‫ْل أملك شَبا أرضا‬
iii. ‫الفيل أكَب من اْلمل جسما‬ vii. ‫شربت رطَل لبنا‬
iv. ‫أطعمت الدجاجة ملء الكف حبا‬ viii. ‫شربت كوب ماء‬

49
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 110-119.

87
Rules for َ‫( أَسَاءََالَعَدَد‬Numerals)

Before we proceed, it should be pointed out that

‫( َع َدد‬number) is the ‫مَُيَّز‬ and ‫( َم اع ُد اود‬the counted noun) is the ‫ََتِاي ز‬.

One and two (1-2)

 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will appear first and the ‫ َع َدد‬will appear second.
 The ‫ َع َدد‬and the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬must correspond in all aspects.
e.g. ‫احد‬ِ ‫ولَد و‬ one boy
َ َ
ِ
‫بِانت َواح َدة‬ one girl
ِ ‫ولَ َد‬,
Note: Normally, for one or two boy, girl, men etc., one would simply say ‫ َولَد‬or ‫ان‬ َ
etc. However, at times, the number is used for emphasis.

Three through Ten (3-10)

 From three onwards, the ‫ َع َدد‬will appear first and the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬second.
 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫َم ُراور‬
‫جَاع َا‬.
 The ‫ َع َدد‬and the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬must be of opposite gender.
e.g. ‫ثَََلثَةُ أَقا ََلم‬ three pens
‫س َسيَّ َارات‬ ُ ‫خَا‬ five cars
Note: In choosing the correct ‫ َع َدد‬gender, the singular form of the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be taken
into account.
e.g. ‫َساب َع لَيَال َوَمثَانِيَةَ أَََّيم‬ seven nights and eight days
Here, the singular ‫( لَاي لَة‬night) of ‫ لَيَال‬is feminine, and ‫( يَ اوم‬day) of ‫ أَََّيم‬is masculine.
 For ten, the masculine form is ‫شر‬
‫ َع ا‬, and the feminine form is ‫ َع َشَرة‬.

Eleven and Twelve (11-12)

From eleven onwards till 99, the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫ص اوب‬ ِ
 ُ ‫ َواحد َمنا‬.
 The ‫ َع َدد‬and the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬must have the same gender.
e.g. ‫ أَ َح َد َع َشَر َك اوَكبًا‬eleven stars
‫ اِثانَ تَا َع اشَرةَ بِان تًا‬twelve girls
 From 11–19, the ‫ ش‬of ‫عشر‬/‫ عشرة‬will get a fathah when used with a masculine and a
sukoon when used with a feminine.50

50
For feminine, the form َ‫ َع َشَرة‬is also used. See W. Wright, Arabic Grammar, (Mineola, NY: Dover
Publications, 2005), Part 1, 256. Also see Sharh ibn ‘Aqil, vol. 4, 71.

88
Thirteen through Nineteen (13-19)
 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫ص اوب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َواحد َمان‬.
 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َع َدد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬.
e.g. ‫ أَاربَ َعةَ َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬fourteen men
‫ تِ اس َع َع اشَرةَ بِان تًا‬nineteen girls
 The “ten” ‫( عشر‬masc.)/‫( عشرة‬fem.) will agree with the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬in terms of gender.

Twenty till Ninety (20, 30, 40,…,90)

 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫ص اوب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َواحد َمان‬.
 ‫ ِع ا‬to ‫( تِ اس ُع او َن‬20,30,40,…90) will remain the same, irrespective of
The gender of ‫ش ُراو َن‬
whether the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ِع اشُراو َن َر ُج ًَل‬ twenty men
‫ثَََلثُ او َن بِان تًا‬ thirty girls

Twenty-one and Twenty-two (21-22)

 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫ص اوب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َواحد َمان‬.
 The first part of the ‫ َع َدد‬and the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬must have the same gender.
e.g. ‫احد َو ِع اشُراو َن َر ُج ًَل‬
ِ‫و‬
َ twenty-one men
ِ
‫إِ اح ٰدى َوع اشُراو َن بِان تًا‬ twenty-one girls
 The same will apply to 31-32, 41-42…91-92.

Twenty-three through Twenty-nine (23-29)

 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫ص اوب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ َواحد َمان‬.
 The gender of the first part of the ‫ َع َدد‬should be opposite of the gender of the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬.
e.g. ‫أَاربَ َعة َو ِع اشُراو َن َر ُج ًَل‬ twenty-four men
‫ِست َو ِع اشُراو َن بِان تًا‬ twenty-six girls
 The same will apply to 33-39, 43-49…93-99.
 The “tens” will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم اع ُدود‬is masculine or
feminine.

89
Hundred (100)
 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫َم ُراور‬ ِ ‫و‬.
‫احد َا‬ َ
 ‫ ِمائَة‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ِمائَةُ َر ُجل‬ hundred men ‫ِمائَةُ بِانت‬ hundred girls
 For 200, ‫ ِمائَتَا‬will be used. (‫ ِمائَ َِت‬in ‫اْلَِر‬ ِ‫ص‬
‫ب َو ا‬ ‫) َحالَةُ النَّ ا‬
e.g. ‫ِمائَتَا بِانت‬ two hundred girls
‫ِمائَ َِت بِانت‬ two hundred girls
 Since ‫ ِمائَة‬is feminine, the number before ‫ ِمائَة‬will be masculine.
e.g. ‫أَاربَ ُع ِمائَِة َر ُجل‬ four hundred men
‫أَاربَ ُع ِمائَِة بِانت‬ four hundred women
 If there are units and tens with the 100’s as well, their respective gender rules will
apply.
e.g. ‫ِمائَة َو َع َشَرةُ ُكتُب‬ hundred and ten books
ً‫اسة‬ ِ
َ ‫مائَة َوخَاس َوأَاربَ ُع او َن ُكَّر‬ hundred and forty-five note-books

Thousand (1,000)
 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫َم ُراور‬ ِ ‫و‬.
‫احد َا‬ َ
 ‫ أَلاف‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ف َر ُجل‬
ُ ‫أَلا‬ thousand men ‫ف بِانت‬
ُ ‫أَلا‬ thousand girls
 Since ‫ أَلاف‬is masculine, the number before ‫ أَلاف‬will be feminine.
ِ ‫أَرب عةُ أَْٰل‬
‫ف َر ُجل‬
e.g. َ َ‫ا‬ four thousand men
‫ف بِانت‬ِ ‫أَرب عةُ أَْٰل‬
َ َ‫ا‬ four thousand women
Note: The plural for ‫ أَلاف‬is ‫ف‬ ِ ‫أَْٰل‬.

Million (1,000,000)
 The ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬will be ‫َم ُراور‬ ِ ‫و‬.
‫احد َا‬ َ
 ‫ ِم اليُ اون‬will remain the same, irrespective of whether the ‫ َم اع ُد اود‬is masculine or feminine.
e.g. ‫ِم اليُ او ُن َر ُجل‬ million men
‫ِم اليُ او ُن بِانت‬ million girls
 Since ‫ ِم اليُ اون‬is masculine, the number before ‫ ِم اليُ اون‬will be feminine.
e.g. ‫ي َر ُجل‬ َ ‫أَاربَ َعةُ َم ََليِ ا‬ four million men
‫ي اِامَرأَة‬
َ ‫أَاربَ َعةُ َم ََليِ ا‬ four million women
Note: The plural for ‫ ِم اليُ اون‬is ‫ي‬ ُ ‫ َم ََليِ ا‬.

90
 EXERCISES
1. Write the following in Arabic.
i. 2 schools vii. 11 books
ii. 12 women viii. 14 chairs
iii. 17 doors ix. 26 boys
iv. 21 cars x. 111 elephants
v. 150 houses xi. 195 keys
vi. 444 miles xii. 3,333 roses

2. Translate the following sentences and fill in the iʻraab.

i. ‫ف البستان تسع وتسعون َنلة‬ v. ‫ف الكتاب أربع وعشرون صفحة‬

ii. ‫مساحة الدار ألفا ذراع‬ vi. ‫ف السنة اثنا عشر شهرا‬
iii. ‫للحجرة ثَلث شبابيك‬ vii. ‫عمر أخيك اآلن خس وثَلثون سنة‬
iv. ‫بع التاجر أربعة عشر قنطارا قطنا‬ viii. ‫بضت الدجاجة ثَلث بيضات‬

91
Section 3.8.851
َ‫مست ث ٰن‬

‫ اِ استِثا نَاء‬means to exclude.

‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬is that noun, which has been excluded and appears after the ‫اْل استِثا نَ ِاء‬
ِ‫ف ا‬ُ ‫ َح ار‬.
ِ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫حر‬.
ُ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن مانه‬is that noun from which the ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬has been excluded. It appears before ‫ف ااْل استثا نَاء‬ ‫َا‬
‫اْل استِثا نَ ِاء‬
ِ‫ف ا‬ ُ ‫ ُحُراو‬are as follows:
‫َما َع َدا‬ ‫َما َخ ََل‬ ‫َع َدا‬ ‫َخ ََل‬ ‫اشا‬
َ ‫َح‬ ‫ِس ٰوى‬ ‫َغاي َر‬ ‫إَِّْل‬
e.g. ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬ The people came except Zayd.
‫زي ادا‬ َ‫إَْل‬ َ‫القوم‬ َ‫جاء‬
‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬+ ‫اْل استِثا نَ ِاء‬
ِ‫ف ا‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬+ ُ‫ُم استَ ثا ٰن ِمانه‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

Related Terminology
ِ ‫مستَ ثا ٰن مت‬
‫َّصل‬ refers to the case when the ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ُا‬ ‫ ُم ا‬was included in the ُ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن مانه‬before the ‫ا استثا نَاء‬.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬ The people came except Zayd.
(Zayd was one of the people before the exclusion.)

‫ُم استَ ثا ٰن ُمان َق ِطع‬ refers to the case when the ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬ ِ
‫ ُم ا‬was not included in the ُ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن مانه‬before the
‫اِ استِثا نَاء‬.
‫يس‬ِ ِ َِّ ِ ٰ
e.g.
َ ‫َس َج َد الا َملئ َكةُ إْل إبال‬ The angels prostrated except Iblees.
(Iblees was never one of the angels.)

‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل ِمحَ ًارا‬ The people came except a donkey.
(Donkey was never included among the people.)

‫ُم استَ ثا ٰن ُم َفَّرغ‬ refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ستَ ثا ٰن ِمانه‬
‫ ُم ا‬is not mentioned.
e.g. ‫َما َجاءَ إَِّْل َمياد‬ No one came except Zayd.

‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن َغاي ُر ُم َفَّرغ‬refers to that sentence in which the ُ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن ِمانه‬is mentioned.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬ The people came except Zayd.

51
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 88-100.

92
‫ َك ََلم ُم او َجب‬/ ‫( َك ََلم ُمثا بَت‬positive statement) refers to that sentence, which does not have a ‫نَ افي‬,
‫ نَ اهي‬or ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬ The people came except Zayd.

‫ َك ََلم َغاي ُر ُم او َجب‬/ ‫( َك ََلم َمان ِفي‬negative sentence) refers to that sentence, which does have a ‫نَ افي‬, ‫نَ اهي‬
or ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬.
e.g. ‫َما َجاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬ The people did not come except Zayd.

The i‘raab of the various types of ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬

‫ ُم ا‬are as given below:

Table 3.8
َ‫إعرابَالمست ث ٰن‬

َ‫حروفَاْلَسَتَثَنَاء‬ Sentence Type َ‫إعرابَالمست ثَ ٰن‬ Example

1. ‫إَِّْل‬ ‫ُمان َق ِطع‬ ‫ص اوب‬ ِ ِ َِّ ِ ٰ
ُ ‫َمان‬ ‫يس‬
َ ‫َس َج َد الا َملئ َكةُ إْل إبال‬
The angels prostrated
except Iblees.
2. ‫إَِّْل‬ ِ َّ‫مت‬
‫صل‬ ‫ُم او َجب‬ ‫ص اوب‬ ‫َجاءَِن الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬
ُ ُ ‫َمان‬
The people came to me
except zayd.
3. ‫إَِّْل‬ ِ َّ‫مت‬
‫صل‬ ‫َغاي ُر ُم او َجب‬ ‫َغاي ُر ُم َفَّرغ‬ ‫ص اوب‬ ‫َما َجاءَِن أَ َحد إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬
ُ ُ ‫ – َمان‬or –
same as ُ‫ستَ ثا ٰن ِمانه‬ ِ ِ
‫َما َجاءَن أَ َحد إَّْل َمياد ُم ا‬
No one came to me
except Zayd.
4. ‫إَِّْل‬ ِ َّ‫مت‬
‫صل‬ ‫َغاي ُر ُم او َجب‬ ‫ُم َفَّرغ‬ according to the ‫َما َجاءَ إَِّْل َمياد‬
ُ
‫ َع ِامل‬governing No one came except
ِ
ُ‫( ُم استَ ثا ٰن مناه‬as if ‫إَِّْل‬
Zayd.
does not exist) ‫ت إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬
ُ ‫َما َرأَيا‬
I did not see anyone
except Zayd.
‫ت إَِّْل بَِزياد‬
ُ ‫َما َمَرار‬
I did not pass by
anyone except Zayd.
5. – ‫ما خ ََل‬ ‫ص اوب‬
ُ ‫َمان‬ ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم َما َخ ََل َميا ًدا‬
All types
َ َ
‫َما َع َدا‬ ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم َما َع َدا َميا ًدا‬
The people came
except Zayd.

93
 Table 3.8 – Continued

َ‫حروفَاْلَسَتَثَنَاء‬ Sentence Type َ‫إعرابَالمست ثَ ٰن‬ Example

6. ‫خ ََل – ع َدا‬ ‫ص اوب‬ ُ ‫ – َمان‬or – ‫اشا َميا ًدا‬
َ ‫ح‬/‫ا‬
َ ‫ع َد‬/
َ ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم َخ ََل‬
All types
َ َ
‫اشا‬
َ ‫– َح‬ ‫( َاَمُراور‬as a ‫اشا َمياد‬ َ ‫ح‬/‫ا‬
َ ‫ع َد‬/
َ ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم َخ ََل‬
preposition) The people came except
Zayd.
7. ‫َغي – ِس ٰوى‬ All types ‫َاَمُراور‬ ‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم َغاي َر َمياد‬
‫ا‬
‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم ِس ٰوى َمياد‬
The people came except
Zayd.

Note: The i‘raab of the word ‫ َغ اي‬is the same as that of ‫ستَ ثا ٰن ب إَِّْل‬
‫ ُم ا‬. Thus, the simple way to
determine the i‘raab of ‫ َغ اي‬is to replace ‫ َغ اي‬with ‫إَِّْل‬. Now, whatever i‘raab ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬
‫ ُم ا‬was supposed
to get, should be given to ‫ َغ اي‬.
For example, we have two sentences, 1) ‫جاءَ الا َق اوُم َغ اي َمياد‬
َ and 2) ‫ َما َجاءَ َغ اي َمياد‬.
To determine the i‘raab of ‫ َغ اي‬, follow the following two steps for each of these
sentences.
a. Replace ‫ غي‬with ‫ إَِّْل‬and see what the i‘raab of the ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬
‫ ُم ا‬would be.
1) ‫جاءَ الا َق اوُم إَِّْل َميا ًدا‬
َ 2) ‫جاءَ إَِّْل َمياد‬
َ ‫َما‬
The first sentence is ‫جب‬ َ ‫ ُم او‬, so the ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬will be mansoob. The second sentence
is ‫جب‬
َ ‫ َغاي ُر ُم او‬and ‫ ُم َفَّرغ‬, so the ‫ ُم استَ ثا ٰن‬is according to the ‘aamil. Thus, it will be
marfoo‘.
ِ
‫( ُم ا‬with ‫ )إَّْل‬will be given to ‫ َغ اي‬.
b. The i‘raab of the ‫ستَ ثا ٰن‬
1) ‫جاءَ الا َق اوُم َغاي َر َمياد‬
َ 2) ‫جاءَ َغاي ُر َمياد‬
َ ‫َما‬

EXERCISES
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the i‘raab of the mustathnaa.

i. ‫رأيت اْلنود إْل القائد‬ v. ‫دخلت غرف البيت خَل غرفة النوم‬
ii. ‫صام الغَلم رمضان غي يوم‬ vi. ‫ما عاد املريض عائد غي الطبيب‬
iii. ‫مرت مساجد املدينة ما خَل واحدا‬ vii. ‫قرأت الكتاب إْل صفحتي‬
iv. ‫جاء القوم إْل محارا‬ viii. ‫ما جاء إْل معلم‬

94
Section 3.952
َ‫ – الَمَجَ َرَوَرات‬Words Which Are Always Majroor
There are two types of words that are always majroor. These are as follows:
1. Noun preceded by a ‫جر‬ َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬.
e.g. ِ َ‫ِف الاكِت‬
‫اب‬ in the book
2. ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ُم‬
‫اب َمياد‬ ِ
e.g. ُ َ‫كت‬ book of Zayd

52
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 76-81.

95
Section 3.10
َ‫اَلتَ َوابَع‬

Definition: A ‫ ََتبِع‬is that noun, which follows the noun before it in terms of i‘raab (and some
other things which vary from ‫ ََتبِع‬to ‫) ََتبِع‬. The preceding noun is called the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬.
 ِ ‫ ع‬which governs the ‫ مات ب وع‬also governs the ‫ ََتبِع‬.
The ‫امل‬ َ ‫َ ُا‬
 There are five ‫تَ َوابِ ُع‬:
ِ َ‫ا‬/‫اَلنَّعت‬
1) ُ‫لص َفة‬ ُ ‫ا‬ 2) ‫َّوكِاي ُد‬ ِ
‫اَلت ا‬/‫اَلتَّأاكاي ُد‬ 3) ‫اَلابَ َد ُل‬
4) ‫س ِق‬ ِ ‫اَلاعطا‬ ِ ‫عطاف الاب ي‬
َ َّ‫ف الن‬
ُ ‫عطا‬/
َ ‫ف بَارف‬
ُ َ 5) ‫ان‬ََ ُ َ

Section 3.10.153
َ‫ – الن عتََأَوََالصفة‬Adjective54
ِ َ‫ا‬/‫ اَلنَّعت‬is of two types:
ُ‫لص َفة‬ ُ ‫ا‬ 1) ‫ح ِقاي ِقي‬
َ ‫ نَ اعت‬2) ‫نَ اعت َسبَِب‬
1. ‫ح ِقاي ِقي‬
َ ‫نَ اعت‬: It is that word, which describes the actual ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬.
 As mentioned in section 1.4.3, the ‫ نَ اعت‬follows the ‫ َمان ُع اوت‬, which is the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬in this
case, in the following:
a. I‘raab b. Gender
c. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah d. Being singular, dual or plural
 ِ َ‫ن‬.
The ‫ نَ اعت‬can be a complete sentence, in which case the ‫ َمان ُع اوت‬must be ‫كَرة‬
The ‫نَ اعت‬, which is a sentence must have a ‫ض ِماي ر‬ ِ
 َ which refers to the ‫نَكَرة َمان ُع اوت‬.
َ‫اجة‬
َ ‫َّر‬
َّ ‫ب الد‬ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫ن َولَد يَارَك‬ ‫َجاءَ ا‬ A boy who was riding the bicycle came to me.

َ‫الدراجة‬ َ‫ي ركب‬ َ‫ولد‬ َ‫ن‬ َ‫جاء‬

‫ َم افعُ اول بِِه‬+ )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ فَاعل‬+ ‫ف اعل‬

‫نَ اعت‬ + ‫نَ ِكَرة َمان ُع اوت‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫ م افعول‬+ ‫فِعل‬
‫َ ُا‬ ‫ا‬

53
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 134-142.
54
‫ نَ اعت‬is another name for ‫ ; ِص َفة‬and ‫ َمان ُع اوت‬is another name for ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫ َم او‬.

96
 Note:
 If a ‫ َم اع ِرفَة‬is followed by a sentence, it will be a ‫خبَ ر‬
َ or ‫ َحال‬.
Example 1 َ‫اجة‬ َّ ‫ب‬
َ ‫الد َّر‬ ُ ‫اَلا َولَ ُد يَارَك‬ The boy is riding the bicycle.
Here, (‫ )اَلا َولَ ُد‬is ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬, and (َ‫اجة‬ َّ ‫ب‬
َ ‫الد َّر‬ ُ ‫ )يَارَك‬is the ‫ َخبَر‬.
َ‫اجة‬ َّ ‫ب‬
َ ‫الد َّر‬ ِ
Example 2 ُ ‫َجاءَن الا َولَ ُد يَارَك‬
The boy came to me while riding the bicycle.
ِ ‫ال‬
Here, (‫ )اَلا َولَ ُد‬is ‫ال‬ َّ ‫ب‬
َ‫ذُو ا‬, and (َ‫اجة‬
َ ‫الد َّر‬ ُ ‫ )يَارَك‬is the ‫ َحال‬.
Sentence Analysis
1. ‫جل َع ِاَل‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ َر‬ A learned man came.
َ‫ع‬
‫ال‬ ‫رج َل‬ َ‫جاء‬
)‫ نَ اعت ( ََتبِع‬+ )‫َمان ُع اوت ( َمات بُ اوع‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

2. ‫جل أَبُ اوهُ َع ِاَل‬

ُ ‫َجاءَ َر‬ A man whose father is learned, came.

َ‫عال‬ َ‫أب وه‬ َ‫رجل‬ َ‫جاء‬

| )‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ضاف َوُم‬ َ ‫(م‬
ُ
)‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة (نَكَِرة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدا‬

)‫نَ اعت ( ََتبِع‬ + )‫َمان ُع اوت ( َمات بُ اوع‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

2. ‫سبَِب‬
َ ‫نَ اعت‬: It is that word, which does not describe the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬, but describes that which is
connected to the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬.
ِ ِ
e.g. ُ‫ن َولَد َعاَل أَبُ اوه‬
‫ َجاءَ ا‬A boy whose father is learned, came to me.
Here, ‫ َع ِاَل‬is describing ُ‫أَبُ اوه‬, which is connected to the ‫) َولَد( َمات بُ اوع‬. In
other words, it is describing the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬indirectly.

Notes:
1. In ‫سبَِب‬
َ ‫نَ اعت‬, the ‫ َمان ُع اوت‬and ‫ نَ اعت‬must correspond in only two aspects:
a. I‘raab
b. Being ma‘rifah or nakirah

97
 2. The ‫ نَ اعت‬will always be singular, irrespective of whether the ‫ َمان ُع اوت‬is singular, dual
or plural.
َِ ‫اَت ِن صورََت ِن‬
‫جايل إِطَ َار ُاهَا‬
e.g. َ ‫َه َ ُ ا‬ These are two pictures whose frames are beautiful.

3. The ‫ نَ اعت‬will correspond in gender to the word after it.

e.g. ‫السيِ َدةُ الا َعاقِ ُل َولَ ُد َها‬
َّ ‫ت‬ِ ‫جاء‬
ََ The lady, whose son is intelligent, came.

Sentence Analysis:

1. ‫ت اِ امَرأَة َع ِاَل اِبانُ َها‬

‫َجاءَ ا‬ A woman whose son is learned, came.
‫اب ن ها‬ َ‫عال‬ َ‫امرأة‬ َ‫جاءت‬
)‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬
َ ‫ضاف َوُم‬
َ ‫(م‬
ُ |
‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬
‫اعل‬ ِ ‫اِسم الا َف‬
+ ‫اع ِل‬
ُ‫ا‬

)‫نَ اعت ( ََتبِع‬ + )‫َمان ُع اوت ( َمات بُ اوع‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬
Note: In this example, ‫ َع ِاَل‬is the ‫سبَِب‬ ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ نَ اعت‬of ‫ا امَرأَة‬. Because of ‫ا امَرأَة‬, it is marfoo‘ and ‫نَكَرة‬.
However, it follows ‫اِبانُ َها‬, or more precisely ‫اِبا ُن‬, in being masculine.55

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ح ِقاي ِقي‬
َ ‫ نَ اعت‬and the ‫ نَ اعت َسبَِب‬in the following
sentences.

i. ‫ركبت الصان اْلميل سرجه‬ v. ‫أوقدت مصباحا نوره قوي‬

ii. ‫هو رجل عاملة ابنته‬ vi. ‫هذا عمل ينفع‬
iii. ‫هؤْلء بنات عاقَلت‬ vii. ‫هذا منزل ضيق‬
iv. ‫شاهدَن قطارا سيه سريع‬ viii. ‫جاء الرجل املهذب أخوه‬

55
There seems to be a contradiction between the sentence analysis and the note given above for ‫نَ اعت َسبَِب‬. All
the books of Nahw that we referred to, including ‘Ilm al-Nahw, al-Nahw al-Wadih, and Sharh ibn ‘Aqil, agree
that in this example, only ‫ َع ِاَل‬is the ‫نَ اعت َسبَِب‬. Yet, in ‘Ilm al-Nahw, the author, Mawlana Charthawali, after
explaining the rules for ‫سبَِب‬ ِِ
َ ‫نَ اعت‬, has given this example of sentence analysis, in which he makes ‫ َعاَل ابانُ َها‬the ‫نَ اعت‬
of ‫اِ امرأَة‬. This suggests that there can be two ways of looking at this.
َ

98
2. Analyze the following sentences and and point out the difference between them.

i. ‫هذا الولد ضاحك‬ iii. ‫جاء الولد ضاحكا‬

ii. ‫هذا ولد ضاحك‬

99
Section 3.10.256
َ‫َاَلتَأَكَيَد‬/ َ‫ – الت وكيد‬Emphasis

Definition: It is that ‫ ََتبِع‬, which gives emphasis to the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬in the matter related to it or
emphasizes the inclusion of all members of the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬in the matter related to it.
‫ن َمياد َمياد‬ ِ
e.g. ‫َجاءَ ا‬ (The second ‘Zayd’ emphasized Zayd’s coming.)
‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم ُكل ُه ام‬ (‫ ُكل ُه ام‬emphasized that all came, no one remained.)
 The ‫ ََتبِع‬is called ‫ َتاكِايد‬and the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬is called ‫ ُم َؤَّكد‬.

There are two types of ‫ َتاكِايد‬: ‫ لَ اف ِظي‬and ‫َم اعنَ ِوي‬

1. ‫َّوكِاي ُد اللَّ اف ِظي‬
‫ – اَلت ا‬Verbal Emphasis: The emphasis is attained by repeating the ‫ ُم َؤَّكد‬, which may
be ‫اِ اسم‬, ‫فِ اعل‬, ‫ح ارف‬ ِ , or sentence.
َ , ‫ضماي ر‬
َ
e.g. ‫َجاءَ َمياد َمياد‬ Zayd definitely came.
‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ضَر الاغَائ‬ َ ‫ضَر َح‬ َ ‫َح‬ The absent one definitely became present.
‫َخ او ُن الا َع اه َد‬
ُ ‫َْل َْل أ‬ I will definitely not break the pledge.
َ‫ت النَّافِ َذة‬ ِ
َ ‫افا تَ اح أَنا‬ You open the window.
‫ت الا َملُ اوُم‬َ ‫ت الا َملُ اوُم أَنا‬
َ ‫أَنا‬ You are, indeed, the censured one.

2. ‫َّوكِاي ُد الا َم اعنَ ِوى‬

‫ – اَلت ا‬Emphasis Through Meaning: The emphasis is attained with any of the
following words:
‫نَ افس‬ ‫َع اي‬ ‫كِ ََل‬ ‫كِالتَا‬ ‫ُكل‬ ‫َجَ ُع‬
‫أا‬ ‫أَ اكتَ ُع‬ ‫ص ُع‬
َ ‫أَبا‬ ‫أَباتَ ُع‬
Below, we discuss each of these.

a. ‫ نَ افس‬،‫( َع اي‬himself, herself, itself)

 These are used for singular, dual and plural.
They have to be ‫ضاف‬ ِ .
 َ ‫ ُم‬to a ‫ضماي ر‬
َ
 Their ‫ض ِماي ر‬
َ must agree with the ‫ ُم َؤَّكد‬in terms of gender and singularity (or
duality/plurality), while the form )‫صاي غَة‬ ِ ( should agree with the ‫ م َؤَّكد‬in terms of
ُ
ِ(
singularity (or duality/plurality). The exception is that the plural form )‫صاي غَة‬
of ‫ نَ افس‬and ‫ َع اي‬is used in place of the dual form.

e.g. ُ‫عاي نُه‬/

َ ُ‫قَ َام َمياد نَ اف ُسه‬ Zayd himself stood.
‫أ اَعيُنُ ُه َما‬/‫الزيا َد ِان أَنا ُف ُس ُه َما‬
َّ ‫قَ َام‬ The two Zayds themselves stood.
‫أ اَعيُنُ ُه ام‬/‫الزيا ُد او َن أَنا ُف ُس ُه ام‬
َّ ‫قَ َام‬ The (many) Zayds themselves stood.

56
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 143-152

100
 ‫نَ اف ُس َها‬/‫ت الا ُم َعلِ َمةُ َعاي نُ َها‬ ِ ‫جاء‬
ََ The female teacher herself came.
ِ ِ
‫أَنا ُف ُس ُه َما‬/‫ت الا ُم َعل َمتَان أ اَعيُنُ ُه َما‬ ِ ‫جاء‬
ََ The two female teachers themselves came.
‫أَنا ُف ُس ُه َّن‬/‫ات أ اَعيُنُ ُه َّن‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫َجاءَت الا ُم َعل َم‬ The (many) female teachers themselves
came.

b. ‫ كِ ََل‬،‫( كِالتَا‬both)
 These are used for dual only.
 ‫ كِ ََل‬is masculine and ‫ كِالتَا‬is feminine.
It must be ‫ضاف‬ ِ .
 َ ‫ ُم‬to a dual ‫ضماي ر‬
َ
e.g. ‫الر ُج ََل ِن كِ ََل ُهَا‬
َّ ‫قَ َام‬ Both of the men stood up.
‫اهَا‬ ِ َ‫ت الامعلِمت‬
ُ َ‫ان كِلات‬ ِ
َ َ ُ ‫قَ َام‬ Both of the female teachers stood up.

c. ‫ ُكل‬،‫َجَ ُع‬ َِ (all)

‫ أ ا‬،‫جايع‬
 They are used for singular and plural.
 َِ should be ‫ مضاف‬to a ‫ض ِمي ر‬, which must correspond to the ‫م َؤَّكد‬.
‫ ُكل‬and ‫جايع‬ َُ ‫َ ا‬ ُ
 ‫ أ ا‬is used with its form )‫ ( ِصاي غَة‬changing to correspond to the ‫ ُم َؤَّكد‬.
‫َجَ ُع‬
e.g. ُ‫اب ُكلَّه‬ ِ
َ َ‫ات الاكت‬ ُ ‫قَ َرأ‬ I read the whole book.
‫ال ُكل ُه ام‬ ُ ‫َجاءَ الا ِر َج‬ All the men came.
‫جاي ُع ُه ام‬َِ ‫ال‬ُ ‫َجاءَ الا ِر َج‬ All the men came.
‫َجَ ُع او َن‬
‫َّاس أ ا‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ الن‬ All the people came.
َِ and ‫َجع‬
Note: ‫ ُكل‬, ‫جايع‬ ُ َ ‫ أ ا‬can only be used for emphasis in those things, which have
parts or can be divided. Thus, ُ‫ت َميا ًدا ُكلَّه‬ ُ ‫( أَ اكَرام‬I treated all of Zayd
hospitably) would be incorrect.

d. ‫ أَ اكتَ ُع‬،‫ص ُع‬

َ ‫ أَبا‬،‫أَباتَ ُع‬
 These are used for greater emphasis.
 They appear after ‫َجَ ُع‬
‫أ ا‬. They are not used without ‫َجَ ُع‬
‫ أ ا‬nor can they appear
before ‫َجَ ُع‬
‫أ ا‬.
e.g. ‫ص ُع او َن‬
َ ‫أَبا‬/‫أَباتَ ُع او َن‬/‫َجَ ُع او َن أَ اكتَ ُع او َن‬
‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم أ ا‬ All of the people came.
‫ص ُع‬ ِ ِ
َ ُ‫ب‬/‫بُتَ ُع‬/‫قَ َامت الن َساءُ ُجَ ُع ُكتَ ُع‬ All of the women stood up.

101
‫‪Sentence Analysis‬‬

‫َجَ ُع او َن‬
‫َجاءَ الا َق اوُم ُكل ُه ام أ ا‬ ‫‪All the people came.‬‬

‫أجعونَ‬ ‫كليهمَ‬ ‫القومَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫|‬ ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه)‬‫ضاف َوُم َ‬ ‫(م َ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫|‬
‫‪ +‬اَلتَّأاكِاي ُد ‪2‬‬ ‫ِ‬
‫اَلتَّأاكاي ُد ‪1‬‬ ‫ُم َؤَّكد‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫فَ ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫فِ اعل‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫قابلت الومير نفسه‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫رأيت التمساح التمساح‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫ذبنا الكبشي كليهما‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫قطعنا حنن أنفسنا الطريق كله‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫سجد امللئكة كلهم أجعون إْل ابليس‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫امللك كله لل‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫إَيك إَيك النميمة‬ ‫‪ix.‬‬ ‫غربت غربت الشمس‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫عاد القائد عينه‬ ‫‪x.‬‬ ‫حذار حذار من الهال‬

‫‪102‬‬
Section 3.10.357
َ‫ – اَلَبَدَل‬Substitute
Definition: A ‫ بَ َدل‬is that ‫ ََتبِع‬, which is actually intended in the sentence and not its ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬. The
‫ َمات بُ اوع‬merely serves as an introduction to the ‫ ََتبِع‬.
 The ‫ ََتبِع‬is called ‫( بَ َدل‬substitute) and the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬is called ُ‫ ُماب َدل ِمانه‬or ُ‫( ُمبَ َّدل ِمانه‬the
substituted).
e.g. ‫َخ او َك‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ َمياد أ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

‫أخو َك‬ َ‫زيد‬ َ‫جاء‬

)‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬ َ ‫ضاف َوُم‬
َ ‫(م‬
ُ |
‫بَ َدل‬ + ‫مب َدل ِمانه‬
ُ ‫ُا‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

There are four types of ‫بَ َدل‬:

1) ‫بَ َد ُل ُكل ِم ان ُكل‬ 2) ‫بَ َد ُل بَ اعض ِم ان ُكل‬ ِ ‫اْل اشتِم‬
3) ‫ال‬ ِ
َ ‫بَ َد ُل ا‬
ِ َ‫ب َد ُل الاغَل‬
4) ‫ط‬ َ
1. ‫( بَ َد ُل ُكل ِم ان ُكل‬also called ‫ك ِل‬
ُ ‫)بَ َد ُل الا‬: It is that ‫بَ َدل‬, which refers to the exact same thing as
the ُ‫ ُماب َدل ِمانه‬.
e.g. ‫َخ او َك‬
ُ ‫َجاءَ َمياد أ‬ Zayd, your brother, came.

2. ‫( بَ َد ُل بَ اعض ِم ان ُكل‬also called ‫ض‬

ِ ‫)بَ َد ُل الابَ اع‬: It is that ‫بَ َدل‬, which refers to a part of the ُ‫ ُماب َدل ِمانه‬.
The ‫ بَ َدل‬must have a ‫ض ِماي ر‬ ِ
 َ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُماب َدل مانه‬.
e.g. ُ‫اسه‬
َ ‫ت َميا ًدا َرأ‬
ُ ‫ضَربا‬
َ I hit Zayd’s head.
ِ ‫اْل اشتِم‬
3. ‫ال‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫بَ َد ُل ا‬: It is that ‫بَ َدل‬, which is related to the ُ‫ ُماب َدل مانه‬, but is not part of it.
The ‫ بَ َدل‬must have a ‫ض ِماي ر‬ ِ
 َ , which refers to the ُ‫ ُماب َدل مناه‬.
ِ
e.g. ُ ‫ُس ِر َق َمياد قَماي‬
ُ‫صه‬ Zayd’s shirt was stolen.
ِ َ‫ب َد ُل الاغَل‬: It is that ‫ب َدل‬, which is mentioned after an error, as a correction.
4. ‫ط‬ َ َ
ِ
‫ت فَ َر ًسا محَ ًارا‬ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫ ا اشتَ َريا‬I bought a horse; no, a donkey.

57
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 163-167.

103
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫قضيت الدين ثلثه‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫قدم المي الومير‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫سرن اْلادم أمانته‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫عاملت التاجر ميدا‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ذهب السياح أكثرهم إٰل الوادي‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫َتزق الكتاب غَلفه‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫سطع القمر نوره‬ ‫‪ix.‬‬ ‫أغلقت عائشة البستان ببه‬
‫‪v.‬‬ ‫سرتنا الشوارع نظافتها‬ ‫‪x.‬‬ ‫كان أبو حامد الغزال َمددا‬

‫‪104‬‬
Section 3.10.4
َ‫عَطَفََالنَسَق‬/َ‫ – الَعَطَفََبَرَف‬Conjunction

Definition: It is that ‫ ََتبِع‬, which appears after a ‫ف َعطاف‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬. The ‫ف َعطاف‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬appears between the
‫ ََتبِع‬and the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬. The meaning of the ‫ َع ِامل‬applicable to the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬is also applicable to the ‫ ََتبِع‬.
 The ‫ ََتبِع‬is called ‫ َم اعطُاوف‬and the ‫ َمات بُ اوع‬is called ‫ َم اعطُاوف َعلَاي ِه‬.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ َمياد َو َع امرو‬ Zayd and ‘Amr came.

‫عمرو‬ َ‫و‬ َ‫زيد‬ َ‫جاء‬

ُ ‫ َح ار‬+ ‫َم اعطُاوف َعلَاي ِه‬
‫ َم اعطُاوف‬+ ‫ف َعطاف‬

‫= جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ اَِبيَّة‬ ِ َ‫ف‬

‫اعل‬ + ‫فِ اعل‬

َ‫حروفَالعطف‬:
The various ‫ف َعطاف‬
ُ ‫ ُحُراو‬are as follows:
‫َو‬ ‫ف‬
َ َّ‫ُث‬ ‫َح ِٰت‬ ‫إِ َّما‬ ‫أَاو‬ ‫أَ ام‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫بَ ال‬ ‫ٰل ِك ان‬
Their details are as follows:

َ‫( و‬and): This is without regard to sequence.

e.g. ‫َجاءَ َمياد َوبَكار‬ Zayd and Bakr came.
Here, sequence is not considered.

َ‫( ف‬then, thus):

 It shows sequence.
e.g. ‫َجاءَ َمياد فَبَكار‬ Zayd came. Then, Bakr (came).

 It can also show cause )‫سبَب‬

َ (.
ِ َّ ‫أَنازَل ِمن‬
e.g. ً‫ضَّرة‬ ُ ‫صبِ ُح اال اَر‬
َ ‫ض ُمُا‬ ‫الس َماء َماءً فَتُ ا‬ َ َ
He sends down water from the sky. Therefore, the earth becomes
green.

َ‫( ث‬then): It shows sequence with delay.

e.g. ‫ َجاءَ َمياد ُثَّ بَكار‬Zayd came. Then, (after some time) Bakr (came).
َ‫( ح ِٰت‬upto, till, even): It shows the end point (‫) َغايَة‬.
ِٰ
e.g. ُ‫ات الا ُق ارآ َن َح ِٰت أخَره‬
ُ ‫قَ َرأ‬ I read the Qur’an until the end.
ُ‫اج َح ِٰت الا ُم َشاة‬ ‫قَ ِد َم ا‬
ُ ‫الُ َّج‬ The pilgrims came, even those on foot.

105
 ‫( إما‬either…or):
e.g. ‫اَلث ََّمُر إِ َّما ُح الو َوإِ َّما ُمر‬ The fruit is either sweet or bitter.

َ‫( أو‬or):
e.g. َ ‫لَبِثانَا يَ اوًما أ اَو بَ اع‬
‫ض يَ اوم‬ We stayed for a day or a part of a day.

َ‫( أم‬or): It is generally used with an interrogative )‫(اِ استِ اف َهام‬.

e.g. ‫أ ََمياد ِعان َد َك اَام بَكار‬ Is Zayd with you or Bakr?

َ‫( ْل‬not): This negates from the ‫ َم اعطُاوف‬that which has been established for the ‫ َم اعطُاوف َعلَاي ِه‬.
‫ن َمياد َْل بَكار‬ ِ
e.g. ‫َجاءَ ا‬ Zayd came to me and not Bakr.

‫ إِ ا‬i.e. to give up one notion for another.

َ‫( بل‬but, instead, rather): It is used for ‫ضَراب‬
 If it appears after a positive sentence (‫ )إِ اْيَاب‬or a command (‫)أ اَمر‬, it negates the
ruling for that which is before it, and affirms it for that which is after it.
e.g. ‫ن َمياد بَ ال بَكار‬ ِ
‫َجاءَ ا‬ Zayd came to me. Rather, Bakr (came).

 If it appears after a (‫ )نَ افي‬or a (‫)نَ اهي‬, it confirms this ruling (of negation) for the one
before it, and affirms its opposite (i.e. opposite of negation) for the one after it.
ِ ‫ ما قَرأا‬I did not read the whole book; rather, [I read]
e.g. َ ‫اب ُكلَّهُ بَ ال بَ اع‬
ُ‫ضه‬ َ َ‫ت الاكت‬
ُ َ َ
some of it.

َ‫( َٰلكن‬but, however): It is generally used with a ‫ نَ افي‬and serves the purpose of ‫ اِ استِ اد َراك‬i.e. to
rectify.
ِٰ ِ
e.g. َ‫ن َمياد لك ان بَكار َجاء‬
‫َما َجاءَ ا‬ Zayd did not come to me but Bakr came.

Notes:
1. If the ‫ َم اعطُاوف َعلَاي ِه‬is a ‫صل‬
ِ َّ‫ض ِمي ر مرفُوع مت‬, then its ‫صل‬
ُ ‫َ ا َا ا‬
ِ ‫ ض ِمي ر مان َف‬has to be mentioned after it.
ُ ‫َ ا‬
e.g. ‫ت أ َََن َوَمياد‬
ُ ‫ضَربا‬
َ Zayd and I hit.

2. However, if after the ‫صل‬ ِ َّ‫ض ِمي ر مرفُوع مت‬, another word appears before the ‫معطُوف‬, then the
ُ ‫َ ا َا ا‬ ‫َا ا‬
ِ ِ
‫ضماي ر ُمان َفصل‬َ need not be brought.
e.g. ‫ت الايَ اوَم َوَمياد‬ ُ ‫ضَربا‬ َ Zayd and I hit, today.
‫َما أَ اشَراكنَا َوَْل أٰ َبءُ ََن‬ Neither us nor our forefathers associated partners.
3. If the ‫ َم اعطُاوف َعلَاي ِه‬is a ‫ض ِماي ر‬ َ preceded by a ‫ف َجر‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬, then the ‫ َم اعطُاوف‬should also be preceded by
the same ‫جر‬ َ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬.
e.g. ‫ك َوبَِزياد‬ َ ِ‫ت ب‬ ُ ‫َمَرار‬ I passed by you and Zayd.

106
 ‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫ف َعطاف ‪1. Fill in a suitable‬‬

‫‪َ , translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬ح ار ُ‬
‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أتفاحا أكلت _____ عنبا؟‬ ‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫بع عقاره _____ منزله‬
‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫قدمت إليه الطعام _______ ما أكله‬ ‫‪v.‬‬ ‫صلى المام _____ املأموم‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫ما قابلته _____ قابلت وكيله‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫أأنت فعلت هذا _____ مبي؟‬

‫‪107‬‬
‫‪Section 3.10.5‬‬
‫عَطَفََالَبَيَانَ‬

‫‪َ .‬مات بُ اوع ‪ََ , which clarifies or specifies its‬تبِع ‪Definition: It is that‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Often, it is a more famous name of two names.‬‬
‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫قَ َام أَبُو َح افص ُع َمُر‬ ‫‪Abu Hafs ‘Umar stood up.‬‬

‫عمرَ‬ ‫أبوَحفصَ‬ ‫قامَ‬

‫|‬ ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه)‬ ‫ضاف َوُم َ‬ ‫(م َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪ََ +‬تبِع (بَيَان)‬ ‫(مبَ َّي)‬
‫َمات بُ اوع ُ‬

‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫=‬ ‫فَ ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫فِ اعل ‪+‬‬

‫‪Example:‬‬ ‫َجاءَ َمياد أَبُو َع امرو‬ ‫‪Abu ‘Amr Zayd came.‬‬

‫أبوَعمرو‬ ‫زيدَ‬ ‫جاءَ‬

‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه)‬‫ضاف َوُم َ‬ ‫(م َ‬
‫ُ‬ ‫|‬
‫ََتبِع (بَيَان)‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫(مبَ َّي)‬
‫َمات بُ اوع ُ‬

‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫=‬ ‫فَ ِ‬

‫اعل‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫فِ اعل‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬‬
‫قام علي مين العابدين ‪i.‬‬ ‫جعل هللا الكعبة البيت الرام قياما للناس ‪ii.‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
 CHAPTER 4
َ‫ – الَعَ َوامَل‬Governing Words

ِ ‫ ع‬is a word that governs/causes i‘raab changes in another word.

Definition: An ‫امل‬ َ
There are two types of ‫ل‬ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ َع َوام‬: 1) ‫ َم اعنَوي‬2) ‫لَ افظي‬
ِ ‫ع‬: It is that ‫ع ِامل‬, which is not in word form i.e. it is abstract.
1. ‫امل َم اعنَ ِوي‬ َ َ
There are two types of ‫امل َم اعنَ ِوي‬ ِ ‫ع‬.
َ
ِِ ِ ِ
i. ُ‫اَاْلبات َداء‬: It means that being free of a ‫ َعامل لَ افظي‬gives ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬a ‫ َرفاع‬.
e.g. ‫َمياد قَائِم‬ Zayd is standing.
Here, ‫ َمياد‬is the ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬, which is ‫ َم ارفُ اوع‬because of ‫اِباتِ َداء‬. ‫ قَائِم‬is the ‫خبَ ر‬ َ and it is also ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬
because of ‫اِباتِ َداء‬.
In the case of ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ ُ ‫ َح ار‬gives ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
ii. َ ‫ف اعل ُم‬, being free of a ‫صب‬
‫ف نَ ا‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬or ‫ف َج ازم‬ َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬a ‫ َرفاع‬.
e.g. ‫يَ اع َم ُل َمياد‬ Zayd is working.
Here ‫ل‬ ُ ‫ يَ اع َم‬is ‫ َم ارفُ اوع‬because it is free of any ‫صب‬ ‫ف نَ ا‬ُ ‫ َح ار‬or ‫ف َج ازم‬ ُ ‫ َح ار‬.

2. ‫امل لَ اف ِظي‬
ِ ‫ع‬: It is that ‫ع ِامل‬, which is in word form.
َ َ
There are three types of ‫امل لَ اف ِظي‬
ِ ‫ع‬.
َ
i. ‫ف‬
ُ ‫اَ الُُراو‬
ii. ‫ال‬
ُ ‫اَالَفا َع‬
iii. ُ‫َسَاء‬
‫اَال ا‬

109
Section 4.1
َ‫ – اَلَ َرَوفََالَعَامَلَة‬Governing Particles

A. Particles, Which Govern Nouns

1. ُ‫ارة‬
َّ َ‫اْل‬
‫ف ا‬ ُ ‫اَ الُُراو‬ refer to section 1.7
2. ‫شبَّ َهةُ ِبلا ِف اع ِل‬
َ ‫ف الا ُم‬
ُ ‫اَ الُُراو‬ refer to section 1.8
ِ َ‫ما وَْل اَلام َشبَّهت‬
3. ‫ان بِ لَايس‬
َ َ ُ َ َ refer to section 3.7.3
4. ِ‫واو الامعِيَّة‬ refer to section 3.8.4
َ َُ
ِ‫اْلستِث ناء‬
5. َ ‫ف اِ ا ا‬ ُ ‫ُحُراو‬ refer to section 3.8.8
6. ‫ف النِ َدا ِء‬
ُ ‫ُحُراو‬ refer to section 3.8.1
7. ‫س‬ ِ ‫اْلِان‬‫َْل الَِِّت لِنَ اف ِي ا‬ refer to section 3.7.4

B. Particles, Which Govern َ‫َع‬

‫فَعَلََمَضَار‬
1. ِ َّ‫ف الن‬
ُ‫اصبَة‬ ُ ‫اَ الُُراو‬
2. ُ‫اْلَا ِمَمة‬
‫ف ا‬ ُ ‫اَ الُُراو‬

110
Section 4.1.158
َ‫ – اَلَرَوَفََالنَاصَبَة‬Particles That Give Nasb

These are as follows: ‫لَ ان‬ ‫أَ ان‬

‫َك اي‬ ‫إِذَ ان‬
These appear before ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a fathah if it is not a ‫ نُ اون‬of ‫ تَثانِيَة‬or ‫جَاع‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫ نُ اون‬of ‫ تَثانِيَة‬or ‫جَاع‬, it is dropped. The exception is the ‫ نُ اون‬of the
two ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث‬.

Table 4.1
َ‫اَلََرَوفََالنَاصَبَة‬
َ‫حََرفََنَصَب‬ Meaning Example
‫أَ ان‬ that, to َ‫أُ ِريا ُد أَ ان أَ اد ُخ َل ا اْلَنَّة‬ I want to enter Paradise.
‫لَ ان‬ will not, never ‫لَ ان يَ اد ُخ َل الا َكافُِر ا‬
َ‫اْلَنَّة‬ The disbeliever will never enter Paradise.
‫َك اي‬ ‫ت َك اي أَ اس َِتيا َح‬ ِ
so that ُ ‫جائ‬ I came so I could rest.
‫إِذَ ان‬ ِ
then, in that ‫ك‬ َ ‫إِذَ ان تَ ُف اوَم ِف َع َمل‬ In that case, you will be successful in your
case work. [This is said in response to the one
who may have said: ‫َجتَ ِه ُد‬
‫( أ ا‬I will work
hard).]

Notes:
1. Sometimes ‫أَ ان‬, together with its ‫فِ اعل‬, gives the meaning of a masdar. In this case, ‫ أَ ان‬is called
ُ‫ص َد ِريَّة‬
‫أَ ان اَلا َم ا‬.
e.g. ‫ص اوُم اوا َخاي ر لَّ ُك ام‬
ُ َ‫ أَ ان ت‬i.e. ‫ص اوُم ُك ام َخاي ر لَّ ُك ام‬
َ
Your fasting is better for you.

ِ
ُ and gives the last letter of ‫ضا ِرع‬
2. ‫ أَ ان‬is hidden after the following six ‫ح ُراوف‬ َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬a ‫صب‬
‫نَ ا‬.
59

a. After ‫ح ِٰت‬:
َ
‫ت َح ِٰت أَ اد ُخ َل الابَ لَ َد‬ ِ ٰ
e.g. ُ ‫س ار‬ )‫ل‬
َ ‫( َحِت أَ ان أَ اد ُخ‬
I travelled until I entered the city.

b. After ‫ح اوِد‬ ِ
ُ ُ‫ َْل ُم ا اْل‬or ‫َْل ُم النَّ اف ِي‬: i.e. that ‫َْلم‬, which appears after ُ‫ َكا َن اَلا َمانفيَّة‬.

58
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 47-52.
59
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 52-62.

111
 e.g. ‫َما َكا َن هللاُ لِيُ َع ِذبَ ُه ام‬ )‫(ِلَ ان يُ َع ِذبَ ُه ام‬
Allah was not going to punish them.

c. After ‫أَاو‬, which has the meaning of ‫( إِ ٰٰل أَ ان‬until) or ‫( إَِّْل أَ ان‬but that/unless).
e.g. ‫َّك أ اَو تُ اع ِطيَِ ان َح ِق اي‬
َ ‫َلَلاَزَمن‬ (‫)إِ ٰٰل أَ ان تُ اع ِطيَِن‬
‫ا‬
I will not leave you until you give me my right.

‫ب الا ُم ِس ايءُ أ اَو يَ اعتَ ِذ َر‬

ُ َ‫يُ َعاق‬ )‫(إَِّْل أَ ان يَ اعتَ ِذ َر‬
The sinner will be punished unless he provides an excuse.

ِ ‫الصر‬
After ‫ف‬
d. ‫ َو ُاو َّ ا‬: i.e., that ‫ َواو‬which “turns away” from the word after it the effect,
which the ‫امل‬ِ ‫ ع‬had on the word before it (before the ‫)واو‬.
َ َ
ِ ِ ِ ِ
e.g. َ ‫َْل َتاُم ار ِبلص ادق َوتَ اكذ‬
‫ب‬ )‫ب‬
َ ‫( َوأَ ان تَ اكذ‬
Do not command the truth while you lie.
(Here, the ‫ َواو‬turned away/stopped the effect of ‫ َْل‬from ‫ب‬ ِ
َ ‫تَ اكذ‬.)
 This ‫ َواو‬is also known as ‫ َو ُاو الا َمعِيَّ ِة‬or ‫احبَ ِة‬
َ ‫ص‬َ ‫ َو ُاو الا ُم‬.
 The sentence must start with a ‫ نَ افي‬or ‫نَ اهي‬.

e. After ‫َْل ُم التَّ اعلِاي ِل‬: i.e., that ‫ َْلم‬which has the meaning of ‫( َكي‬it is also called ‫)َْل ُم َكي‬.
‫ا‬ ‫ا‬
e.g. ‫ت ِلَ اس َِتيا َح‬ ِ
ُ ‫جائ‬ )‫ح‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫(لَ ان أَ اس َتيا‬
I came so I could rest.

f. After ُ‫اْلََوابِيَّة‬/
‫السبَبِيَّةُ ا‬
َّ ُ‫اَلا َفاء‬: i.e., that ‫ف‬, which comes in the َ‫ ٌم جَز‬to any of the following
six.
1. ‫اَالَ ام ُر‬ ‫ك‬َ ‫ن فَأُ اك ِرَم‬ ِ َ ‫(فَأَ ان أُ اك ِرَم‬
e.g. ‫ُمار ا‬ )‫ك‬
Visit me so that I treat you hospitably.

2. ‫اَلنَّ اهي‬ ‫ضِ اب‬ ِ ِِ

ُ e.g. َ ‫َْل تَطاغَ اوا فايه فَيَح َّل َعلَاي ُك ام َغ‬
Do not cross the limit regarding it, lest My wrath descends
upon you.

3. ‫اَلنَّ افي‬
ُ e.g. َ ‫َما تَ ُزاوُرََن فَنُ اك ِرَم‬
‫ك‬
You do not visit us, otherwise we would have treated you
hospitably.

4. ‫ام‬ ِ ِ ‫ك فَأَُماوَرَك‬
ُ ‫ اَاْل است اف َه‬e.g. َ ُ‫أَيا َن بَاي ت‬
Where is your house, so I can visit you.

112
 ِ
5. ‫اَلتَّ َم ِن‬
‫ا‬ e.g. ُ‫ت ِ ال َم ًاْل فَأُناف َقه‬
َ ‫لَاي‬
I wish I had wealth, so I would have spent it.

6. ‫ض‬ ِ ِ ِ
ُ ‫اَلا َع ار‬ e.g. ‫ب َخاي ًرا‬
َ ‫أََْل تَانزُل بنَا فَتُصاي‬
Why don’t you visit us so that you receive good!

3. ‫ أَ ان‬has to be written after a ‫ َْل ُم التَّ اعلِاي ِل‬if the ‫ َْل ُم التَّ اعلِاي ِل‬is joined to a ‫َْلء ََنفِيَة‬.
e.g. ‫لِئَ ََّل يَ اعلَ َم‬ )‫(ِلَ ان َْل‬ So that he does not know.

4. ‫ أَ ان‬which appears after a verb with the root letters ‫ ع – ل – م‬is not a ‫صب‬
‫ف نَ ا‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬. Therefore, it
ِ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬a fathah. Such an ‫ أَ ان‬is known as ‫ أً ان اَلا ُم َخ َّف َفةُ م َن الا ُمثَ َّقلَة‬i.e., that ‫أَ ان‬
does not give ‫ضا ِرع‬
َّ ‫أ‬.
which was ‫َن‬
‫ت أَ ان َسيَ ُق اوُم‬ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫َعل ام‬ I knew that he will stand up.
e.g. ‫َعلِ َم أَ ان َسيَ ُك او ُن ِمان ُك ام َم ار ٰضى‬ He knew that some of you will be sick.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫صب‬

‫ف نَ ا‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬and its effect in the following
sentences.
i. ‫ْيتهد الطالب لينجح‬
ii. ‫لن يفوم الكسَلن‬
iii. ‫جئت كي أتعلم‬
iv. ‫َل يكن الشرطي ليسرق‬
v. ‫ْل تكل حِت َتوع‬
vi. ‫إن هللا يمركم أن تذبوا بقرة‬
vii. ‫اصنع املعروف فتنال الشكر‬
viii. ‫فأراد ربك أن يبلغا أشدها ويستخرجا كنزها‬

113
Section 4.1.260
َ‫ – اَلَرَوَفََاْلَازمَة‬Particles That Give Jazm
These are as follows: ‫إِ ان‬ ‫ََلا‬ ‫لَ َّما‬ ‫َْل ُم اال اَم ِر‬ ‫َْلءُ الن اَّه ِي‬
These appear before ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
 َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬and cause the following changes at the end:
˗ They give the last letter a sukoon if it is not a ‫ نُ اون‬of ‫ تَثانِيَة‬or ‫جَاع‬.
˗ If the last letter is a ‫ نُ اون‬of ‫ تَثانِيَة‬or ‫جَاع‬, it will be dropped. The exception is the
‫ نُ اون‬of the two ‫جَاع ُم َؤنَّث‬.

Table 4.2
َ‫اَلََرَوفََاْلَازمَة‬

َ‫حََرفََجََزم‬ Meaning Example

‫إِ ان‬ ‫س‬ ِ ِ ِ
if ‫س أَ اجل ا‬ ‫إ ان َاَتل ا‬ If you sit, I will sit.

‫ََلا‬ did not ‫ض ِرباِ ان‬

‫ََلا يَ ا‬ He did not hit me.
‫لَ َّما‬ not yet ‫ب الا َولَ ُد َو لَ َّما يَ ُع اد‬
َ ‫َذ َه‬ The boy went but has not returned yet.
‫ِل‬ ‫س‬ ِ ِ
should, shall, let ‫ليَ اجل ا‬ He should sit.
‫َْل‬ ‫س‬ ِ
do not ‫َْل َاَتل ا‬ Do not sit.

Notes:
1. ‫ إِ ان‬appears before two verbal sentences. The first one is called ‫ش ارط‬
َ (condition) and the
second ‫جَزاء‬َ (answer/result).
2. If ‫ إِ ان‬appears before ‫إَِّْل‬, it should be translated negatively.
e.g. ‫إِ ان ٰه َذا إَِّْل َملَك َك ِرامي‬ He is not but an honorable angel.
Note: This negation could also be expressed as “He is only an honorable angel.”

3. ‫ ََلا‬can also be used to give the meaning of ‫لَ َّما‬. For this, ‫ بَ اع ُد‬or ‫ إِ َٰل اآل َن‬is added after the ‫فِ اعل‬
‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬which was given ‫ َج ازم‬by ‫ ََلا‬.
e.g. ‫ب بَ اع ُد‬
‫ََلا يَ اذ َه ا‬ He has not gone yet.

4. ‫ف‬
َ should be brought before the ‫ َجَزاء‬of a ‫ َش ارط‬when the ‫ َجَزاء‬is one of the following:
ِ‫جلَة اِ ا‬ ِ
a. ‫سيَّة‬ ‫ُا‬ e.g. َ ‫إِ ان َتات ِ ان فَأَنا‬
‫ت ُم اكَرم‬
If you come to me you will be treated hospitably.

60
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 1, 52-57 & vol. 2, 63-66.

114
 b. ‫أَامر‬ e.g. َ ‫إِ ان َرأَيا‬
ُ‫ت َميا ًدا فَأَ اك ِرامه‬
If you see Zayd, treat him hospitably.
ِ
c. ‫نَ اهي‬ e.g. ُ‫إِ ان أَ ََت َك َمياد فَ ََل ُِتانه‬
If Zayd comes to you, do not humiliate him.

d. ‫ُد َعاء‬ e.g. ‫إِ ان أَ اكَرامتَِ ان فَ َجَز َاك هللاُ َخاي ًرا‬
If you treat me hospitably, then, may Allah reward you well.
ِ
5. ‫اضي‬ ِ
‫ اَلاف اع ُل الا َم ا‬will be translated in the future tense when it is…
a. used as a ‫ُد َعاء‬ e.g. ‫َجَز َاك هللاُ َخاي ًرا‬
May Allah reward you well.
b. preceded by ‫ش ارط‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫َح ار‬ e.g. ‫ت‬ َ ‫إِ ان َجلَ اس‬
ُ ‫ت َجلَ اس‬
If you sit, I will sit.
c. preceded by ‫ص اول‬ ِ ‫َم ان َجاءَ ِب الَ َسنَ ِة فَلَهُ َع اشُر أ اَمثَ ِالَا‬
ُ ‫ا اسم َم او‬ e.g.
Whoever comes with good, there will be ten
like it for him.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the ‫ج ازم‬

َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬and its effect on the following
sentences.

i. ‫ليفتح علي النافذة‬ iv. ‫كَب الغَلم وملا يتهذب‬

ii. ‫ْل تكثر من الضحك‬ v. ‫إن يسافر أخوك أسافر معه‬
iii. ‫اختلف الشريكان وَل يتفقا‬ vi. ‫إن تنصروا هللا ينصركم‬

115
Section 4.2
َ‫ – اَلَفَعالََالَعَامَلَة‬Governing Verbs
Section 4.2.1
َ‫ – الفعلَالمعروف‬Active Verb: It is that verb whose doer is known/mentioned.
 ‫فِ اعل َم اع ُراوف‬, whether transitive or intransitive, governs the following nouns, as and when
applicable:
ِ َ‫ف‬.
˗ it gives ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫اعل‬
˗ it gives ‫صب‬
‫ نَ ا‬to the following, as and when applicable:
i. ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه( َم افعُ اول بِِه‬can only be governed by a ‫ي‬ ِ ِ
‫)اَلاف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َعد ا‬
ii. ‫َم افعُ اول ُمطالَق‬
iii. ُ‫َم افعُ اول َم َعه‬
iv. ُ‫َم افعُ اول لَه‬
v. ‫َم افعُ اول فِاي ِه‬
vi. ‫حال‬ َ
ِ
vii. ‫ََتاي ز‬

Section 4.2.2
َ‫ – الفعلَالمجهول‬Passive Verb: It is that verb whose doer is not known/mentioned.
 ‫َم ُه اول‬ ِ ِ َ‫( فِعل ما ََل يس َّم ف‬a verb whose ‫اعل‬ ِ َ‫ ف‬is not named).
‫ ف اعل َا‬is also known as ُ‫اعلُه‬ َُ ‫ا ُ َ ا‬
 It gives ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫اعل‬ ِ َ‫( ََنئِب ف‬originally the ‫)م افعول بِِه‬.
ُ ‫َ ُا‬
 It gives ‫صب‬ ‫ نَ ا‬to all the remaining ‫ن‬ ‫ٌْتَب ْوص َج‬.
e.g. ‫ف َدا ِرهِ َتا ِديابًا‬ِ ِ َ ‫اضي‬
‫ض ارًب َشديا ًدا ا‬
ِ ِ ‫ض ِرب ميد ي وم ا‬
‫اْلُ ُم َعة أ ََم َام الا َق ا‬ َ ‫ُ َ َا َ ا‬
Zayd was beaten severely on Friday, in front of the Judge, in his office/house,
to teach him manners.

Section 4.2.3
َ‫ – اَلَفَعَلَ َالَلَز‬Intransitive Verb: It is that verb whose meaning can be understood without a
‫َم‬
‫ َم افعُ اول بِِه‬.
e.g. ‫س َمياد‬
َ َ‫َجل‬ Zayd sat.

Section 4.2.4
َ‫الَف عالَالناقصة‬: These were discussed earlier in section 1.9.

116
Section 4.2.561
َ‫ – الفعلَالَمَتَعَدَي‬Transitive Verb

Definition: It is that verb whose meaning cannot be understood without a ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬.
‫ب َمياد بَكًارا‬
e.g. َ ‫ضَر‬
َ Zayd hit Bakr.

There are four types of ‫ي‬ ِ ِ

‫اَلاف اع ُل الا ُمتَ َعد ا‬. These are as follows:
1. Those verbs, which require one ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬as is the case with most muta‘addi verbs.
e.g. ‫ب َمياد بَكًارا‬
َ ‫ضَر‬
َ
2. Those verbs, which can be given two ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬. These include the following:
 Any verb, which has the meaning of ‫( إِ اعطَاء‬to give).
e.g. ‫ب‬ َ ‫َمنَ َح َوَه‬ ‫ أ اَع ٰطى‬etc.
‫السائِ َل ُخاب ًزا‬َّ ‫ت‬ ُ ‫ أ اَعطَاي‬I gave the beggar a bread.
 Some other verbs, which can also have two ‫ َم افعُ اول بِِه‬include the following
‫َسأ ََل‬ ‫أََمَر َك ٰسى‬ etc.
e.g. ‫اسو الاعِال ُم أَ اهلَهُ َوقَ ًارا‬
ُ ‫يَك‬ Knowledge clothes its possessor with dignity.

3. Those verbs, which must be given two ‫اَلا َم اف ُع او ُل بِِه‬.

 These verbs are known as َ‫( أَف عالَالقلوب‬verbs which relate to the heart/feelings).
 They enter upon a ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and ‫خبَ ر‬
َ unlike the verbs above (number 2).

Table 4.3
َ‫أَف عالَالقلوب‬
Verb Usage Example
‫َرأٰى‬ used for certainty )‫(يَِق اي‬ ‫ت َسعِاي ًدا ذَ ِاهبًا‬ ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ I was sure Sa‘eed was going.
‫َو َج َد‬ used for certainty )‫(يَِق اي‬ ‫ت َرِشاي ًدا َعالِ ًما‬ ُ ‫َو َج اد‬ I was sure Rasheed was knowledgeable.
‫َعلِ َم‬ used for certainty )‫(يَِق اي‬ ‫ت َميا ًدا أَِماي نًا‬ ِ
ُ ‫َعل ام‬ I was sure Zayd was trustworthy.
used for certainty )‫(يَِق اي‬
‫َم َع َم‬ ِ ‫معمت مي ًدا ح‬
‫اضًرا‬
I was sure Zayd was present. /
or doubt )‫شك‬ َ ‫َ َ ا ُ َا‬
َ( I thought Zayd was present.

‫ب‬ ِ ِ َ‫ح ِسبت مي ًدا ف‬

َ ‫ َحس‬used for doubt )‫( َشك‬ ‫اض ًَل‬ ‫َ ا ُ َا‬ I thought Zayd was well-educated.
‫ال‬
َ ‫ َخ‬used for doubt )‫( َشك‬ ‫ت َخالِ ًدا قَائِ ًما‬ُ ‫خ ال‬
ِ I thought Khalid was standing.
‫ ظَ َّن‬used for doubt )‫( َشك‬ ‫ت بَ اكًرا ََنئِ ًما‬
ُ ‫ظَنَ ان‬ I thought Bakr was sleeping.

61
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 69-71.

117
Note: Other verbs, which also require two ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬include the following:
‫صيَّ َر‬
َ to make something something else
e.g. ‫اق كِتَ ًاب‬
َ ‫ت اال اَوَر‬
ُ ‫صيَّ ار‬
َ I made the pages a book.
‫اِ ََّتَ َذ‬ to take someone/something as someone/something
e.g. ‫َوا ََّتَ َذ هللاُ إِبا ٰرِهاي َم َخلِاي ًَل‬ Allah took Ibraheem (peace be upon him) as a
friend.

‫َج َع َل‬ to make something something else

‫اب ُمَرتَّبًا‬ ِ
e.g. َ َ‫ت الاكت‬
ُ ‫َج َع ال‬ I made the book organized.

4. Those verbs which require three ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِِه‬. Each of these has the meaning of “informing” or
“showing.” These are as follows:

Table 4.4

Verb Example
‫أ َٰرى‬ ‫ت َميا ًدا َخالِ ًدا ََنئِ ًما‬ ُ ‫أََريا‬ I informed Zayd that Khalid is sleeping.
‫أَ اعلَ َم‬ ِ َ‫أَ اعلَمت مي ًدا ب اكرا ف‬
‫اض ًَل‬ ً َ ‫ا ُ َا‬ I informed Zayd that Bakr is well-educated.
َ‫أَنابَأ‬ ‫الر ُس او ُل االَِماي َر قَ ِاد ًما‬
َّ ‫أَنابَأَِن‬ The messenger informed me that the chief is
coming.
َ‫نَبَّأ‬ ‫نَبَّأاتُ ُه ام اَلا ِكاب َر مَا ُق او ًَت‬ I informed them that arrogance is hated.
‫َخبَ َر‬‫أا‬ ‫ب ُم ِفاي ًدا‬ َّ
َ ‫ت الاغ ال َما َن الل اع‬
ِ ‫أَخب ر‬
ُ ‫ا َا‬ I informed the boys that sport is beneficial.
‫َخبَّ َر‬ ‫ت الا ُم َسافِ ِريا َن الا ِقطَ َار ُمتَأَ ِخًرا‬ُ ‫َخبَّ ار‬ I informed the travellers that the train is late.
‫َّث‬
َ ‫َحد‬ ً‫احةَ ََنفِ َعة‬ ِ
َ َ‫ت االَاوَْل َد السب‬ ُ ‫َح َّدثا‬ I informed the children that swimming is
beneficial.

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫نبأت سعيدا أخاه قادما‬ iv. ‫رأيت الصلح خيا‬

ii. ‫أعطيت ميدا درها‬ v. ‫أخَبن ميد أبه مريضا‬
iii. ‫فهم سعيد الدرس‬ vi. ‫ظننت اْلو معتدْل‬

118
Section 4.2.662
‫أَف عالَالمقارَبَةََوالرجاءَوَال ي‬
َ‫شروع‬

Definition: These verbs are actually a type of ‫صة‬ ِ

َ ‫ أَفا َعال ََنق‬and they behave the same way. They
also enter upon ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬and ‫خبَ ر‬ ِ
َ , and give ‫ َرفاع‬to their ‫ ا اسم‬and ‫صب‬ ‫ نَ ا‬to their ‫ َخبَ ر‬. The difference is
that their ‫خبَ ر‬ ِِ
َ is always ‫جُالَة ف اعليَّة‬.
They are used for the following purposes:
1. ‫اربَِة‬
َ ‫ال الا ُم َق‬
ُ ‫ أَفا َع‬show nearness in the attainment (‫ص اول‬
ُ ‫ ) ُح‬of the ‫خبَ ر‬.
َ
ِ ‫الرج‬
2. ‫اء‬ َ َّ ‫ال‬ ُ ‫ أَفا َع‬show desire for attainment of ‫ َخبَر‬.
3. ‫ال الش ُراوِع‬
ُ ‫ أَفا َع‬show commencement of action.

Table 4.5
‫أَف عالَالمق َاربَةََوالرجاءَوال ي‬
َ‫شروع‬

‫فِ اعل‬ ‫اِ اسم‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ Type Example

‫َك َاد‬ ‫ضا ِرع َم ارفُ اوع‬

َ ‫ ُم‬preferably without ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ص اول‬
ُ ‫ب ُح‬
ُ ‫َك َاد َمياد يَ اذ َه‬
Zayd was about to
go.
ِ ِ
*‫ب‬َ ‫ َكَر‬/ ‫ضا ِرع َم ارفُ اوع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬preferably without ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ص اول‬
ُ ‫س ُح‬
ُ ‫ب َخالد َاْيل‬
َ ‫َكَر‬ Khalid was about
‫ب‬ to sit.
َ ‫َكُر‬
ِ
َ ‫ضا ِرع َم ارفُ اوع أ اَو َش‬
‫ك‬ َ ‫ ُم‬preferably with ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ص اول‬
ُ ‫ُح‬ ‫س‬
َ ‫ك َمياد أَ ان َاْيل‬
َ ‫ أ اَو َش‬Zayd was about to
sit.
*‫َع ٰسى‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬preferably with ‫أَ ان‬ ‫َر َجاء‬ ‫َع ٰسى َمياد أَ ان ََياُر َج‬ Hopefully Zayd
will come out.
*‫طَِف َق‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬without ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ُشُراوع‬ ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ُ‫طَف َق َمياد يَ اكت‬
Zayd began
writing.
*‫َج َع َل‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬without ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ُشُراوع‬ ُ‫َج َع َل َمياد يَ اقَرأ‬ Zayd began
reading.
*‫َخ َذ‬
َ‫أ‬ ‫َم ارفُ اوع‬ ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬without ‫أَ ان‬ ‫ُشُراوع‬ ‫َخ َذ َمياد َيا ُك ُل‬
َ‫أ‬ Zayd began eating.

* These verbs are used only in past tense.

 The ‫ال الش ُراوِع‬
ُ ‫ أَفا َع‬can be used as normal verbs too.
e.g. ُ‫َخ َذ َمياد ثَ اوبَه‬
َ‫أ‬ Zayd took his clothes.

62
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 103-108.

119
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬ ‫َع ٰسى َمياد أَ ان ََياُر َج‬ ‫‪Hopefully Zayd will come out.‬‬

‫أنََيرجَ‬ ‫زيدَ‬ ‫ع ٰسى‬

‫(ه َو)‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ف اعل ‪ +‬فَاعل ُ‬

‫َخاب ُر َع ٰسى‬ ‫اِ اس ُم َع ٰسى‬ ‫الر َج ِاء‬

‫فِ اع ُل َّ‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫عسى هللا أن يشفيك ‪i.‬‬ ‫أوشك أن يفتح بب املدرسة ‪iv.‬‬

‫تكاد السموات يتفطرن ‪ii.‬‬ ‫أخذت أكتب ‪v.‬‬
‫عست املرأة أن تقوم ‪iii.‬‬ ‫جعل ميد ميسح رأسه ‪vi.‬‬

‫‪120‬‬
Section 4.2.763
َ‫ – أف عالَالمدحَوالذم‬Verbs of Praise and Blame

Verbs of praise: ‫نِ اع َم‬ e.g. َّ ‫نِ اع َم‬

‫الر ُج ُل َمياد‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
‫َحبَّ َذا‬ e.g. ‫َحبَّ َذا َمياد‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
‫س‬ ِ ِ
Verbs of blame:
َ ‫بائ‬ e.g. ‫الر ُج ُل َمياد‬
َّ ‫س‬َ ‫بائ‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

َ‫َساء‬ e.g. ‫الر ُج ُل َمياد‬

َّ َ‫َساء‬ What an evil man Zayd is!

 ِ َ‫ ف‬is called ‫ ُمَاصوص ِبلام اد ِح‬or ‫ُمَاصوص ِب َّلذِم‬.

That which appears after the ‫اعل‬ َ ‫ُا‬ ‫ُا‬
 ِ َ‫ ف‬of ‫ ساء – بِائس – نِعم‬must be one of the following:
The ‫اعل‬ َ‫ا‬ ََ َ
i. prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. َّ ‫نِ اع َم‬
‫الر ُج ُل َمياد‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
ii. ‫ضاف‬َ ‫ ُم‬to a noun prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. ‫ب الاعِال ِم َمياد‬ ِ ‫نِعم‬
ُ ‫صاح‬ َ َ‫ا‬ What a wonderful learned man Zayd is!
a hidden ‫ض ِماي ر‬ ِ ِ
iii. َ followed by a ‫ص اوبَة‬ ُ ‫( نَكَرة َمان‬being ‫)ََتاي ز‬.
e.g. ‫نِ اع َم َر ُج ًَل َمياد‬ ]‫ج ًَل َمياد‬ ِ
ُ ‫[ن اع َم ( ُه َو) َر‬ What a wonderful man Zayd is!
iv. The word ‫ما‬.
‫س َما َكانُ اوا يَ اف َعلُ او َن‬ ِ
e.g.
َ ‫بائ‬ How evil is what they used to do!

In ‫حبَّ َذا َمياد‬

َ, َّ ‫ َح‬is the ‫فِ اعل‬.
‫ب‬
‫ (اِ اس ُم إِ َش َارة) ذَا‬is its ‫اعل‬
ِ َ‫ف‬.
‫ َمياد‬is the ‫ص اوص ِبلا َم اد ِح‬ ُ ‫ُمَا‬.

Notes:
1. These verbs are used in the past tense in their singular form (masculine or feminine).

2. At times the ‫ص اوص ِبلا َم اد ِح‬

ُ ‫ ُمَا‬is dropped.
e.g. ‫نِ اع َم الا َعاب ُد‬ i.e. ‫ب‬ ِ
ُ ‫ن اع َم الا َعاب ُد أَي او‬ What a wonderful slave Ayyub is!

63
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 57-59.

121
‫‪Sentence Analysis:‬‬

‫زي َد‬ ‫الرجلَ‬ ‫نعمَ‬

‫ص اوص ِبلا َم اد ِح‬‫‪ُ +‬مَا ُ‬
‫فَ ِ‬
‫اعل‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫فِ اع ُل الا َم اد ِح‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫ُماب تَ َدأ ُم َؤ َّخر‬ ‫َخبَ ر ُم َقدَّم‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬
‫‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.‬‬

‫نعمت اْلبنة فاطمة ‪i.‬‬

‫حبذا اْلتفاق ‪ii.‬‬
‫نعم املوٰل ‪iii.‬‬

‫‪122‬‬
Section 4.2.864
َ‫ – أفَعالَالت ع يجب‬Verbs of Wonder

For three-letter verbs )‫ج َّرُد‬ ِ

َ ‫(اَلث ََلثي الا ُم‬, there are two wazns for expressing wonder or amazement.
1. ُ‫ َما أَفا َعلَه‬: ‫ َما‬has the meaning of ‫شيء‬
‫أَي َ ا‬.
e.g. ‫َح َس َن َميا ًدا‬
‫َما أ ا‬ How wonderful Zayd is!

‫زيَ ادا‬ َ‫أحسن‬ ‫ما‬

‫َم افعُ اول بِِه‬ + )‫(ه َو‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ فَاعل‬+ ‫ف اعل‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة إِنا َشائِيَّة‬ )‫َخبَ ر (جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

2. ‫أَفاعِ ال بِِه‬: ‫ل أَامر) أَفاعِ ال‬ ِ ِ

ُ ‫ (ف اع‬has the meaning of past tense and the ‫ ب‬is extra )‫( َمائ َدة‬.
e.g. ‫َح ِس ان بَِزياد‬
‫أا‬ )‫س َن َمياد‬
َ ‫َح‬
‫(أ ا‬ How wonderful Zayd is!
‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة إِنا َشائِيَّة‬

 To express wonder for other than three-letter verbs )‫ج َّرِد‬ ِ ِ

َ ‫( َغاي ُر الث ََلث ِي الا ُم‬, a word such as ِ‫أَ اشد اد ب‬/
‫َش َّد‬
َ ‫ َما أ‬or ‫َح َس َن‬ ِ ‫ أ‬etc. should be placed before the ‫ مص َدر‬of the desired verb. The
‫ َما أ ا‬/ ِ‫َحس ان ب‬ ‫ا‬ ‫َ ا‬
‫ص َدر‬ ِ ِ
‫ َم ا‬will be ‫ َم اف ُع اول به‬, thus ‫ص اوب‬ ُ ‫ َمان‬.
e.g. ‫َّاس لِلا ُعلَ َم ِاء‬
ِ ‫َش َّد إِ اكَر َام الن‬
َ ‫َما أ‬ How very respectful people are towards the learned!

EXERCISE
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and analyze the following sentences.

i. ‫أطول بزيد‬
ii. ‫ما أشد بياض شعره‬
iii. ‫ما أطول الرجلي‬

64
For more details, examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 60-63.

123
Section 4.3
َ‫ – اَلَسَاءََالَعَامَلَة‬Governing Nouns
ِ ‫َسَاء االَفا ع‬
Amongst these, ‫ال‬ َ ُ ‫ أ ا‬were discussed in section 2.4.4. Here, we will discuss the rest.

Section 4.3.165
َ‫ – الَساءَالشرطية‬Conditional Nouns
 They govern two ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬giving both a ‫ َج ازم‬.
 They appear before two sentences. The first is called ‫ش ارط‬
َ (condition) and the second
‫( َجَزاء‬result).
Table 4.6
َ‫اَلَسَاءََالشرطية‬
Noun Meaning Usage Example
1. ‫َم ان‬ who, ‫لِال َعاقِ ِل‬ ُ‫َم ان يُ اك ِرام ِ ان أُ اك ِرامه‬
Whoever treats me hospitably, I
whoever will treat him hospitably.
2. ‫َما‬ what, ‫لِغَ اِي الا َعاقِ ِل‬ ‫َما َتا ُك ال أٰ ُك ال‬ Whatever you eat, I will eat.
whatever
3. ‫َم اه َما‬ however ‫لِغَ اِي الا َعاقِ ِل‬ ‫ك‬ ‫َم اه َما تُان ِف اق ِف ا‬
َ ‫اْلَاِي يَان َف اع‬ Whatever you spend in the way
much of good, will benefit you.
4. ‫َم ِٰت‬ ِ ‫لِ َّلزم‬
‫ان‬ ‫ب‬‫ب أَ اذ َه ا‬ ‫َم ِٰت تَ اذ َه ا‬
Whenever you go, I will go.
when َ
5. ‫ََي َن‬
َّ ‫أ‬ ِ‫لِ َّلزمان‬ ‫أ َََّي َن تُ َسافِار أُ َسافِار‬ Whenever you travel, I will
when َ
travel.
6. ‫أَيا َن‬ ِ ‫لِالم َك‬
‫ان‬ ‫ب‬
where َ ‫ب أَ اذ َه ا‬ ‫أَيا َن تَ اذ َه ا‬ Wherever you go, I will go.
ٰ‫أ‬
7. ‫َن‬ ِ‫لِالم َكان‬ ‫أ َٰن تَان ِزال أَنا ِزال‬ Wherever you stay, I will stay.
where َ
8. ‫حاي ثُ َما‬ ِ‫لِالم َكان‬ ‫َحاي ثُ َما تُ َسافِار أُ َسافِار‬ Wherever you travel, I will
َ where َ
travel.
9. ‫َكاي َف َما‬ how, ‫لِال َح ِال‬ ‫َكاي َف َما تَ اق ُع اد أَقا ُع اد‬ Whichever way you sit, I will sit.
manner
10. ‫أَي‬ any of any of the ‫ب‬
‫ب أَ اذ َه ا‬
‫أَي َم َكان تَ اذ َه ا‬
Whichever place you go, I will
the above above go.

Notes:
1. ‫ إِ ان‬and ‫ إِ اذ َما‬have the same function as ُ‫َّر ِطيَّة‬ ِ
‫ اَالَ اسَاءُ الش ا‬i.e. giving jazm to two ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬except
that they are particles )‫الش ار ِط‬َّ ‫ ( َح ارفَا‬and not nouns. Collectively they (nouns and particles)
‫ات الش اَّر ِط ا‬
are all called ُ‫اْلَا ِمَمة‬ ُ ‫أ ََد َو‬.
65
For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 2, 66-71.

124
 ‫إِ ان‬ if e.g. ‫ب‬ ‫ب أَ اذ َه ا‬
ِ
‫إ ان تَ اذ َه ا‬ If you go, I will go.
‫إِ اذ َما‬ if e.g. ‫إِ اذ َما تَ اف َع ال َشًّرا تَان َد ام‬ If you do evil, you will be regretful.

2. There are other ‫َّر ِط‬ ِ

ُ ‫ أ ََد َو‬that are ‫ َغاي ُر َجا ِمَمة‬, i.e. they do not give ‫ َج ازم‬to ‫ضا ِرع‬
‫ات الش ا‬ َ ‫ف اعل ُم‬. Some of
‫ف الش اَّر ِط الَِّ اِت َْل َا‬
these are discussed in Section 4.4, # 13 (‫َت ِزُم‬ ُ ‫) ُحُراو‬. Amongst the ُ‫اَالَ اسَاءُ الش اَّر ِطيَّة‬,
which do not give , two are discussed below:

i. ‫( ُكلَّ َما‬whenever, every time)

This is a ‫ظَارف‬, and enters upon ‫فِ اعل َماض‬. It also conveys the meaning of
emphasis and repetition.
e.g. ِ ‫ت إِ َٰل الطَّبِاي‬
‫ب‬ ُ ‫ت َذ َهاب‬
ُ‫ض‬‫ُكلَّ َما َم ِر ا‬ Whenever I fell sick, I went to the
doctor.

ii. ‫( إِ َذا‬when)
This is also a ‫ظَارف‬, and is used to give the meaning of ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ف اعل ُم‬. It also entails
the meaning of condition (‫َّر ِط‬ ِ َ‫)مت‬.
‫ضمن َم اع َن الش ا‬
َ ُ
e.g. ‫إِذَا لَ ِقاي تَهُ فَ َسلِ ام َعلَاي ِه‬ When you meet him, greet him.

3. When the following nouns are used for ‫( اِ استِ اف َهام‬interrogative), they appear before one
sentence.
‫أَي‬ ‫أ َٰن‬ ‫أَيا َن‬ ‫أ َََّي َن‬ ‫َم ِٰت‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َم ان‬
e.g. ‫َم ِٰت تُ َسافُِر‬ ‫ب‬ُ ‫أَيا َن تَ اذ َه‬ ‫ت‬َ ‫َم ان أَنا‬ ‫َما ٰه َذا‬

EXERCISE

1. Complete the following sentences with a suitable ‫جَزاء‬

َ.
i. _______ ‫من يصنع معروفا‬ v. _______ ‫أن ينزل ذو العلم‬
ii. _______ ‫ما َتف من أعمالك‬ vi. _______ ‫مِت تسافر‬
iii. _______ ‫كيفما تعامل إخوانك‬ vii. _______ ‫من احتم الناس‬
iv. _______ ‫أَين يكثر فراغ الشباب‬ viii. _______ ‫من يكثر كَلمه‬

125
Section 4.3.266
َ‫ – اسمَالفاعل‬Active Participle

Definition: It is a noun which indicates the one doing or undertaking an action described by
the root letters. This is irrespective of its position in a sentence.
 It is created from ‫ ثََُلثِي َُمََّرد‬verbs on the pattern of ‫اعل‬
ِ َ‫ف‬. For other than ‫ ثََُلثِي َُمَّرد‬verbs, it
َ
is created on the pattern of its ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬by changing the ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ف ُم‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬into a meem with a
dammah, and giving a kasrah to the letter before the last.

Effect:
 It has the same effect as that of its active verb (‫ )فِ اعل َم اع ُراوف‬i.e. if its verb is ‫َْل ِمم‬, it gives ‫َرفاع‬
ِ َ‫ ;ف‬and if it is ‫مت عد‬, it gives ‫ رفاع‬to the ‫اعل‬
to the ‫اعل‬ ِ َ‫ ف‬and ‫ نَصب‬to the ‫م افعول بِِه‬.
َ َُ َ ‫ا‬ ‫َ ُا‬
 ِ ‫ اِسم الا َف‬acts only in either of the following two situations:
‫اع ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
1. When it is prefixed with ‫ال‬.
e.g. َ َ‫الشاكُِر نِ اع َمت‬
‫ك‬ َّ ‫أ َََن‬ I am grateful for your favor.
2. When it indicates present or future tense and is preceded by ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬or ‫ص اوف‬ ِ ِ
ُ ‫ َم او‬or ‫ا است اف َهام‬
or ‫نَ افي‬. For example,

a. ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬ e.g. ‫ضا ِرب أَبُ اوهُ بَ اكًرا‬

َ ‫َمياد‬ Zayd’s father is beating/will beat Bakr.
b. ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫َم او‬
e.g. ‫ضا ِرب أَبُ اوهُ بَكًارا‬َ ‫ت بَِر ُجل‬
ُ ‫َمَرار‬ I passed by a man whose father is
beating/will beat Bakr.

c. ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬ e.g. ‫َضا ِرب َمياد بَكًارا؟‬

َ‫أ‬ Is Zayd beating Bakr?/Will Zayd beat
Bakr?

d. ‫نَ افي‬ e.g. ‫َما قَائِم َمياد‬ Zayd is not standing/will not stand.

Sentence Analysis:

‫بك ارا‬ َ‫أب وه‬ َ‫ضارب‬ َ‫زيد‬

| )‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬َ ‫ضاف َوُم‬
َ ‫( ُم‬ |

ُ‫َم افعُ اولُه‬ + ِ

ُ‫فَاعلُه‬ + ‫اِ اس ُم الا َفا ِع ِل‬

‫= جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة َخ ََِبيَّة‬ ‫َخبَ ر‬ + ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬

66
This section and the following sub-section are based on the discussion in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See al-Nahw al-
Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 71-76.

126
Section 4.3.2.1
َ‫اسمَالمبالغة‬

Definition: It is that noun, which conveys extremity/intensity in meaning.

 ِ ‫ اِسم الا َف‬is turned into the seeghahs of ‫ مبالَغَة‬when exaggeration in meaning is intended.
‫اع ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬ َُ
 Some of the wazns of ‫ ُمبَالَغَة‬are as follows:

Table 4.7
َ‫أوزانَاسمَالمبالغة‬
Examples
Wazns
Arabic Meaning
‫فَعِايل‬ ‫َعلِايم‬ most learned
‫اع اول‬
ُ َ‫ف‬ ‫فَ ُاراوق‬ great distinguisher
‫فَ َّعال‬ ‫ض َّحاك‬
َ someone who laughs a lot
‫فَ ُع اول‬ ‫صبُ اور‬
َ very patient
‫فَع اول‬ ‫قَي اوم‬ careful maintainer/sustainer
‫ِم افعِايل‬ ‫ِمان ِطايق‬ very eloquent
‫ِم اف َعال‬ ‫ِم اع َوان‬ someone who helps frequently

 ‫ اِ اس ُم الا ُمبَالَغَ ِة‬does the ‫ ٌل َجم‬of ‫اع ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم الا َف‬with the same conditions.
ُ‫ا‬
e.g. ِ ِ
َّ ‫يُ اعجبُِ ان‬
‫الش ُك اوُر الا ُمانع َم‬
The one who is very grateful to the one who does good (to him), pleases me.

‫إِ َّن ا اْلَبَا َن َلَيَّاب لَِقاءَ الا َع ُد ِو‬

Indeed, the coward is very scared of meeting the enemy.
Notes:

1. The round ‫ ة‬at the end of some wazns is for ‫ ُمبَالَغَة‬and not for gender.
e.g. ‫فَعَّالَة‬ ‫َع ََّل َمة‬ well-learned

2. The wazn ‫ فَعَّال‬is also used to denote a profession.

e.g. ‫طَبَّاخ‬ cook ‫جنََّار‬ carpenter

‫اَدج‬
َ ‫ٌد‬ blacksmith ‫َح ََّلق‬ barber

127
 ‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪ in the‬اِ اس ُم الا َفاعِ ِل ‪1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the‬‬
‫‪following sentences.‬‬

‫‪i.‬‬ ‫أذاهب صديقنا؟‬ ‫‪v.‬‬ ‫ما شارب ميد القهوة‬

‫‪ii.‬‬ ‫الضارب ميد بكرا‬ ‫‪vi.‬‬ ‫ميد شارب القهوة‬
‫‪iii.‬‬ ‫لست جباحد فضلكم‬ ‫‪vii.‬‬ ‫املؤمن ُمسن عمله‬
‫‪iv.‬‬ ‫أمنجز أنتم وعدكم؟‬ ‫‪viii.‬‬ ‫الطالب قارئ كتاب‬

‫‪128‬‬
Section 4.3.367
َ‫ – اسمَالمفعَول‬Passive Participle

Definition: It is that noun which indicates the one upon whom an action described by the
root letters is done. This is irrespective of its position in a sentence.
 It is created from ‫ ثََُلثِي َُمََّرد‬verbs on the pattern of ‫ َم افعُ اول‬. For other than ‫ثََُلثِي َُمََّرد‬, it is
created on the pattern of its ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ ُم‬by changing the ‫ضا ِرع‬
َ ‫ف ُم‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬into a meem with a
dammah, and giving a fathah to the letter before the last.

Effect:
ِ
 ‫ف اعل َا‬, i.e. it gives ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫ب الا َفاعِ ِل‬
It has the same effect as that of its passive verb ‫َم ُه اول‬ ِ
ُ ‫ ََنئ‬.
 ِ ‫ اِسم الا َف‬also apply here.
The rules mentioned above regarding the ‫اع ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
Examples:
i. prefixed with e.g. ‫اَلا ُم َس ٰمى ِه َش ًاما أ َِخ اي‬ The one named Hisham is my
alif-laam brother.
ii. ‫ُماب تَ َدأ‬ ِ
ُ‫ضُراوب ابانُه‬
‫َمياد َم ا‬
e.g. Zayd’s son is being beaten/will be
beaten.
ِ
iii. ‫ص اوف‬
ُ ‫َم او‬
e.g. ‫ت بَِر ُجل َم ا‬
ُ‫ضُراوب ابانُه‬ ُ ‫َمَرار‬ I passed by a man whose son is being
beaten/will be beaten.

iv. ‫اِ استِ اف َهام‬ e.g. ‫ضُراوب َمياد؟‬

‫أ ََم ا‬ Is Zayd being beaten?/Will Zayd be
beaten?

v. ‫نَ افي‬ e.g. ‫ضُراوب َمياد‬

‫َما َم ا‬ Zayd is not being beaten/will not be
beaten.

EXERCISE

1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and point out the effect and tense of the ‫ اِ اس ُم الا َم اف ُع اوِل‬in the
following sentences.

i. ‫ميد مسموع خَبه‬ iv. ً‫الفقي معطًى ثوب‬

ii. ‫خالد معلَّم ابنه الياكة‬ v. ‫الكتاب متقن طبعه‬
iii. ‫العلم معروفة فوائده‬ vi. ‫الشجار مقطوعة أغصاهنا‬

67
This section is based on the discussion in al-Nahw al-Wadih. See al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol 2, 77-
82.

129
Section 4.3.468
َ‫ – الصفةَالمشب هةَََبسمَالفاعل‬That Adjective Which Is Similar to َ‫اَسَمََالَفَاعَل‬

Definition: It is that noun, which is created from the ‫ص َدر‬ َّ ‫( اَلث ََلثِي‬three-letter
‫ َم ا‬of a ‫الَل ِمُم‬
intransitive verb) to indicate permanent existence of the meaning in the doer.

 Like its ‫فِ اعل َْل ِمم‬, it generally gives the ‫اعل‬
ِ َ‫ ف‬a ‫رفاع‬.
َ
e.g. ُ‫َح َسن َو اج ُهه‬ His face is beautiful.

 It conveys permanency of meaning in the object it relates to e.g. ‫سن‬ َ ‫( َح‬beautiful) is a

ِ ‫اِسم الا َف‬, which indicates a temporary meaning
permanent quality, as compared to ‫اع ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
e.g. ‫ضا ِرب‬
َ is a temporary quality, which exists only at the time of the action.
 َّ ‫( اَلث ََلثِي‬three-letter intransitive verb) and
All such nouns, which are derived from a ‫الَل ِمُم‬
ِ ‫ اِسم الا َف‬but are not on the wazn of ‫اِسم الا َفاعِ ِل‬, are ‫ص َفة م َشبَّهة‬
give the meaning of ‫اع ِل‬ ِ
ُ‫ا‬ ُ‫ا‬ َ ُ .

َ ‫( ِص َفة ُم‬based on usage) are given below

Some of the common wazns of ‫شبَّ َهة‬

Table 4.8
َ‫أوزانَالصفةَالمشب هة‬
Examples
Wazns
Arabic Meaning
‫فَعِل‬ ‫فَرِح‬ happy
‫فَ َعل‬ ‫َح َسن‬ beautiful
‫فَعِايل‬ ‫َش ِرياف‬ noble/honorable
‫فَ َعال‬ ‫َجبَان‬ coward
‫فُ َعال‬ ‫ُش َجاع‬ brave

 Colors and bodily defects appear on the following wazns:

‫أَفا َع ُل‬ (masculine) e.g. ‫َمحَُر‬

‫أا‬ red
‫أَبا َك ُم‬ mute

ُ‫فَ اع ََلء‬ (feminine) e.g. ُ‫محَاَراء‬ red

ُ‫اماء‬ َ ‫بَك‬ mute

68
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 83-91.

130
 ‫ِ‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫شبَّ َهة ‪The‬‬ ‫‪َ ( is brought on the wazn of its‬غاي ُر الث ََلثِ ِي الا ُم َجَّرد) ‪ِ of non-three letter verbs‬ص َفة ُم َ‬
‫‪ on the condition that permanency of meaning is intended.‬اِسم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل‬ ‫اُ‬
‫‪e.g.‬‬ ‫ُم استَ ِقايم‬ ‫‪straight‬‬

‫‪EXERCISE‬‬

‫شبَّ َهة ‪1. Translate, fill in the iʻraab, and identify all the‬‬ ‫‪ِ in the following passage.‬‬
‫ص َفة ُم َ‬
‫كان هارون الرشيد فصيحاً كرمياً‪ُ ،‬هاماً وِرعاً‪ ،‬حيج سنة ويغزو سنة وكان أديباً فطناً‪ ،‬حافظاً للقرآن‪ ،‬سليم‬
‫الذوق‪ ،‬صحيح التمييز‪ ،‬جريئاً ف الق‪ ،‬مهيباً عند اْلاصة والعامة‪ ،‬وكان طلق احمليا‪ ،‬حيب الشعراء ويعطيهم‬
‫العطاء اْلزيل ويدن منه أهل الدب والدين‪ ،‬ويتواضع للعلماء‪.‬‬

‫‪.‬اِسم الا َف ِ‬
‫اع ِل ‪ُ and‬مبَالَغَة ‪2. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and identify the seeghahs of‬‬ ‫اُ‬
‫حسود وْل ح ُقود وْل ُمتال‪ .‬يطلب من اْليات أعَلها ومن‬ ‫قال حكيم‪ :‬املؤمن صبُور شكور ْل ِنام وْل ُ‬
‫الخَلق أسناها‪ْ .‬ل يرد سائَل وْل يبخل مبال‪ ،‬متواصل المم‪ ،‬متادف الحسان‪ ،‬ومان لكَلمه‪ ،‬خزان للسانه‪،‬‬
‫ُمسن عمله‪ ،‬مكثر ف الق أمله‪ ،‬ليس هبياب عند الفزع وْل وَثب عند الطمع‪ ،‬مواس للفقراء‪ ،‬رحيم بلضعفاء‪.‬‬

‫‪131‬‬
Section 4.3.569
َ‫ – اسمَالت فضيل‬Comparative and Superlative Noun

Definition: It is that noun, which indicates that a quality described by the root letters is found
to a greater extent in one person/thing when compared to another.
e.g. ‫َخالِد أَ اكبَ ُر ِم ان َع امرو‬ Khalid is older/bigger than ‘Amr.

It can also refer to the highest degree (superlative) of the quality described by the root letters.
e.g. ‫اَللُ أَ اكبَ ُر‬ Allah is the greatest.
Note: This is the case when it is used without ‫ ِم ان‬, i.e. without comparison.

Table 4.9
َ‫أوزانَاَسمَالت فضيَل‬

Masculine Example Feminine Example Meaning

Singular ‫أَفا َع ُل‬ ‫أَ اكبَ ُر‬ ‫فُ اع ٰلى‬ ‫ُكاب ٰرى‬ Bigger/older
Dual ‫أَفا َع ََل ِن‬ ‫أَ اكبَ َر ِان‬ ِ ‫فُعلَي‬
‫ان‬َ‫ا‬ ‫ُكاب َرََي ِن‬ Bigger/older
‫أَفا َعلُ او َن‬ ‫أَ اكبَ ُراو َن‬ ‫فُ اعلَيَات‬ ‫ُكاب َرََيت‬ Bigger/older
Plural
‫اع ُل‬ِ َ‫أَف‬ ‫أَ َكابُِر‬ ‫فُ َعل‬ ‫ُكبَر‬ Bigger/older

Usage:
ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬is used in three ways.
‫ضاي ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
1. With ‫ ِم ان‬: the ‫ضاي ِل‬ ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬will always be a singular masculine )‫(و ِاحد م َذ َّكر‬.
ُ‫ا‬ ُ َ
e.g. ِ
‫َمياد أَ اعلَ ُم م ان بَكار‬ Zayd is more knowledgeable than Bakr.
‫ب‬ ِ ِ
َ َ‫َعائ َشةُ أَ اكبَ ُر م ان َميان‬ ‘Aishah is older than Zaynab.
ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬must correspond with the word before it in gender and number.
2. With ‫ال‬: the ‫ضاي ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
ِ ‫ان َغائِب‬
‫ان‬ ِ ‫اَ َّلزي َد ِان االَ اعلَم‬
e.g. َ َ ‫ا‬ The two more knowledgeable Zayds are absent.
ِ ِ
‫َعائ َشةُ الا ُكاب ٰرى َحاضَرة‬ The older ‘Aishah is present.
ِ ِ ِ
َ ِ‫إ‬: the ‫ ا اس ُم التَّ افضاي ِل‬may be ‫ َواحد ُم َذ َّكر‬or it may correspond with the word before it.
3. With ‫ضافَة‬
e.g. ‫اَ َّلزيا ُد او َن أَ اعلَ ُم الا َق اوِم‬ ‫َميا ُد او َن أَ اعلَ ُمو الا َق اوِم‬
The Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.

‫اَ َّلزيا َد ِان أَ اعلَ ُم الا َق اوِم‬ ‫َميا َد ِان أَ اعلَ َما الا َق اوِم‬
The two Zayds are the most knowledgeable of people.

69
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 92-100.

132
 ِ ‫َعائِ َشةُ أَ اكبَ ُر الن‬
‫َّاس‬ ِ ‫َعائِ َشةُ ُكاب ٰرى الن‬
‫َّاس‬
‘Aishah is the oldest of people.

Notes:
ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬of words, which indicate color, physical defects and of ‫ َغي ر الث ََلثِ ِي الامجَّرِد‬verbs is
1. ‫ضاي ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬ َُ ُ‫ا‬
made by placing the words ‫َشد‬ َ ‫أ‬, ‫أَ اكثَ ُر‬, etc. before the ‫ص َدر‬
‫ َم ا‬of that word. The ‫ص َدر‬‫ َم ا‬will be
the ‫ََتِاي ز‬, and therefore, will be ‫وجٌْجت‬
َ ‫َب ْو‬.
e.g. ‫َشد محُاَرةً ِم ان َمياد‬ َ ‫ُه َو أ‬ He is redder than Zayd.
‫َشد َع ار ًجا ِم ان َمياد‬ َ ‫ُه َو أ‬ He is lamer than Zayd.
‫ُه َو أَ اكثَُر اِ اجتِ َه ًادا ِم ان َمياد‬ He is more hard-working than Zayd.
ِ ِ
َ and ‫ َشر‬are also used for ‫ا اس ُم التَّ افضاي ِل‬.
2. The words ‫خاي ر‬

e.g. ِ ‫اَلظَّ ِاَلُ َشر الن‬

‫َّاس‬ The oppressor is the worst of people.
ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬gives ‫ رفاع‬to its hidden ‫ض ِمي ر‬.
3. ‫ضاي ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬ َ ‫َ ا‬
e.g. ‫ض ُل ِم ان بَكار‬
َ ‫َمياد أَفا‬ Zayd is more virtuous than Bakr.
The dameer ‫ ُه َو‬in ‫ل‬ ِ
ُ‫ض‬
َ ‫ أَفا‬is its ‫فَاعل‬.

EXERCISE
ِ ‫ اِسم التَّ اف‬in the following sentences.
1. Translate, fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of ‫ضاي ِل‬ ُ‫ا‬
i. ‫بعض اليواَنت أقوى من النسان‬ v. ‫النساء الفضليات‬
ii. ‫النبياء أفضل الناس‬ vi. ‫النبياء أفاضل الناس‬
iii. ‫مرمي فضلى النساء‬ vii. ‫الرجَلن الفضَلن‬
iv. ‫أولئك هم خي الَبية‬ viii. ‫ثوبك أشد سوادا من ثوب‬

133
Section 4.3.670
َ‫ – المصدر‬Infinitive/Verbal Noun

Definition: It is that noun which refers to the action indicated by the corresponding verb
without any reference to time. It is the root of all derived words (‫شتَ قَّات‬
‫) ُم ا‬.
ِ َ‫ ف‬and ‫ نَصب‬to the ‫م افعول‬
Effect: It has the same effect as that of its verb i.e. it gives ‫ َرفاع‬to the ‫اعل‬ ‫ا‬ ‫َ ُا‬
ِ‫بِه‬.
e.g. ‫ض اربً الايَ اوَم َمياد بَكًارا‬
َ ‫ت‬
ُ ‫َرأَيا‬ Today, I saw Zayd’s beating of Bakr.

Usage:
Masdar is generally used in one of the following two ways:
 as a ‫ضاف‬ ِ
َ ‫ ُم‬to its ‫فَاعل‬.
e.g. ‫ب َمياد بَكًارا‬
َ ‫ض ار‬ ُ ‫َك ِراه‬
َ ‫ت‬ i.e. )‫ارا‬ َ ‫ض ِر‬
ً‫ب َمياد بَك‬ ‫(أَ ان يَ ا‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating
of Bakr.
ِ
 َ ‫ ُم‬to its ‫ َم اف ُع اول بِه‬.
as a ‫ضاف‬
e.g. ‫ب بَكار َمياد‬
َ ‫ض ار‬ ُ ‫َك ِراه‬
َ ‫ت‬ i.e. )‫ارا َمياد‬ َ ‫ض ِر‬
ً‫ب بَك‬ ‫(أَ ان يَ ا‬ I disliked Zayd’s beating
of Bakr.
EXERCISE
1. Fill in the i‘raab and explain the usage of the masdar in the following sentences.

i. ‫سرن قراءة رشيد القرآن‬ iii. ‫إكرام العرب الضيف معروف‬

ii. ‫حبك الشيء يعمي ويصم‬ iv. ‫ولل على الناس حج البيت من استطاع إليه سبيَل‬

70
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 52-70.

134
Section 4.3.771
َ‫المضاف‬
In the case of ‫ضاف‬َ ‫ ُم‬, it is assumed that one of the following prepositions )‫ف َجر‬
ُ ‫ ( ُحُراو‬is hidden
ِ
between the ‫ضاف‬َ ‫ ُم‬and ‫ضاف إِلَايه‬
َ ‫ ُم‬.
‫ِم ان‬ ِ ِ
 َ ‫ ُم‬is a part/type )‫ (جانس‬of the ‫ضاف إِلَايه‬
when the ‫ضاف‬ َ ‫ ُم‬.
e.g. ‫َخ َاتُ فِضَّة‬ i.e. ‫َخ َات ِم ان فِضَّة‬ silver ring

 ‫ِ اف‬ when the ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬

َ ‫ ُم‬is a ‫ظَارف‬.
e.g. ‫ص ََلةُ اللَّاي ِل‬
َ i.e. ‫ص ََلة ِف اللَّاي ِل‬
َ night prayer

 ‫ِل‬ when it is neither of the above two.

e.g. ‫اِبا ُن َمياد‬ i.e. ‫اِبان لَِزياد‬ Zayd’s son

Section 4.3.8
َ‫اْلَسمَالتامي‬
Definition: It is that noun, which gives the noun )‫ (ََتِاي ز‬after it a nasb.
 A noun will be considered as ‫ ََتم‬when it has one of the following:
a. tanween.
‫احة َس َح ًاب‬ ِ َّ ‫ما ِف‬
e.g. َ ‫الس َماء قَ اد ُر َر‬ َ )‫احة‬
َ ‫( َر‬
There is not even a palm’s measure of clouds in the sky.
b. hidden tanween.
‫َح َد َع َشَر َر ُج ًَل‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫َمع اي أ‬ (‫شَر‬
َ ‫َح َد َع‬
َ ‫ أ‬was originally ‫َحد َو َع اشر‬
َ ‫)أ‬
There are eleven men with me.

c. ‫ ن‬of a dual noun.

e.g. ‫ِعان ِد اي قَِفاي َز ِان بًُّرا‬ ِ ‫(قَ ِفي ز‬
)‫ان‬َ‫ا‬
I have two qafeezes72 of wheat.

d. ‫ ن‬which resembles the ‫ ن‬of a sound masculine plural )‫(جَا ُع ُم َذ َّكر َس ِاَل‬.
e.g. ‫ِعان ِد اي ِع اشُراو َن ِد ارَهًا‬ ‫( ِع ا‬
)‫ش ُراو َن‬
I have twenty dirhams.

The ‫ اَاِْل اس ُم التَّام‬in the above examples cannot be ‫ضاف‬

َ ‫ ُم‬while having a tanween or having a noon
of dual/plural, thus the noun after it gets a ‫صب‬ ِ
‫ نَ ا‬because of it being ‫ََتاي ز‬.
71
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 1, 131-141.
72
A qafeez is a classical Islamic measure of volume. According to the Hanafis, it is equal to 40.344 litres.

135
Section 4.3.973
َ‫اَلكناَيَت‬

Definition: It is that noun, which indicates an unspecified quantity.

 It is clarified by the noun following it.
 These are ‫ َك ام‬and ‫ َك َذا‬.

‫ك َم‬: can be used in two ways: as an interrogative )‫ (اِ استِ اف َهام‬or as an informative exclamation
َِ ‫( َخ‬.
)‫َبيَّة‬

1. َ‫( – كمَاْلستفهاميَة‬how many)

 It gives the noun )‫ (ََتِاي ز‬after it a ‫صب‬
‫نَ ا‬.
 The ‫ ََتِاي ز‬is singular.
e.g. ‫َك ام كِتَ ًاب ِعان َد َك‬ How many books do you have?
 At times, the preposition ‫ ِم ان‬appears before the ‫ََتِاي ز‬.
e.g. ‫َك ام ِم ان كِتَاب ِعان َد َك‬ How many books do you have?

2. َ‫( – كمَاْلَبية‬so many)

 It gives the noun )‫ (ََتِاي ز‬after it a ‫جر‬ ِِ
َ (because of it being a ‫ضاف إلَايه‬
َ ‫) ُم‬.
 The ‫ ََتِاي ز‬may be singular or plural.
e.g. ‫ت‬
َ ‫َك ام َمال أَنا َف اق‬ So much of wealth you have spent!
e.g ‫ت‬
َ ‫َك ام أَام َوال أَنا َف اق‬ So much of wealths you have spent!
 At times the preposition ‫ ِم ان‬appears before the ‫ََتِاي ز‬.
e.g. ِ ‫الس ٰم ٰو‬
‫ت‬ َّ ‫َك ام ِم ان َملَك ِف‬ There are so many angels in the skies/heavens!

‫( – كذا‬so much, such and such)

 It gives the noun )‫ (ََتِاي ز‬after it a nasb.
 The ‫ ََتِاي ز‬is singular.
e.g. ‫ِعان ِد اي َك َذا ِد ارَهًا‬ I have this much dirhams.

EXERCISE
1. What is the difference between the following sentences.
i. ‫كم كتاب قرأت‬ ii. ‫كم كتاب قرأت‬

73
For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 170-173.

136
Section 4.4
َ‫ – اَلَرَوَفََالَغَيَرََالَعَامَلَة‬Non-Governing Particles

1. َ‫ – حروفَالت نبيه‬Particles of Notification:

These are used to draw the attention of the listener. These are as follows:
‫أََْل‬ ‫أ ََما‬ ‫َها‬ meaning Lo! / Behold! / Take heed!
‫صَر هللاِ قَ ِرياب‬ ِ
e.g. ‫أََْل ا َّن نَ ا‬ Behold! Indeed, Allah’s help is near.
‫أ ََما َمياد ََنئِم‬ Behold! Zayd is sleeping.
‫اضر‬ِ ‫ها أ َََن ح‬
َ َ Lo! I am present.
‫ٰه َذا‬ This
Note: The actual ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ ِ ُ ‫حر‬. However, in
َ ‫ ا اس ُم إ َش‬is only ‫ذَا‬, while ‫ َها‬is the ‫ف تَانبايه‬ ‫َا‬
common usage the whole is referred to as ‫ارة‬ ِ ِ
َ ‫ ا اس ُم إ َش‬without differentiating.

2. َ‫ – حروفَالَْياب‬Particles of Affirmation:74
These are used for affirmation of a statement made earlier. These are as follows:

‫نَ َع ام‬ ‫بَ ٰلى‬ ‫إِ اي‬ ‫َج ال‬

َ‫أ‬ ‫َج اِي‬ ‫إِ َّن‬
َ‫( – ن عم‬yes)
 It is used to confirm a statement, be it positive or negative. For example,
˗ If someone says ‫َجاءَ َمياد؟‬
َ ‫( أ‬Did Zayd come?), the reply will be ‫( نَ َع ام‬yes)
meaning ‫جاءَ َمياد‬
َ (Zayd came.).
˗ If someone says ‫جاءَ َمياد؟‬ َ ‫( أ ََما‬Has Zayd not come?), the reply will be ‫نَ َع ام‬
(yes) meaning ‫جاءَ َمياد‬
َ ‫( َما‬Zayd did not come.).
َ‫لى‬
ٰ ‫( – ب‬yes, why not)
 It is used to convert a negative statement into a positive one.
e.g. If someone says ‫( أَََلا يَ ُق ام َمياد؟‬Did Zayd not stand up?), the reply will be ‫بَ ٰلى‬
(yes, why not) meaning ‫ام َمياد‬
َ َ‫( قَ اد ق‬Zayd has stood up.).
َ‫( – إَي‬yes)
 It is the same as ‫نَ َع ام‬. However it is used with an oath )‫سم‬
َ َ‫ (ق‬after a question.
ِ
e.g. َ َ‫( أَق‬Did Zayd stand up?), the reply will be ‫إِ اي َوهللا‬
If someone says ‫ام َمياد؟‬
(yes, by Allah!) meaning ‫ام َمياد‬
َ َ‫( ق‬Zayd stood up.).

74 For more examples and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 168-174.

137
 َ‫ أجل‬/ََ‫َجي‬/ َ‫( – َإَن‬yes)
 These have the same meaning as ‫نَ َع ام‬.
ِ
e.g. َ َ‫( أ‬Did Zayd come?), the reply will be ‫ إ َّن‬or ‫ َج اِي‬or
If someone says ‫جاءَ َمياد؟‬
‫َج ال‬
َ ‫( أ‬yes) meaning ‫( َجاءَ َمياد‬Zayd came.).
Note: ‫ إِ َّن‬is very rarely used for this purpose.

3. َ‫ – حرَفاَالت فسي‬Particles of Clarification:

These are used to clarify a word in a sentence. These are as follows:
‫أَ اي‬ ‫أَ ان‬ (that is)
e.g. ‫اسئَ ِل الا َق اريَةَ أَ اي أ اَه َل الا َق اريَِة‬
‫َو ا‬ And ask the town, that is, the people of the
town.
‫َو ََن َديانَاهُ أَ ان ٰيِبا ٰرِهاي ُم‬ And We called him, that is, O Ibraheem!

4. َ‫الَروفَالمصدرية‬: These are used to give a masdari meaning. These are as follows:
‫َما‬ ‫أَ ان‬ َّ ‫أ‬
‫َن‬
 ‫ َما‬and ‫ أَ ان‬come before a ‫جُالَة فِ اعلِيَّة‬.
 َّ ‫ أ‬comes before a ‫جُالَة اِ اِسيَّة‬.
‫َن‬
‫ت‬ ِ ‫)بِرحبِها( ح ِٰت إِذَا ضاقَت علَي ِهم االَر‬
e.g. ‫ض مبَا َر ُحبَ ا‬
ُ ‫َ ا َا ُ ا‬ َ َ ‫ُا‬
Until when the earth became straitened for them despite its vastness.

‫ص ُد َق‬
‫ن أَ ان تَ ا‬ ِ
‫يَ ُسر ا‬ َ ُ‫) ِص ادق‬
(‫ك‬ Your truthfulness pleases me.
‫َن َميا ًدا ََنئِم‬
َّ ‫بَلَغَِن أ‬
‫ا‬ (ُ‫)نَ اوُمه‬ (News of) Zayd’s sleeping reached me.

َّ ‫ أ‬are governing particles.

Note: ‫ أَ ان‬and ‫َن‬

5. َ‫ – حروفَالتحضيض‬Particles of Exhortation:
These are used to encourage someone to do something when they appear before ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ف اعل ُم‬.
These are as follows:
‫أََْل‬ ‫َه ََّل‬ ‫لَ اوَْل‬ ‫لَ اوَما‬
e.g. ‫صلِ اي؟‬ َ ُ‫َه ََّل ت‬ Do you not pray salah?

 These particles are also used to create regret and sorrow in the listener when they
appear before ‫فِ اعل َماض‬. Therefore, they are also called ‫ف التَّ ان ِد اِمي‬
ُ ‫ ُحُراو‬.
e.g. ‫صَر؟‬
‫ت الا َع ا‬ َ ‫صلَّاي‬ َ ‫َه ََّل‬ Have you not prayed ‘Asr salah?
e.g. ...‫ْو ْجوَْل إِ اذ َِس اعتُ ُم اوهُ قُ التُ ام‬ When you heard it, why did you not say…

138
6. َ‫ – حَرفَالت وقيع‬Particle of Anticipation:75
This is ‫قَ اد‬. An example of its usage for ‫ تَ َوقع‬is as follows.
‫ب الايَ اوَم‬ ِ
ُ ‫قَ اد يَ اق ُد ُم الاغَائ‬ Probably, the absent person will return today.

 Besides ‫تَ َوقع‬, ‫ قَ اد‬can also be used for one or more of the following. These are all more
common than its usage for ‫تَ َوقع‬.
‫تَ اق ِرياب‬: In this case, it gives ‫ فِ اعل َماض‬the meaning of near past. This usage is specific to
‫فِ اعل َماض‬.
e.g. ‫قَ اد َجاءَ َمياد‬ Zayd has arrived (recently).

‫تَ اقلِايل‬: In this case, it gives ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ

َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬the meaning of seldomness. This usage is specific
to ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ف اعل ُم‬.
e.g. ‫ إِ َّن ا اْلََو َاد قَ اد يَاب َخ ُل‬Indeed, sometimes, a generous person is miserly.
‫ َاَت ِقايق‬: In this case, it gives ‫ فِ اعل َماض‬or ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ
َ ‫ ف اعل ُم‬the meaning of certainty.
e.g. ‫قَ اد َجاءَ َمياد‬ Certainly, Zayd came.

ُ‫قَ اد يَ اعلَ ُم هللا‬ Certainly, Allah knows.

 ‫ قَ اد‬can also be used simultaneously for more than one of the above-mentioned
purposes. An example of ‫ قَ اد‬being simultaneously used for ‫تَ َوقع‬, ‫تَ اق ِرياب‬, and ‫َت ِقايق‬ ‫ َا‬, is as
follows:
ُ‫الص ََلة‬
َّ ‫ت‬ِ ‫ قَ اد قَام‬Indeed, salah has been established.
َ
Note: ‫ل‬
َّ ‫ لَ َع‬can also be used for ‫تَ َوقع‬.

7. َ‫ – حرفاَاْلستفهام‬Particles of Interrogation:76
These are َ‫ أ‬and ‫ه ال‬.
َ
e.g. ‫أ ََمياد قَائِم‬ Is Zayd standing?
‫َه ال قَ َام َمياد‬ Did Zayd stand up?

75
This is based on Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah. See Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah, 338-339.
76
For more examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Ibtida’iyyah, vol. 3, 168-171.

139
8. َ‫ – حرفَالردع‬Particle of Rebuke:
This is ‫ َك ََّل‬, which means “Never!”
 It can be used to rebuke or reprimand.
ِ
e.g. ‫َك ََّل‬ ‫ض ِر ا‬
said in response to someone who says ‫ب َميا ًدا‬ ‫( ا ا‬Hit Zayd.).
 It can also be used to convey the meaning of certainty.
e.g. َ ‫َك ََّل َس او‬
‫ف تَ اعلَ ُم او َن‬ Indeed, soon you will know.
Note: This is according to one translation. According to another, it is in the
meaning of “never.”

9. َ‫الت نوين‬: It is used for one or more of the following:

‫َتََكن‬: It is that tanween, which shows a noun to be ‫ ُم اعَرب‬.
e.g. ‫َمياد‬
‫تَان ِكاي ر‬: It is that tanween, which shows a noun to be ‫نَكَِرة‬.
e.g. ‫َر ُجل‬
‫تَ اع ِوياض‬: It is that tanween, which subsitutes a ‫ضاف إِلَاي ِه‬ َ ‫ ُم‬.
e.g. ‫ يَ اوَمئِذ‬i.e. ‫ يَ اوَم إِذَا َكا َن َك َذا‬the day when such and such happens

10. َ‫ن وَن َالتأكيد‬: It is used for emphasis in ‫ضا ِرع‬ ِ ِ

َ ‫ ُم‬, ‫ أَامر‬and ‫نَ اهي‬. It is of two forms: ‫ ثَقاي لَة‬and ‫ َخفاي َفة‬.
Both have the same meaning.

)‫الثقي لةَ(ن‬ )‫اْلفي فةَ(ن‬

‫ض ِربَ َّن‬
‫لَيَ ا‬ ‫ض ِربَ ان‬
‫لَيَ ا‬ Indeed, he should hit.
‫صَر َّن‬
ُ ‫أُنا‬ ‫صَر ان‬
ُ ‫أُنا‬ You must help.

11. َ‫حرفَل‬: It can be used for the following:

‫اِباتِ َداء‬: It appears before the ‫ ُماب تَ َدأ‬, and is used for emphasis.
e.g. ً‫َلَناتُ ام أَ َشد َراهبَة‬ Indeed, you are more feared

‫ َج َواب‬: It comes in the answer to ‫ لَ او – لَ اوَْل‬and ‫قَ َسم‬.

ِ ِ
e.g. ُ ‫ض ُه ام بِبَ اعض لََف َس َدت االَار‬
‫ض‬ َ ‫َّاس بَ اع‬
َ ‫َولَ اوَْل َدفا ُع هللا الن‬
If Allah did not repel some people by means of others, the earth would
be corrupted.
‫ص اوَم َّن َغ ًدا‬ ِ
ُ َ‫َوهللا َل‬ By Allah! I will fast tommorrow.
‫ َمائِ َدة‬: This is extra, and can be used for emphasis.
e.g. ‫إِنَّ ُه ام لَيَأا ُكلُ او َن الطَّ َع َام‬ Indeed, they eat food.

140
12. َ‫ – الَروف َالزَائدَة‬Extra Particles: These are not translated. However, they add beauty and
ِ ‫ع‬. These are:
emphasis to the meaning. They may also stop the effect (‫ ) َع َمل‬of an ‫امل‬ َ
‫إِ ان‬ ‫أَ ان‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َْل‬ ‫َل‬ ‫ِم ان‬ ‫َك‬ ِ (‫ ِمن‬،‫ َك‬،‫ب‬
‫ب‬ ‫ا‬
ِ are governing particles – ‫) َعا ِملَة‬
Usage:
‫إِ ان‬: It appears after ُ‫ َما اَلنَّافِيَة‬.
e.g. ‫َما إِ ان َمياد قَائِم‬ Zayd is not standing.

‫أَ ان‬: It appears after ‫لَ َّما‬.

e.g. ‫فَلَ َّما أَ ان َجاءَ الابَ ِشاي ُر‬ When the bearer of good news came.

‫ َما‬: It appears after the following:

‫إِ َذا‬ ‫اصِ اَب‬ ِ
e.g. َ ‫إِ َذا َما اباتُلاي‬
‫ت فَ ا‬ When you are afflicted, be patient.

‫َم ِٰت‬ e.g. ‫َم ِٰت َما تُ َسافِار اُ َسافِار‬ When you travel, I will travel.

‫أَى‬ e.g. ُ‫الر ُج ُل َجاءَ َك فَأَ اك ِرامه‬

َّ ‫أَميَا‬ Whoever comes to you, treat him
hospitably.
Here, ‫ َما‬blocked the ‫ َع َمل‬of ‫أَي‬.

‫أَيا َن‬ ِ‫أَي نما تُولوا فَث َّم وجه هللا‬

e.g. ُ ‫اَ َ َ ا َ َ ا‬ Whichever way you turn, there is the
face of Allah.

‫إِ ان‬ e.g. ‫فَِإ َّما َياتِيَ نَّ ُك ام ِم ِن ُه ًدى‬ Then, should some guidance come to
you from Me.
ِِ ِ
‫ف َجر‬
ُ ‫َح ار‬ e.g. َ ‫فَبِ َما َر امحَة م َن هللا لان‬
‫ت َلُام‬ So, it is through mercy from Allah that
you are gentle to them.
Here, ‫ َما‬did not block the ‫ َع َمل‬of ‫جر‬
َ ‫ف‬
ُ ‫ َح ار‬.
‫َْل‬ e.g. ‫َْل أُقا ِس ُم ِهبٰ َذا الابَ لَ ِد‬ I swear by this city.

‫َل‬ e.g. ‫إِن َُّه ام لَيَأا ُكلُ او َن الطَّ َع َام‬ Indeed, they eat food.

‫ِم ان‬ e.g. ‫َه ال ِم ان َخالِق َغاي ُر هللاِ؟‬ Is there a creator besides Allah?

‫َك‬ e.g. ‫س َك ِمثالِ ِه َش ايء‬ َ ‫لَاي‬ There is nothing like Him.

ِ
‫ب‬ e.g. ‫س َمياد بِ َك ِاذب‬ َ ‫لَاي‬ Zayd is not a liar.

141
13. َ‫ – حَرَوَفََالشرطََالتَْلََتزم‬Conditional Particles That Do Not Give Jazm:77

‫( أما‬however, as for, as far as…is concerned)

 It is used to explain/clarify something, which was mentioned briefly.
 ‫ ف‬should be used before its answer )‫( َج َواب‬.
e.g. ‫فَ ِمان ُه ام َش ِقى َّو َسعِايد فَأ ََّما الَّ ِذيا َن َش ُق اوا فَ ِفي النَّا ِر‬
So, some of them will be wretched and (some) blessed. As for the
wretched, they will be in the Fire.
َ‫( لو‬if)
 It is used to negate the second sentence )‫ج َواب‬
َ ( on account of the first sentence
)‫ش ارط‬
َ ( not being fulfilled.
e.g. ‫لَ او َكا َن فِاي ِه َما أٰ ِلَة إَِّْل هللاُ لََف َس َد ََت‬
If there had been gods besides Allah in them (the heavens and the
earth), they would have been corrupted.
(There will not be corruption because there is not more than one god.)

Note: If a ‫ َو‬is added to ‫ لَ او‬i.e. ‫ولَ او‬,

َ it will give the meaning of “even if/even
though” and will be known as ‫صلِيَّة‬ ‫لَ او َو ا‬.
e.g. ‫أ اَوَِلا َولَ او بِ َشاة‬ Celebrate walimah even if it be with one
(slaughtered) goat.

َ‫ لوْل‬and ‫( ل َومَا‬if such and such had not been so, …)

 Apart from being used for ‫ضايض‬ ِ ‫ َاَت‬and ‫تَان ِد امي‬, they are also used to demonstrate
that the second sentence )‫ج َواب‬ َ ( cannot be attained because of the presence of
the condition of the first sentence )‫ش ارط‬ َ (.
e.g. ‫ك بَكار‬
َ َ‫لَ اوَْل َمياد َلَل‬ Had it not been for Zayd, Bakr would have
perished.

‫( لَما‬when)
This is a ‫ ظَارف‬in the meaning of ‫ي‬ ِ ِ
 َ ‫ح ا‬. It enters upon ‫ف اعل َماض‬.
e.g. َّ ‫ت َعلَاي ِه َرَّد َعلَ َّي‬
‫الس ََل َم‬ ُ ‫لَ َّما َسلَّ ام‬ When I greeted him, he returned my
greeting.

77 For more details, examples, and exercises, please refer to al-Nahw al-Wadih, Thanawiyyah, vol. 2, 43-48.

142
14. )‫ماَ(ماَدام‬: It is that ‫ما‬,
َ which has the meaning of ‫( َما َد َام‬as long as).
e.g. ‫س اال َِماي ُر‬
َ َ‫أَقُ اوُم َما َجل‬ i.e. ً‫أَقُ اوُم َما َد َام اال َِماي ُر َجالِسا‬
I will stand as long as the leader is sitting.

15. َ‫حروفَالعطف‬: These have been discussed in Section 3.10.4

FINAL EXERCISE
Q: Go through the whole book and identify the various meaning and uses of the
following:

‫َْل‬ ‫َما‬ ‫َمن‬ ‫لَ َّما‬ ‫َم ِٰت‬ ‫أَيا َن‬ ‫أ َََّي َن‬ ‫أي‬ ‫ل‬ ‫إِ ان‬ ‫أَ ان‬
َّ ‫أ‬
‫َن‬ ‫و‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َح ِٰت‬

ِ‫الس ََلم ع ٰلى رسوِل هللا‬ َّ ‫الَ ام ُد ِِٰلِ َو‬

‫الص ََلةُ َو َّ ُ َ َ ُ ا‬ ‫فَ ا‬

143
 APPENDIX

Studying Classical/Qur’anic Arabic

There are a number of options available for the student of sacred Islamic knowledge seeking to
learn classical Arabic on his/her path to learning the deen. The following is a set of suggested
curricula for studying Arabic language, based upon the South Asian (Indo-Paki) scholarly
tradition. It is by no means the only option. To begin with, Urdu texts have been omitted.
Moreover, those following other scholarly traditions (Arab, Turkish, South East Asian) may
have a somewhat different set of books, although they will also find some overlap here.
The books whose names are only mentioned in English are English texts, while those
whose Arabic names are also given are Arabic texts. The texts increase in difficulty and
advancement downward.
General Arabic Language
Level Texts
Durus al-Lughah al-‘Arabiyyah vols. 1-3
(‫س اللغَ ِة الا َعَربِيَّ ِة‬
ُ ‫) ُد ُراو‬
Beginner to Arabic Tutor
OR Ten Lessons
Intermediate vols. 1-2
Al-‘Arabiyyah Bayna Yadayk vols. 1-3
(‫ك‬ َ ‫)اَلا َعَربِيَّةُ بَ ا‬
َ ‫ي يَ َديا‬

Nahw
Level Texts
Tasheel al-Nahw
ِ ‫) َشرح ِمائَِة ع‬
Sharh Mi’at ‘Amil (‫امل‬ َ ُ‫ا‬
OR
‘Awamil al-Nahw (‫ح ِو‬ ِ
‫) َع َوام ُل النَّ ا‬
Beginner to Hidayat al-Nahw (‫ح ِو‬ ِ
Intermediate ‫)ه َدايَةُ النَّ ا‬
OR
Al-Ajurrumiyyah (ُ‫جراوِميَّة‬
ُ ‫ )اَاآل‬with commentary
al-Tuhfah al-Saniyyah (ُ‫السنِيَّة‬
َّ ُ‫)اَلت اح َفة‬
Al-Kafiyah (ُ‫)اَلا َكافِيَة‬
Sharh ibn ‘Aqil (‫ح ابا ِن َع ِقايل‬
ُ ‫ ) َش ار‬OR
ِ ‫اْل‬
Sharh Jami (‫امي‬َ‫ ) َش ار ُح ا‬OR
‫ا‬
Advanced َّ ‫) َش ار ُح قَطا ِر النَّ ٰدى َوبَل‬
Sharh Qatr al-Nada wa Ball al-Sada (‫الص ٰدى‬
OR
ِ ‫الذ َه‬
Sharh Shudhur al-Dhahab (‫ب‬ َّ ‫) َش ار ُح ُش ُذ اوِر‬

145
 ِ‫اضح لِالم َدا ِر ِس ا‬
The texts al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah vols. 1-3 (‫اْلباتِ َدائِيَّ ِة‬ ِ
َ ُ ‫الا َو‬ ‫)اَلنَّ اح ُو‬
and al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Thanawiyyah vols. 1-3 (‫س الثَّانَ ِويَِّة‬ ِ ‫اض ُح لِال َم َدا ِر‬
ِ ‫الاو‬
َ ‫َّح ُو‬
‫)اَلن ا‬
belong to the intermediate to advanced level. The six volumes in general, and the three al-
Ibtida’iyyah volumes in particular, can be used in place of, or in conjunction with Tasheel al-
Nahw. The six could also be used in conjunction with Hidayat al-Nahw. Almost always, one
of these texts has something that the other does not.

Sarf
Level Texts
Beginner Fundamentals of Classical Arabic vol. 1
From the Treasures of Arabic Morphology
Intermediate ‘Ilm al-Seeghah (‫الصاي غَ ِة‬
ِ ‫ ) ِع الم‬OR
ُ
ِ ‫الصر‬ ِ ِ
Shadha al-‘Arf fi Fann al-Sarf (‫ف‬ ‫) َش َذا الا َع ارف اف فَ ِن َّ ا‬

Arabic Reading/Literature
Level Texts
ِ ‫صص النَّبِيِ ا‬
Qasas al-Nabiyyin vol. 1 (‫ي‬
Al-Qira’ah al-Rashidah vol. 1
ُ َ َ‫)ق‬
ِ ‫صص النَّبِيِ ا‬
Qasas al-Nabiyyin vol. 2 (‫ي‬
Beginner
َّ ُ‫)اَلا ِقَراءَة‬
ِ ‫الر‬
(ُ‫اش َدة‬ ُ َ َ‫)ق‬
ِ ‫صص النَّبِيِ ا‬
Qasas al-Nabiyyin vol. 3 (‫ي‬ ُ َ َ‫)ق‬
ِ ‫صص النَّبِيِ ا‬
Qasas al-Nabiyyin vol. 4 (‫ي‬
Al-Qira’ah al-Rashidah vol. 2 ُ َ َ‫)ق‬
َّ ُ‫)اَلا ِقَراءَة‬
ِ ‫الر‬
(ُ‫اش َدة‬
Intermediate
ِ ‫صص النَّبِيِ ا‬
Qasas al-Nabiyyin vol. 5 (‫ي‬
Nafhat al-‘Arab ُ َ َ‫)ق‬
(‫ب‬ِ ‫)نَ افحةُ الاعر‬
ََ َ
Mukhtarat min Adab al-‘Arab vol. 1
(‫ب‬ِ ‫ب الاعر‬
ِ ِ
Advanced ََ ‫)ُمُاتَ َارات م ان أََد‬ Al-Maqamat al-Haririyyah
Mukhtarat min Adab al-‘Arab vol. 2 (ُ‫الَِريا ِريَّة‬
‫ات ا‬
ُ ‫)اَلا َم َق َام‬
ِ ‫ب الاعر‬
(‫ب‬ ِ ِ
ََ ‫)ُمُاتَ َارات م ان أََد‬

Arabic Rhetoric (Balaghah)

Level Texts
Beginner Durus al-Balaghah (‫س الابَ ََل َغ ِة‬
ُ ‫) ُد ُراو‬
Al-Balaghah al-Wadihah (ُ‫حة‬ ِ
َ ‫)اَلابَ ََل َغةُ الا َواض‬
ِ َ‫ص الا ِم افت‬
Talkhees al-Miftah (‫اح‬ ِ
ُ ‫)تَ الخاي‬
Intermediate
to Advanced
OR
ِ
its commentary Mukhtasar al-Ma‘ani (‫ان‬
‫صُر الا َم َع ا‬
َ َ‫)ُمُات‬

146
Suggested Curriculum
Below, we have provided a suggested curriculum based upon some of the texts given above
that could be followed as part of an overall traditional Arabic & Islamic Studies curriculum.
This curriculum is based on a two-semester academic year.

Year Sem Texts

1 Ten Lessons Fundamentals vol. 1 Durus al-Lughah vol. 1

Durus al-
Lughah vol.
Tasheel al-Nahw
1 1 Qasas al-
(using Al-Nahw al- Treasures of Arabic
(continued if Nabiyyin
2 Wadih Ibtida’iyyah Arabic Tutor
not vols. 1 &
& Thanawiyyah for Morphology vol. 1
completed, 2
reference/examples)
followed by
vol. 2)
Tasheel al-Nahw Arabic
(continued, if not Tutor
completed) followed Treasures of vol. 1 Qasas al-
by selected readings Arabic (continued Nabiyyin
1 Durus al-
& exercises from al- Morphology if not vols. 3 &
Lughah vol.
Nahw al-Wadih (continued) completed, 4
2 (continued
Ibtida’iyyah & followed by
2 if not
Thanawiyyah vol. 2)
completed,
‘Awaamil
followed by
al-Nahw
vol. 3) Qasas al-
Hidayat OR ‘Ilm al- Nafhat al-
2 Nabiyyin
al-Nahw Sharh Seeghah ‘Arab
vol. 5
Mi’at
‘Aamil
1 Durus al-Balaghah
Durus al-Balaghah (continued, if
Sharh ibn ‘Aqil not completed) followed by
3 Mukhtarat vol. 1
2 vol. 1 selected readings from Talkhees al-
Miftah OR its commentary
Mukhtasar al-Ma‘ani

147
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

‘Aamir Bashir (ed.). (2012). Ten Lessons of Arabic. Buffalo: Dār al-Saʻādah Publications.
‘Abd al-Ghaniyy al-Daqr. (1986). Mu‘jam al-Qawa‘id al-‘Arabiyyah fi al-Nahw wa al-Tasreef
[Handbook of Arabic Grammar Rules]. Damascus: Dar al-Qalam.
‘Abd al-Majid Nadvi. (n.d.). Vol. 1, Mu‘allim al-Insha’ [Composition Tutor]. Karachi:
Majlis Nashriat-e-Islam.
‘Abd al-Rahman al-Fawzan, Mukhtar Husayn & Muhammad ‘Abd al-Khaliq. (2007). Al-
‘Arabiyyah bayna Yadayk [Arabic Before You] (Vols. 1-3). Riyadh: Al-‘Arabiyyah li al-
Jameeʻ.
‘Abd al-Sattar Khan. (2007). Arabic Tutor (Vols. 1-2) (Ebrahim Muhammad, Trans.).
Camperdown, South Africa: Madrasah Inʻamiyyah.
‘Abdullah ibn ‘Aqil. (1980). Sharh ibn ‘Aqil ‘ala Alfiyyat ibn Malik [Ibn ‘Aqil’s Commentary
on The One-thousand Verse Poem of Ibn Malik] (Vols. 1-4). Cairo: Dar al-Turath.
Abul Hasan ‘Ali al-Nadwi. (n.d.). Al-Qira’ah al-Rashidah [The Rightly Guided Reading]
(Vols. 1-2). Karachi: Majlis Nashriat-e-Islam.
Abul Hasan ‘Ali al-Nadwi. (n.d.). Mukhtarat min Adab al-‘Arab [Selections from the
Literature of the Arabs] (Vols. 1-2). Karachi: Majlis Nashriat-e-Islam.
Abul Hasan ‘Ali al-Nadwi. (n.d.). Qasas al-Nabiyyin [Stories of the Prophets] (Vols. 1-5).
Karachi: Majlis Nashriat-e-Islam.
‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen. (n.d.). Al-Balaghah al-Wadihah [Clear Rhetoric]. Cairo:
Dar al-Ma‘arif.
‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen. (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Ibtida’iyyah
[Clear Grammar for Elementary Schools], (Vols. 1-3). Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
‘Ali al-Jaarim & Mustafa Ameen. (n.d.). Al-Nahw al-Wadih li al-Madaris al-Thanawiyyah
[Clear Grammar for Secondary Schools], (Vols. 1-3). Cairo: Dar al-Ma‘arif.
Al-Andalusi, ibn Hayyan. (2008). Hidayat al-Nahw [Guide to Grammar]. Karachi:
Maktabat al-Bushra.
Al-Ansari, Abdullah ibn Hisham. (1994). Sharh Qatr al-Nada wa Ball al-Sada [Commentary
on The Drops of Dew and the Moisture of Thirst], with notes by Muhammad Muhy al-
Din ‘Abd al-Hamid. Beirut: al-Maktabah al-‘Asariyyah.
Al-Ansari, Abdullah ibn Hisham. (1990). Sharh Shudhur al-Dhahab [Commentary on The
Scattered Particles of Gold]. Beirut: Maktabat Lubnan.
Al-Hamlawi, Ahmad ibn Muhammad. (2005). Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Muʻti (ed.). Shadha
al-‘Arf fi Fann al-Sarf [Strong Fragrance Regarding the Science of Morphology].
Riyadh: Dar al-Kayan.

149
Al-Hariri, Muhammad al-Qasim ibn ‘Ali. (n.d.). Al-Maqamat al-Haririyyah [The Assemblies
of al-Hariri]. Lahore: Maktabah Rahmaniyyah.
Al-Jurjani, ‘Abd al-Qahir. (n.d.). Sharh Mi’at ‘Amil [Commentary of Hundred Governing
Words]. Karachi: Qadimi Kutubkhana.
Al-Qazwini, Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Rahman. (2010). Talkhees al-Miftah [Summary of The
Key]. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Al-Taftazani, Mas‘ood ibn ‘Umar. (2010). Mukhtasar al-Ma‘ani [Summary of Rhetoric].
Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Charthawali, Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad. (n.d.). ‘Ilm al-Nahw [Science of Grammar].
Karachi: Altaf & Sons.
Charthawali, Mawlana Mushtaq Ahmad. (2010). ‘Awamil al-Nahw [Governing Words of
Grammar]. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Dockrat, Mawlana Hasan. (2003). Tawdeeh al-Nahw: A Simplified Arabic Grammar.
Azaadville, South Africa: Madrasah Arabiah Islamia.
Ebrahim Muhammad. (2006). From the Treasures of Arabic Morphology. Camperdown,
South Africa: Madrasah Inʻamiyyah.
Husain Abdul Sattar. (2002). Vol. 1, Fundamentals of Classical Arabic. Chicago: Faqir
Publications.
Ibn al-Hajib. (2008). Al-Kafiyah [The Sufficient]. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Jami, ‘Abd al-Rahman. (2011). Sharh al-Mulla al-Jami ‘ala al-Kafiyah [The Commentary of
Mulla Jami on The Sufficient]. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Lane, E. W. (1968). Book I, Parts 4-6, An Arabic-English Lexicon. Beirut: Librairie du Liban.
Muhammad Diyab, Sultan Muhammad, et. al. (2009). Durus al-Balaghah [Lessons of
Rhetoric]. Karachi: Maktabat al-Bushra.
Muhammad ‘Inayat Ahmad. (n.d.). ‘Ilm al-Seeghah [Science of Forms]. (Wali Khan al-
Muzaffar, Trans.). Karachi: al-Maktabah al-Faruqiyyah.
Muhammad I‘zaz ‘Ali. (2010). Nafhat al-‘Arab [Fragrance of the Arabs]. Karachi: Maktabat
al-Bushra.
Muhammad Muhy al-Din ‘Abd al-Hamid. (1989). Al-Tuhfah al-Saniyyah bi Sharh
Muqaddamat al-Ajurrumiyyah [The Sublime Gift of Commentary on the Ajurrumi
Prolegomena]. Cairo: Maktabat al-Sunnah
V. ‘Abd al-Rahim. (2009). Durus al-Lughah al-‘Arabiyyah [Lessons of Arabic Language], (Vols.
1-3). Chennai: Islamic Foundation.

150